PC Programming Manual Model No. KX-NCP500/KX

PC Programming Manual Model No. KX-NCP500/KX
PC Programming Manual
Pure IP-PBX
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200/KX-TDE600
Model No.
Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Pure IP-PBX.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: PBMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: PMMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later
KX-TDE600: PGMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later
Introduction
Introduction
About this Programming Manual
The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic
Pure IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using the Maintenance Console software.
The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections:
Section 1, Overview
Provides an overview of programming the PBX.
Section 2, Introduction of Maintenance Console
Explains the layout and menus of the Maintenance Console.
Sections 3 – 13, Maintenance Console Operating Instructions
Serves as reference operating instructions when using the Maintenance Console software to programme the
PBX.
Section 14, Appendix
Provides a list of changes from the previous version of each model.
Feature Programming References
Provides a list of all related PC programming items for each feature.
References Found in the PC Programming Manual
Programming Manual References
Related sections of the PC Programming Manual are listed for your reference.
Feature Guide References
The Feature Guide explains what the PBX can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and
facilities. Sections from the Feature Guide are listed throughout this manual for your reference.
Installation Manual References
The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX.
Sections from the Installation Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference.
Links to Other Pages and Manuals
If you are viewing this manual with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of this and other PBX
manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section.
Linked items include:
• Installation Manual References
• PC Programming Manual References
• Feature Guide References
Safety Notices
Please observe the safety notices in this manual in order to avoid danger to users or other people, and prevent
damage to property.
The notices are classified as follows, according to the severity of injury or damage:
2
PC Programming Manual
Introduction
WARNING
This notice means that misuse could result in death
or serious injury.
CAUTION
This notice means that misuse could result in injury
or damage to property.
WARNING
Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise.
These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an
authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre.
CAUTION
Do not remove the SD Memory Card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so may cause the PBX to
fail to start when you try to restart the system.
Notice
1. During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system
data to the SD Memory Card. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or if the system is reset for
some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost. However, if system data has been saved to the
SD Memory Card, it can be easily restored.
To save the system data to the SD Memory Card, (1) click the "SD Memory Backup" icon before
resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) exit the Maintenance Console so that the PBX
automatically saves the system data.
2. Maintenance Console cannot be used to program the PBX when the PBX is being powered by the
backup batteries (for example, during a power cut). This is to prevent damage to the SD Memory Card
that may occur if the backup battery power runs out while data is being written to the card.
3. The PC will not perform any shutdown operation, or enter the power-saving system standby mode
while the Maintenance Console is connected to the PBX.
To perform either of the operations above, first close the connection to the PBX.
Trademarks
•
•
•
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
NOTES
•
•
•
•
The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of
this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see How do I confirm the software version
of the PBX or installed cards? in Maintenance Console Software in 2.7.1 Frequently Asked
Questions (FAQ).
Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas, or for some
PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
The PBX supports the Virtual 16-Channel SIP Trunk Card, and configuration of the card is done using the
Maintenance Console. However, all of the related programming information is explained in the
Programming Manual for Virtual SIP Trunk Card, and is therefore omitted from this manual.
Product specifications, including text displayed by the software, are subject to change without notice.
PC Programming Manual
3
Introduction
•
4
In some cases, additional information, including updates to this and other manuals, is included in the
Maintenance Console’s Information before programming. Install the latest version of Maintenance
Console to view this information.
In this manual, the suffix of each model number (e.g., KX-NCP500NE) is omitted unless necessary.
PC Programming Manual
Introduction
The KX-NCP500UK/KX-NCP1000UK/KX-NCP500VUK/KX-NCP500XUK,
KX-NCP500NE/KX-NCP1000NE/KX-NCP500VNE/KX-NCP500XNE, and
KX-NCP500GR/KX-NCP1000GR are designed to interwork with the:
• Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate
access
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate
access
• ONP 2048 kbit/s digital structured leased lines (D2048S)
The KX-TDE100UK/KX-TDE200UK, KX-TDE100NE/KX-TDE200NE, KX-TDE100GR/
KX-TDE200GR, and KX-TDE100CE/KX-TDE200CE are designed to interwork with the:
• Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate
access
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate
access
• ONP 2048 kbit/s digital structured leased lines (D2048S)
The KX-TDE600UK, KX-TDE600NE, and KX-TDE600GR are designed to interwork with
the:
• Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate
access
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate
access
• ONP 2048 kbit/s digital structured leased lines (D2048S)
Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd./Panasonic System Networks Company U.K. Ltd. declares that
the KX-NCP500UK/KX-NCP1000UK/KX-NCP500VUK/KX-NCP500XUK/KX-NCP500NE/
KX-NCP1000NE/KX-NCP500VNE/KX-NCP500XNE/KX-NCP500GR/KX-NCP1000GR,
KX-TDE100UK/KX-TDE200UK/KX-TDE100NE/KX-TDE200NE/KX-TDE100GR/KX-TDE200GR/
KX-TDE100CE/KX-TDE200CE, and KX-TDE600UK/KX-TDE600NE/KX-TDE600GR are in compliance
with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio & Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1999/5/EC.
Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available
for download by visiting:
http://www.doc.panasonic.de
Contact to Authorised Representative:
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
PC Programming Manual
5
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Overview .................................................................................................13
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
Introduction .....................................................................................................................14
Introduction .....................................................................................................................14
Entering Characters .......................................................................................................15
PC Programming .............................................................................................................19
Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console ...........................................................19
Password Security ..........................................................................................................24
2 Introduction of Maintenance Console ..................................................25
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.4
2.4.1
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.5.6
2.5.7
2.5.8
2.5.9
2.5.10
2.5.11
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.6.6
2.6.7
6
Introduction .....................................................................................................................26
Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes .....................................................26
Access Levels ................................................................................................................29
Software Interface ..........................................................................................................33
Card Status ....................................................................................................................36
Display Options ..............................................................................................................37
Extension Number Setting ..............................................................................................38
Programme launcher ......................................................................................................39
Programme launcher—New ...........................................................................................39
Programme launcher—Open .........................................................................................40
Programme launcher—Connect—RS-232C ..................................................................41
Programme launcher—Connect—USB ..........................................................................42
Programme launcher—Connect—LAN ..........................................................................43
Programme launcher—Connect—Modem .....................................................................44
Programme launcher—Connect—ISDN Remote ...........................................................45
Programme launcher—Connect—Profile Setup .............................................................46
File ....................................................................................................................................47
File—Close .....................................................................................................................47
File—Save ......................................................................................................................48
File—Save As .................................................................................................................49
File—Exit ........................................................................................................................50
Disconnect .......................................................................................................................51
Disconnect—Disconnect ................................................................................................51
Tool ...................................................................................................................................52
Tool—SD memory backup .............................................................................................52
Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration ...............................................................................53
Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear .........................................................................................54
Tool—DXDP All OUS .....................................................................................................55
Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording ...............................................56
Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage .............................................57
Tool—Call Pickup for My Group .....................................................................................58
Tool—Extension List View ..............................................................................................59
Tool—Import ...................................................................................................................60
Tool—Export ..................................................................................................................64
Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level ...........................................65
Utility ................................................................................................................................66
Utility—Diagnosis ...........................................................................................................66
Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) ...................................................................69
Utility—File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC ...................................................................75
Utility—SD Card File View and Load ..............................................................................76
Utility—SD Card File Delete ...........................................................................................77
Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX .....................................................................78
Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC .....................................................................79
PC Programming Manual
Table of Contents
2.6.8
2.6.9
2.6.10
2.6.11
2.6.12
2.6.13
2.6.14
2.6.15
2.6.16
2.6.17
2.6.18
2.6.19
2.6.20
2.6.21
2.6.22
2.7
2.7.1
Utility—Error Log ............................................................................................................80
Utility—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor ...............................................................................83
Utility—T1/E1 Line Trace ...............................................................................................84
Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ................................................................................85
Utility—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace .................................................................................86
Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report ..................................................................................87
Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information ...................................................................88
Utility—CS Information ...................................................................................................89
Utility—PS Information ...................................................................................................90
Utility—CS Status Monitor ..............................................................................................91
Utility—Ping ....................................................................................................................92
Utility—File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment—IP-CS/NT400 ...........................................93
Utility—File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment—NT3xx ......................................................94
Utility—Card Software Timed Update ............................................................................95
Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command ...........................................................96
Help ..................................................................................................................................98
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ...............................................................................98
3 [1] Configuration ..................................................................................109
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.25
3.26
3.27
3.28
3.29
3.30
3.31
3.32
3.33
[1-1] Slot .........................................................................................................................110
[1-1] Slot—Summary .....................................................................................................117
[1-1] Slot—Activation Key ............................................................................................122
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) ......................................................................125
[1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property ..................................................................................146
[1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command ....................................................150
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port ...................................................151
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—Connection Command .........153
[1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway ..........................................................154
[1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GK Settings ..................................177
[1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings .................................178
[1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP ............................................185
[1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern .................................187
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension ........................................................188
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension .........................................................195
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Connection Command ...............204
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension ......................................................205
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port ...............................................209
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection
Command .......................................................................................................................214
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS .....................................................................215
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS ......................................................................222
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS—Connection Command ............................230
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type ...............................................................231
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port ..................................................................238
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command ........................246
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View ....................................247
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only) .....................................248
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series
only) ................................................................................................................................251
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type ..........................................................................252
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port ...........................................................................265
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command .................................271
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ............................................................272
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port .............................................................................287
PC Programming Manual
7
Table of Contents
3.34
3.35
3.36
3.37
3.38
3.39
3.40
3.41
3.42
3.43
3.44
3.45
3.46
3.47
3.48
3.49
3.50
3.51
3.52
3.53
3.54
3.55
3.56
3.57
3.58
3.59
3.60
3.61
3.62
3.63
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command ...................................312
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port .............................................................................313
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command ...................................335
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type .............................................................................336
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port ...............................................................................347
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command .....................................356
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type .............................................................................357
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting .........................................366
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 ............................................374
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 ............................................380
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port ..............................................................................388
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection Command ....................................398
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) ........................................399
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only) .........................................408
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series
only) ................................................................................................................................416
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only) .......................................417
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only) ........................................422
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series
only) ................................................................................................................................429
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only) ..................................430
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only) ...................................432
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series
only) ................................................................................................................................434
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) ................................435
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series
only) ................................................................................................................................439
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) ........................441
[1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property ..................................................................................447
[1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command ....................................................453
[1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup ...........................................................................455
[1-2] Portable Station ....................................................................................................457
[1-3] Option ....................................................................................................................461
[1-4] Clock Priority ........................................................................................................463
4 [2] System .............................................................................................465
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
8
[2-1-1] Date & Time—Date & Time Setting ..................................................................466
[2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving ............................................................467
[2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving ..............................469
[2-2] Operator & BGM ...................................................................................................471
[2-3] Timers & Counters ...............................................................................................474
[2-4] Week Table ............................................................................................................495
[2-4] Week Table—Time Setting ...................................................................................496
[2-5] Holiday Table ........................................................................................................499
[2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main .....................................................................................501
[2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial ............................................................................532
[2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature ......................................................534
[2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings ......................................................................538
[2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block ............................................................556
[2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block ..............................................................557
[2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO ..................................................................558
[2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone ....................................................559
[2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others ............................................................560
[2-9] System Options ....................................................................................................563
[2-10] Extension CID Settings ......................................................................................594
PC Programming Manual
Table of Contents
4.20
4.21
[2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH ..............................................................................599
[2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card ...........................................................................................601
5 [3] Group ...............................................................................................603
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
5.24
5.25
5.26
5.27
5.28
[3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings ............................................................................604
[3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority ..............................................................612
[3-1-3] Caller ID Modification ........................................................................................613
[3-1-4] Dialling Plan .......................................................................................................618
[3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign ..............................................................................620
[3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate ..............................................................................621
[3-2] User Group ............................................................................................................622
[3-3] Call Pickup Group ................................................................................................624
[3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting ...........................................................................626
[3-4] Paging Group ........................................................................................................627
[3-4] Paging Group—All Setting ..................................................................................629
[3-4] Paging Group—External Pager ...........................................................................630
[3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings ......................................632
[3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List .............648
[3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table ..............................650
[3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous ........................................651
[3-6] Extension Hunting Group ....................................................................................654
[3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List ...........................................................656
[3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings ..................................................................657
[3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings ........................................................................659
[3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List ...............................................661
[3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings ...............................................................664
[3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings .................................................................673
[3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List ........................................675
[3-9] PS Ring Group ......................................................................................................676
[3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List .............................................................................678
[3-10] Conference Group ..............................................................................................679
[3-10] Conference Group—Member List .....................................................................681
6 [4] Extension .........................................................................................683
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
6.17
6.18
[4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings ............................................................684
[4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate ................................723
[4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND ............................................................................726
[4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial ..........................................................................727
[4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button ...................................................................728
[4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy ....................746
[4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button ...........................................................................747
[4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send .....................................................748
[4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message .................................................749
[4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings .............................................................752
[4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate ................................784
[4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND ............................................................................787
[4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button ...................................................................788
[4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy ....................802
[4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send ......................................................803
[4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message .................................................804
[4-3] DSS Console .........................................................................................................806
[4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy .....................................................................824
7 [5] Optional Device ...............................................................................825
7.1
[5-1] Doorphone ............................................................................................................826
PC Programming Manual
9
Table of Contents
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
[5-2] External Pager ......................................................................................................830
[5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System .........................................................................831
[5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message ......................................................................839
[5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM .......................................................................................842
[5-4] External Relay .......................................................................................................847
[5-5] External Sensor ....................................................................................................850
8 [6] Feature .............................................................................................853
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
[6-1] System Speed Dial ...............................................................................................854
[6-2] Hotel & Charge ......................................................................................................856
[6-3] Verification Code ..................................................................................................866
[6-4] Second Dial Tone .................................................................................................869
[6-5] Absent Message ...................................................................................................870
[6-6] Tenant ....................................................................................................................871
9 [7] TRS ...................................................................................................873
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
[7-1] Denied Code ..........................................................................................................874
[7-2] Exception Code ....................................................................................................875
[7-3] Special Carrier ......................................................................................................876
[7-4] Emergency Dial .....................................................................................................877
[7-5] Miscellaneous .......................................................................................................878
10 [8] ARS ..................................................................................................881
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
[8-1] System Setting ......................................................................................................882
[8-2] Leading Number ...................................................................................................883
[8-3] Routing Plan Time ................................................................................................885
[8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting .......................................................................886
[8-4] Routing Plan Priority ............................................................................................887
[8-5] Carrier ....................................................................................................................888
[8-6] Leading Number Exception .................................................................................891
[8-7] Authorisation Code for TRG ................................................................................892
11 [9] Private Network ...............................................................................893
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
[9-1] TIE Table ................................................................................................................894
[9-2] Network Data Transmission ................................................................................898
[9-3] Network Operator (VoIP) ......................................................................................902
[9-4] NDSS Key Table ....................................................................................................904
12 [10] CO & Incoming Call ......................................................................907
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
[10-1] CO Line Settings .................................................................................................908
[10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings ..................................................................................911
[10-3] DDI / DID Table ....................................................................................................922
[10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration ...........................................................925
[10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate ........................................................................927
[10-4] MSN Table ...........................................................................................................929
[10-5] Miscellaneous .....................................................................................................934
13 [11] Maintenance ..................................................................................937
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
10
[11-1] Main .....................................................................................................................938
[11-2] PT Programming Access ...................................................................................960
[11-3] Power Failure Transfer .......................................................................................961
[11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting ..................................................................................963
[11-4-2] SNMP—Manager ..............................................................................................965
[11-5] Air Synchronisation ...........................................................................................968
PC Programming Manual
Table of Contents
14 Appendix ...............................................................................................975
14.1
Revision History ............................................................................................................976
14.1.1
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx ...............................976
14.1.2
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 4.1xxx ...............................978
14.1.3
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx ...............................980
14.1.4
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx .................................982
14.1.5
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.01xx .................................983
14.1.6
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx .................................984
14.1.7
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 4.1xxx .................................986
14.1.8
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx .................................987
14.1.9
KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx .....................................................989
14.1.10 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 4.1xxx .....................................................991
14.1.11 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx .....................................................992
Feature Programming References ...........................................................995
PC Programming Manual
11
Table of Contents
12
PC Programming Manual
Section 1
Overview
This section provides an overview of programming the
PBX.
PC Programming Manual
13
1.1.1 Introduction
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 Introduction
These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the
PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your
requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system
programming".
Only one person can perform system programming at a time. Any other users trying to enter programming
mode will be denied access.
Ways to Programme
There are two programming methods:
• PC (Personal Computer) Programming
All features and settings of the PBX can be programmed through PC programming with Maintenance
Console. Installing and starting the Maintenance Console is described in Section 1.2 PC Programming.
Individual PC programming items are described in Section 2 Introduction of Maintenance Console.
• PT (Proprietary Telephone) Programming
A subset of the features and settings of the PBX can be programmed using a PT. PT programming is
described in the PT Programming Manual.
14
PC Programming Manual
1.1.2 Entering Characters
1.1.2 Entering Characters
The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other
text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX.
Table 1 (Standard)
PC Programming Manual
15
1.1.2 Entering Characters
Table 2 (For CE model)
16
PC Programming Manual
1.1.2 Entering Characters
Table 3 (For RU model)
PC Programming Manual
17
1.1.2 Entering Characters
Table 4 (For GR model)
18
PC Programming Manual
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
1.2 PC Programming
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using the Maintenance
Console.
This section describes how to install and start the Maintenance Console.
System Requirements
Required Operating System
• Microsoft® Windows® XP, Windows Vista® Business, or Windows 7 Professional operating system
Minimum Hardware Requirements
• HDD: 100 MB of available hard disk space
• The PC must fulfill the hardware requirements of the installed Microsoft Windows operating system.
Recommended Display Settings
• Screen resolution: XGA (1024 ´ 768)
• DPI setting: Normal size (96 DPI)
Installing the Maintenance Console
Note
•
•
•
Make sure to install and use the latest version of the Maintenance Console.
To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows XP Professional, you must be logged in
as a user in either the "Administrators" or "Power Users" group.
To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows Vista Business or Windows 7 Professional,
you must be logged in as a user in the "Administrators" group.
1. Copy the setup file of the Maintenance Console to your PC.
2. Double-click the setup file to run the installer.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the installation wizard.
Starting the Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items (Quick
Setup)
When you start the Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code and connect to the PBX
for the first time after initialisation (with the factory default setting), Quick Setup will launch automatically. During
Quick Setup, you will set up the following basic items. For details about the basic items, refer to "2.3.4 Quick
Setup" in the Feature Guide.
1.
Connect the PC to the PBX with an Ethernet straight cable or RS-232C cross cable.
2.
Start the Maintenance Console from the Start menu.
3.
"Information before programming" appears.
a. Carefully read this important additional information, which includes updates to this and other
manuals.
b. Click OK to close this window.
PC Programming Manual
19
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
4.
a. Enter the Installer Level Programmer Code (default: INSTALLER).
Note
There are 2 other Programmer Codes with limited authorisation: Administrator Level (default:
ADMIN), and User Level (default: USER). (® 1.2.2 Password Security)
b. Click OK.
5.
Click Connect.
6.
a. Select your PBX model from PBX Model.
b. Select the LAN or RS-232C tab, depending on the type of PC connection with the PBX.
c. Specify the settings as required. (See 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software
Modes)
Note
When connecting to the PBX for the first time selecting LAN, the IP Address and Port
Number must be set to 192.168.0.101 and 35300 respectively.
d. Enter the system password for installer (default: 1234).
e. Click Connect.
7.
When country/area data do not match:
a. Click OK to replace the country/area data of the PBX. Replacement may take several minutes to
complete.
b. Follow the procedure described in "3.13.1 Starting the PBX" (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000),
"3.13.1 Starting the PBX" (for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), or "3.15.1 Starting the PBX" (for
KX-TDE600) in the Installation Manual and restart the PBX.
c. Repeat step 5 to reconnect the Maintenance Console to the PBX.
8.
Follow the instructions of the Quick Setup wizard for the basic items in Quick Setup.
9.
On the IP addressing information screen, the information for the MPR card can be assigned
automatically through a DHCP server or entered manually.
Note
If you change any information on this screen and click Apply, the PBX will need to be reset.
When using a DHCP server:
a. Select Enable for the DHCP Client setting.
b. Click Apply.
Note
The boxes will turn grey and the IP addresses will
be assigned automatically after the PBX is reset.
20
PC Programming Manual
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
When not using a DHCP server:
a. Select Disable for the DHCP Client setting.
b. For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE200, type the IP address of the MPR card in
the IP Address for IPCMPR Card box. For
KX-TDE600, type the IP address of the MPR card in
the IP Address for IPCEMPR Card box.*1
c. In the IP Address for VoIP-DSP box, type the IP
address of the DSP card.*2
d. In the Subnet Mask box, type the subnet mask
address of the network.*3
e. In the Default Gateway box, type the IP address of
the default gateway.*4
f. Click Apply.
After Quick Setup is completed, if the IP addressing information was not changed and a V-IPEXT card was
installed during setup, the IP-PT registration screen is displayed. For information on registering IP-PTs to
the PBX, see 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension.
You may now begin programming the PBX.
Notice
•
•
•
*1
*2
*3
*4
Do not change the IP addresses of the MPR and DSP cards once IP telephones are registered to the
PBX using these IP addresses.
The IP telephones will not operate properly if these IP addresses are changed.
A DHCP server must be able to use a "client identifier" option specified by RFC 2131.
The PBX will not start properly if the IP addresses cannot be assigned automatically by the DHCP
server when DHCP Client is set to Enable. In this case, you need to consult your network administrator
because the DHCP server on your network may not be running or a network failure may have occurred.
If the DHCP server is not available, change the DHCP Client setting to Disable and set fixed IP
addresses, then restart the PBX.
To change the DHCP Client setting, connect the PC with an RS-232C cross cable or Ethernet straight
cable. When connecting the PC with an Ethernet straight cable, make sure the PBX is disconnected
from the LAN and then connect the PC with an Ethernet straight cable using 192.168.0.101 for the IP
address of the MPR card.
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
Valid subnet mask address range: "0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255" (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255)
Valid IP address range: "0.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
PC Programming Manual
21
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
PBX Web Manager
It is possible to use a PC with the Maintenance Console (PBX Unified PC Maintenance Console) installed, as
a Web server. This allows users to configure the PBX via a Web browser on a local client, or a remote PC
through the Internet.
Client
Server
PBX
IP Network
Remote PC
If Maintenance Console is installed on the client PC, a Web server is not necessary.
PBX
Server/Client
Accessing PBX Web Manager
PBX Web Manager can be enabled during the installation of the Maintenance Console. It can also be enabled
in Options.
Note
•
When starting the Maintenance Console, if there is less than 80 MB of available memory, this feature
is automatically disabled.
• Only one user can access Maintenance Console or PBX Web Manager at any given time.
To start PBX Web Manager:
1.
If the PC is not the Web server:
Launch a Web browsing application and enter the
following URL:
"http://xxx:8181/INDEX.ASPX"
’xxx’ should be replaced with the server’s IP address.
If the PC is the Web server:
Double-click the PBX Web Manager icon in the system
tray(
).
22
PC Programming Manual
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
2.
At the login screen input the PBX’s IP address, port, and
password.
Any profiles using LAN connection that have been saved
when accessing the Maintenance Console directly will
be automatically displayed, for easy access to your PBX.
3.
Click Connect.
PBX Web Manager Main Menu
After successful login the main menu will appear where settings can be changed.
Note
While logged in, if there is no activity for approximately 10 minutes, PBX Web Manager will automatically
disconnect.
PC Programming Manual
23
1.2.2 Password Security
1.2.2 Password Security
To maintain system security, system passwords are required to access certain programming functions of the
PBX. By giving different users access to different passwords, it is possible to control the amount of
programming that each user is able to perform.
The following types of system passwords are available:
Password
Description
System Password for User
Used with the user-level programmer code to access
user-level PC programming. The installer can specify
which system programming settings are available.
System Password for
Administrator
Used with the administrator-level programmer code to
access administrator-level PC programming. The
installer can specify which system programming settings
are available.
System Password for
Installer
Used with the installer-level programmer code to access
installer-level PC programming. All system programming
settings are available.
Format
4 – 10
characters
The three programmer codes used for PC programming can be set through Maintenance Console. For more
information about programmer codes, see 2.1.2 Access Levels.
CAUTION
To the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password
1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and inform
the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become known to
others.
3. The PBX has default passwords preset. For security, change these passwords the first time that you
programme the PBX.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in system
passwords, see 1.1.2 Entering Characters.
24
PC Programming Manual
Section 2
Introduction of Maintenance Console
This section serves as reference operating instructions
when using the Maintenance Console software to
programme the PBX.
PC Programming Manual
25
2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes
2.1 Introduction
2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes
Every time Maintenance Console is started, a dialogue box will appear. From here, you can enter any of the
2 available software modes.
• Batch mode
Batch mode allows you to create new system data files, and make modifications to system data files stored
on your PC, without being connected to the PBX. When you connect to the PBX, the modified data will be
uploaded at one time.
• Interactive mode
Interactive mode allows you to directly modify the system data and settings stored in the PBX’s memory
from a PC that is connected to the PBX. This mode displays the system data that is currently being used
by the PBX, rather than the system data stored on the SD memory card. Data can be modified and results
displayed in real time.
To start Maintenance Console in Batch mode
1. Enter the relevant programmer code.
2. Click OK.
The programme launcher will appear.
3. Select an option.
• Select New to create a new system data file.
• Select Open to open an existing system data file.
To start Maintenance Console in Interactive mode
1. Enter the relevant programmer code.
2. Click OK.
The programme launcher will appear.
3. Click Connect.
Connection options will be displayed.
• Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile. This option is only available when one
or more profiles have been previously stored.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
• To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and select the method of connecting to the
PBX.
a. Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the tables below.
b. Enter the system password for the PBX.
4. Click Connect.
Maintenance Console will start, and automatically connect to the PBX. If this is the first time that
Maintenance Console has connected to the PBX, and the date and time of the PBX have not yet been set,
the Quick Setup wizard will run. For more details, see Starting the Maintenance Console and Assigning
the Basic Items (Quick Setup).
Connection Settings for RS-232C
26
Setting
Values
Explanation
Port
COMx
Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the
PC’s RS-232C interface. Only available COM ports are
displayed.
PC Programming Manual
2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes
Setting
Values
Explanation
Baud Rate (bps)
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 57600, 115200
Specify the speed of data transmission.
Connection Settings for Modem
Setting
Values
Explanation
Dial Number
1-9, 0, *, #, -, "," [comma],
T, P, W
Enter the telephone number to be dialled to access the
PBX.
T: Converts the Dial Type from Pulse to Tone.
"," [comma], P, W: Inserts a pause.
Dial Type
Auto(Tone), Auto(Pulse),
Manual
Specify the outgoing dialling method.
If Manual is chosen, dialling must be done with a
connected telephone.
Comment
Max. 40 characters
Enter a comment to identify the set of values.
Port
COMx
Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the
PC’s modem interface.
Only available COM ports will be displayed.
Baud Rate (bps)
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400
Specify the speed of data transmission.
Modem Initialise
–
Enter the modem initialise command, and click
Initialise to send the command to the modem.
For more details, refer to your modem’s instruction
manual.
Connection Settings for LAN
Setting
Values
Explanation
IP Address
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Specify the IP address of the PBX on the LAN. Enter
the same IP address that was input in IP Address for
IPCMPR Card (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IP Address for IPCEMPR
Card (for KX-TDE600) of 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card
Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600).
It is also possible to search for the IP address by
clicking Search.
Port Number
1–65535
Specify the port number used to access the PBX via
LAN. Enter the same port number that was input in
Maintenance Port Number of 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card
Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600).
PC Programming Manual
27
2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes
Connection Setting for ISDN Remote
28
Setting
Values
Explanation
Dial Number
30 digits (consisting of 1-9,
0, *, #, -, and "," [comma])
Enter the telephone number to be dialled to access the
PBX.
PC Programming Manual
2.1.2 Access Levels
2.1.2 Access Levels
There are three main levels of access to the Maintenance Console: User, Administrator and Installer. Each
level has its own Programmer Code, which must be entered to run the Maintenance Console. The allowed
format for each programmer code is as follows:
Item
Length
User Level Programmer Code
0 – 16 characters
Administrator Level Programmer Code
4 – 16 characters
Installer Level Programmer Code
4 – 16 characters
Access to menu options within the Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the Programmer Code,
and the current software mode (see 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes). When a
menu option is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the initial description of that menu
option, for example:
"This option is only available at Installer level."
If a sentence like this does not appear under the heading, the menu option is available at all levels.
The target users for each access level are as follows:
Access Level
User
User
For end users
Administrator
For system administrators
Installer
For dealers and system installers
The options available in each mode and access level are shown below.
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User; A: Administrator; I: Installer
A check mark indicates that the menu option is available for that access level.
Programme launcher
Menu Option
Batch
U
A
New
Interactive
I
U
A
ü
I
ü
Open
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Connect—RS-232C
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Connect—USB
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Connect—LAN
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Connect—Modem
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Connect—ISDN Remote
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Connect—Profile Setup
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
PC Programming Manual
29
2.1.2 Access Levels
File
Menu Option
Batch
Interactive
U
A
I
Close
ü
ü
ü
Save
ü
ü
ü
Save As
ü
ü
ü
Exit
ü
ü
ü
U
A
I
ü
ü
ü
Disconnect
Menu Option
Batch
U
A
Interactive
I
Disconnect
U
A
I
ü
ü
ü
Tool
Menu Option
Batch
U
A
Interactive
I
SD memory backup
A
I
ü
ü
ü
BRI Automatic Configuration
ü
NDSS Link Data Clear
ü
DXDP All OUS
ü
Simplified Voice Message®Delete All Recording
ü
Simplified Voice Message®Check Current Usage
ü
Call Pickup for My Group
30
U
ü
ü
Extension List View
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Import®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Import®Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table
ü
ü
Import®ARS - Leading Digit
ü
ü
Import®ARS - Except Code
ü
ü
Import®ARS - Routing Plan
ü
ü
Import®Wired Extension
ü
ü
Import®PS Extension
ü
ü
Import®Quick Dial (Basic)
ü
ü
Import®Quick Dial (Expansion)
ü
ü
Import®SIP Extension
ü
ü
PC Programming Manual
2.1.2 Access Levels
Menu Option
Batch
U
A
Interactive
I
U
A
I
Import®V-IPGW16 GW Settings
ü
ü
Import®V-IPGW16 DN2IP
ü
ü
Export®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Export®Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table
ü
ü
Export®ARS - Leading Digit
ü
ü
Export®ARS - Except Code
ü
ü
Export®ARS - Routing Plan
ü
ü
Export®Wired Extension
ü
ü
Export®PS Extension
ü
ü
Export®Quick Dial (Basic)
ü
ü
Export®Quick Dial (Expansion)
ü
ü
Export®SIP Extension
ü
ü
Export®V-IPGW16 GW Settings
ü
ü
Export®V-IPGW16 DN2IP
ü
ü
Screen Customize®User Level
ü
ü
Screen Customize®Administrator Level
ü
ü
Utility
Menu Option
Batch
U
Diagnosis
A
Interactive
I
U
A
I
ü
ü
ü
File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
ü
File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC
ü
SD Card File View and Load
ü
SD Card File Delete
ü
Message File Transfer PC to PBX
ü
Message File Transfer PBX to PC
ü
Error Log
ü
ü
ü
T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor
ü
T1/E1 Line Trace
ü
ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
ü
V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace
ü
PC Programming Manual
31
2.1.2 Access Levels
Menu Option
Batch
U
A
Interactive
I
U
A
I
Digital Trunk Error Report
ü
IP Extension Statistical Information
ü
CS Information
ü
PS Information
ü
CS Status Monitor
ü
Ping
ü
File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment®IP-CS
ü
File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment®NT400
ü
File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment®NT3xx
ü
Card Software Timed Update
ü
System Reset®Reset by the Command
ü
View
Menu Option
Batch
Interactive
U
A
I
U
A
I
Toolbar
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Statusbar
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
System Menu
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Window
Menu Option
Batch
Interactive
U
A
I
U
A
I
Cascade
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Tile(Horz)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Tile(Vert)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Help
Menu Option
32
Batch
Interactive
U
A
I
U
A
I
Help
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Additional Information
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
About
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
PC Programming Manual
2.1.3 Software Interface
2.1.3 Software Interface
This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface.
Main Window
The window of the Maintenance Console software is divided into several areas, as shown below:
1
23
4
5
6
1. Menu Bar
Provides access to file management and connection options, as well as tools and utilities used in
programming the PBX.
For details, see Sections 2.3 File to 2.7 Help.
2. Tool Bar
Provides easy access to commonly used software functions.
Two tool bars are provided, as follows:
PC Programming Manual
33
2.1.3 Software Interface
•
File
•
Tools
Contains the icon for saving files. For details, see Section 2.3.2 File—Save.
Contains icons for backing up PBX data to the SD Memory Card, viewing extension information, and
accessing Online Help. For details, see Sections 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup and 2.5.8 Tool
—Extension List View.
These menus can be positioned freely. Click and drag the title bar of a menu to move it to another position.
It will automatically snap in to position above, below, to the left, or to the right of the main window if released
there. Otherwise, it will float separately from the main window.
Whether the tool bar is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting Toolbar from the View menu.
3. Tab Bar
The name of each screen currently open is displayed in a tab in this tab bar. When multiple screens are
open at the same time, click on the tab of a screen to display the options associated with that screen.
4. System Menu
Provides access to the settings used for programming the PBX, grouped into 11 topics.
For details, see Section 3 [1] Configuration to Section 13 [11] Maintenance.
To display the individual screens within a topic, click the topic heading. It will expand to show the sub-topics.
• If a sub-topic contains more than one screen, clicking the name of the sub-topic will display the names
of individual screens. Clicking an expanded sub-topic will hide the names of individual screens.
Double-click on a screen name to open that screen in 6. Main Screen below.
This menu can be positioned freely. Click and drag the title bar of the menu to move it to another position.
It will automatically snap in to either the left side or right side of the main window if released there.
Otherwise, it will float separately from the main window.
Whether the system menu is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting System Menu from the View
menu.
5. Status Bar
The status bar displays information on the current state of the Maintenance Console.
Whether the status bar is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting Statusbar from the View menu.
The information displayed is as follows, in order from left to right:
Area
Values
Description
Programme Mode
and Connection
Type
Programme Mode:
Batch Mode xxx
Interactive Mode yyy
Displays the current programme mode and
connection type. See 2.1.1 Starting
Maintenance Console and Software Modes
above.
"xxx" is replaced by the name of the current
system data file.
"yyy" is replaced by the name of the profile if used.
Connection Type:
RS-232C
USB
LAN
Modem
ISDN Remote
34
PBX Type
Type: NCP500/
NCP1000/TDE100/
TDE200/TDE600
Displays the type of PBX being programmed.
Access Level
Level:
User
Administrator
Installer
Displays the current access level, determined by
the Programmer Code entered when starting
Maintenance Console. See 2.1.2 Access
Levels for more information.
PC Programming Manual
2.1.3 Software Interface
Area
Values
Description
PBX System Data
Version
Versionxxx-xxx
Displays the version number of the system
software installed to the PBX.
The first 3 digits are the version number, and the
last 3 digits are the revision number.
PBX Region Code
Regionxxx-xxx
Displays the region code assigned to the PBX and
Maintenance Console.
The first 3 digits represent the region code
assigned to the PBX, and the last 3 digits
represent the region code assigned to the
Maintenance Console.
6. Main Screen
Displays the screens selected from 4. System Menu above.
For details, see Section 3 [1] Configuration to Section 13 [11] Maintenance.
Standard Buttons and Elements
There are several standard buttons that are displayed on many screens within the Maintenance Console.
The standard buttons are as follows:
Button
Function
OK
Implements changes and closes the current screen.
Cancel
Abandons changes and returns to the previous screen.
Close
Keeps any changes implemented, and closes the current screen.
Apply
Implements changes and remains on the same screen.
Refresh
Implements changes, updates displayed data, and remains on the
current screen.
Help
Displays the relevant help topic for the current screen.
In addition, many screens within the software display a small open folder icon (
) beside lists of setting items.
Clicking this icon will collapse part of the list, allowing other items to be displayed. The icon will change to a
closed folder (
).
Clicking the closed folder icon will expand the list again.
PC Programming Manual
35
2.1.4 Card Status
2.1.4 Card Status
Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service (INS)
status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item. Card
status changes can only be performed when the software is in Interactive mode (see 2.1.1 Starting
Maintenance Console and Software Modes).
• "In service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, and is capable of being used normally.
• "Out of service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, but has been temporarily removed
from use. This allows settings to be modified or software to be upgraded.
• "Fault" means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly, or is not functioning correctly. For more
information, see the Installation Manual.
For details about how to change the status of a card, see To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card
(Interactive mode only) on screen 3.1 [1-1] Slot.
36
PC Programming Manual
2.1.5 Display Options
2.1.5 Display Options
The View and Window menus provide options to control the display of items within the Maintenance Console.
View
– Toolbar: Displays or hides the tool bar of commonly used buttons.
– Statusbar: Displays or hides the bar at the bottom of the Maintenance Console window.
– System Menu: Displays or hides the menu of PBX setting screens.
• Window
– Cascade: When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens overlapped, with the title
bars visible.
– Tile(Horz): When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens side by side.
– Tile(Vert): When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens vertically.
•
PC Programming Manual
37
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting
Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming
various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make
selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button. This section explains how to use this
Extension Number Setting window.
To select multiple extension numbers, select the type of extension to display, highlight the extensions you wish
to add, then click the Add button. When finished, click OK. Data for the selected extensions will be added to
the first free spaces on the original screen.
Extension Type
Selects the types of extension numbers to display in Extension Numbers & Names List. Multiple items
can be selected. Items that are not available are shown with a grey checkbox.
Value Range
Wired Extension, Portable Station, VM Group(DPT), VM Group(DTMF), ICD Group, PS Ring Group,
OGM(DISA), External Pager, Analogue MODEM, ISDN Remote
Extension Numbers & Names List
Displays all available extensions of the types selected in Extension Type, and names. Click entries to select
them, and click the Add button when finished, to add the selected extensions. To deselect an entry, click it
again.
Value Range
Matching extensions
Available Column
Specifies which fields in the original form to add extension data to. For example, if both extension numbers
and names can be entered in the original form, it is possible to specify that extension name data not be
transferred, by deselecting that field here.
To select or deselect a field, click its name.
Value Range
Available fields
Selected Extension List
Displays the extensions that have been selected to be added to member data. To remove an extension from
this list, click it to select it and click Delete.
Value Range
Selected extensions
38
PC Programming Manual
2.2.1 Programme launcher—New
2.2 Programme launcher
2.2.1 Programme launcher—New
Creates a new system data file, used to programme the PBX in Batch mode. All settings are in their initial or
default state.
This option is only available at Installer level.
To upload the file created here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer
PC to PBX (SD Card).
Note
Since selecting this option creates a blank system data file, uploading this file to the PBX will overwrite all
previous settings. Use only when necessary.
To create a new system data file
1. From the programme launcher, select New.
2. Click the appropriate model number.
3. Click OK.
PC Programming Manual
39
2.2.2 Programme launcher—Open
2.2.2 Programme launcher—Open
Opens a system data file previously saved on the PC, and enters Batch mode.
When opening a file created with an older version of the Maintenance Console, you will be asked whether you
want to convert the data for use with the current version or not. Using the data without converting may result
in some data being loaded to an incorrect destination, and is not recommended.
If the file is not supported by the PBX (e.g. a system data file from an incompatible PBX), it will not be opened.
The only files that can be opened are files that were created by the Maintenance Console for a supported PBX.
To upload a file opened here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer
PC to PBX (SD Card).
To open a system data file
1. From the programme launcher, select Open.
The Open dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3. Select the file.
4. Click Open.
If the file was created with an older version of the Maintenance Console, you will be asked if you want to
convert the data.
• Click Yes to convert the data for use with the current version of the Maintenance Console. Enter a
name for the new converted system file.
• Click No to open the file as it is.
40
PC Programming Manual
2.2.3 Programme launcher—Connect—RS-232C
2.2.3 Programme launcher—Connect—RS-232C
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the serial RS-232C interface of the PBX.
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or
just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to multiple PBXs and
would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.2.8 Programme launcher—Connect
—Profile Setup for more details about creating profiles.
To connect to the PBX by RS-232C
1. From the programme launcher, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2. Select a connection option.
• Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile. This option is only available when one
or more profiles have been previously stored.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
• To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the RS-232C radio button
is selected.
a. Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the table below.
b. Enter the system password for the PBX.
3. Click Connect.
Connection Settings for RS-232C
Setting
Values
Explanation
Port
COMx
Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the
PC’s RS-232C interface. Only available COM ports are
displayed.
Baud Rate (bps)
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 57600, 115200
Specify the speed of data transmission.
PC Programming Manual
41
2.2.4 Programme launcher—Connect—USB
2.2.4 Programme launcher—Connect—USB
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through a USB port (USB Module) attached to the KX-DT300 series
or KX-T7600 series DPT.
To connect to the PBX by USB
1. From the programme launcher, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2. Select a connection option.
• Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
• To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the USB radio button is
selected.
a. Enter the system password for the PBX.
3. Click Connect.
42
PC Programming Manual
2.2.5 Programme launcher—Connect—LAN
2.2.5 Programme launcher—Connect—LAN
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the Local Area Network interface of the PBX.
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or
just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to multiple PBXs and
would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.2.8 Programme launcher—Connect
—Profile Setup for more details about creating profiles.
To connect to the PBX by LAN
1. From the programme launcher, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2. Select a connection option.
• Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
• To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the LAN radio button is
selected.
a. Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the table below.
b. Enter the system password for the PBX.
3. Click Connect.
Connection Settings for LAN
Setting
Values
Explanation
IP Address
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Specify the IP address of the PBX on the LAN. Enter
the same IP address that was input in IP Address for
IPCMPR Card (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IP Address for IPCEMPR
Card (for KX-TDE600) of 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card
Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600).
It is also possible to search for the IP address by
clicking Search.
Port Number
1–65535
Specify the port number used to access the PBX via
LAN. Enter the same port number that was input in
Maintenance Port Number of 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card
Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600).
PC Programming Manual
43
2.2.6 Programme launcher—Connect—Modem
2.2.6 Programme launcher—Connect—Modem
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the modem.
To access the PBX remotely using this feature, an RMT card must be installed and the Remote—Analogue
Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number assigned in 13.1 [11-1] Main.
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or
just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to multiple PBXs and
would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.2.8 Programme launcher—Connect
—Profile Setup for more details about creating profiles.
To connect to the PBX by Modem
1. From the programme launcher, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2. Select a connection option.
• Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
• To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the Modem radio button is
selected.
a. Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the table below.
b. Enter the system password for the PBX.
3. Click Connect.
Connection Settings for Modem
44
Setting
Values
Description
Dial Number
1-9, 0, *, #, -, "," [comma],
T, P, W
Enter the telephone number to be dialled to access the
PBX.
T: Converts the Dial Type from Pulse to Tone.
"," [comma], P, W: Inserts a pause.
Dial Type
Auto(Tone), Auto(Pulse),
Manual
Specify the outgoing dialling method.
If Manual is chosen, dialling must be done with a
connected telephone.
Comment
Max. 40 characters
Enter a comment to identify the set of values.
Port
COMx
Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the
PC’s modem interface.
Only available COM ports will be displayed.
Baud Rate (bps)
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400
Specify the speed of data transmission.
Modem Initialise
–
Enter the modem initialise command, and click
Initialise to send the command to the modem.
For more details, refer to your modem’s instruction
manual.
PC Programming Manual
2.2.7 Programme launcher—Connect—ISDN Remote
2.2.7 Programme launcher—Connect—ISDN Remote
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode using the ISDN TA interface of the PBX.
This method is only available when a user-supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI 2.0 is used, and Remote
—ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number of the 13.1 [11-1] Main screen is set.
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or
just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to multiple PBXs and
would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.2.8 Programme launcher—Connect
—Profile Setup for more details about creating profiles.
To connect to the PBX by ISDN Remote
1. From the programme launcher, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2. Select a connection option.
• Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
• To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the ISDN Remote radio
button is selected.
a. Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the table below.
b. Enter the system password for the PBX.
3. Click Connect.
Connection Setting for ISDN Remote
Setting
Values
Explanation
Dial Number
30 digits (consisting of 1-9,
0, *, #, -, and "," [comma])
Enter the telephone number to be dialled to access the
PBX.
PC Programming Manual
45
2.2.8 Programme launcher—Connect—Profile Setup
2.2.8 Programme launcher—Connect—Profile Setup
Profiles are useful when one PC is used to connect to multiple PBXs. Rather than manually adjusting the
connection settings each time a different PBX is accessed, it is possible to store the connection settings for
several PBXs. Then, when you wish to connect to a specific PBX, you can simply choose that PBX’s profile
from the list.
Note
When reinstalling or upgrading the Maintenance Console, it is possible to create a backup of all profiles.
This allows you to use the original connection settings with the new Maintenance Console.
The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows:
46
Button
Function
Profile File
Opens or saves profiles as separate files.
Save current profile
Overwrites the previous settings with the current settings when a profile already
exists. A confirmation message will be displayed.
Save as new profile
Saves the current settings as a new profile. A Profile Name is required.
Delete profile
When an existing profile is selected, deletes that profile. A confirmation message will
be displayed.
PC Programming Manual
2.3.1 File—Close
2.3 File
2.3.1 File—Close
Closes the system data file that is currently being modified, and returns to the programme launcher.
To close a system data file
• From the File menu, select Close.
If the system data file has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to
save the file.
• Click Yes to save the file.
• Click No to abandon the changes.
PC Programming Manual
47
2.3.2 File—Save
2.3.2 File—Save
Overwrites the previously saved system data file with the system data currently being modified in Batch mode.
To upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC
to PBX (SD Card).
To save a system data file
• From the File menu, select Save.
If the data has never been saved, the Save dialogue box will be displayed. For more details, see 2.3.3 File
—Save As.
48
PC Programming Manual
2.3.3 File—Save As
2.3.3 File—Save As
Saves the system data file being modified in Batch mode with the name chosen by the user.
To upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC
to PBX (SD Card).
To save a system data file with a new name
1. From the File menu, select Save As.
2. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
3. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
4. Click Save.
If choosing to overwrite another file, a warning message will be displayed.
• Click Yes to overwrite.
• Click No to return to the previous screen.
PC Programming Manual
49
2.3.4 File—Exit
2.3.4 File—Exit
Closes the Maintenance Console.
To exit the Maintenance Console
• From the File menu, select Exit.
If the system data file being modified has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you
the option to save the file.
• Click Yes to save the file.
• Click No to abandon the changes.
50
PC Programming Manual
2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect
2.4 Disconnect
2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect
Closes the connection between the Maintenance Console and the PBX. When this option is chosen, system
data is automatically backed up from the PBX to the SD memory card (see 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory
backup).
To disconnect
1. From the Disconnect menu, select Disconnect.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.
PC Programming Manual
51
2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup
2.5 Tool
2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup
Saves system data from the PBX to the SD memory card. Backup begins as soon as this option is chosen.
To back up system data
• From the Tool menu, select SD memory backup.
52
PC Programming Manual
2.5.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
2.5.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
Automatically configures the network settings of the BRI card.
This option is only available at Installer level.
This tool automatically inputs values into the fields L1 Mode, L2 Mode, Access Mode, and
Mode, on the Network tab of the 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port screen.
TEI
Note
•
•
•
Only one card can be configured at a time.
To use this tool, the card to be configured must be pre-set to OUS status. For more details, see
2.1.4 Card Status.
At any time on this screen, you can click Close to return to the previous screen without saving.
To configure the BRI card
1. From the Tool menu, select BRI Automatic Configuration.
2. Select the BRI card to configure by clicking the Check cell and setting it to ON.
3. Click OK.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The ports associated with the selected BRI card will be displayed on a new screen.
Enter suitable Subscriber Numbers for the ports you want to configure.
Only ports whose Subscriber Numbers have been entered will be configured.
Click Execute.
The results of configuration will be displayed.
Click the Check Box cell for the ports that have been configured.
Click Data Apply to save these results to the BRI card.
PC Programming Manual
53
2.5.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear
2.5.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear
Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and
monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the network,
it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.
To clear the NDSS Link Data
• From the Tool menu, select NDSS Link Data Clear.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
• Click OK to clear the data.
• Click Cancel to keep the data, and close the screen.
54
PC Programming Manual
2.5.4 Tool—DXDP All OUS
2.5.4 Tool—DXDP All OUS
Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously.
To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS.
1. From the Tool menu, select DXDP All OUS.
2. Click OK.
PC Programming Manual
55
2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording
2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording
Deletes all voice messages recorded by the SVM feature.
To delete voice messages
1. From the Tool menu, point to Simplified Voice Message and select Delete All Recording.
2. Select the card from which to delete messages.
3. Click OK.
56
PC Programming Manual
2.5.6 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage
2.5.6 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage
Displays information on the voice messages stored by the SVM feature. For each message, the type of
message and the associated extension are displayed.
To view SVM message status
• From the Tool menu, point to Simplified Voice Message and select Check Current Usage.
PC Programming Manual
57
2.5.7 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group
2.5.7 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group
Allows you to automatically configure settings in 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial and 6.4 [4-1-3]
Wired Extension—Speed Dial so that users can answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by pressing " 0".
To activate this tool
• From the Tool menu, select Call Pickup for My Group.
The Group Call Pickup feature number (default:
is assigned to first personal speed dial.
40) + the extension user group number of the extension
Note
This tool can only be activated if all of the following conditions are met:
– The first Quick Dial setting is empty or is already set to " 0".
– " 0" is not used for another feature number.
– The Group Call Pickup feature number has been assigned.
– The Personal Speed Dialling feature number has been assigned.
58
PC Programming Manual
2.5.8 Tool—Extension List View
2.5.8 Tool—Extension List View
Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information according
to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word searching feature.
The types that can be displayed are as follows:
Type
Detail
Intercom
Wired Extension
VM
Voice Mail
Portable Station
Wireless Extension (Portable Station)
ICDG
Incoming Call Distribution Group
WG
PS Ring Group
VM (DPT)
VM (DPT) Group
VM (DTMF)
VM (DTMF) Group
Pager
External Pager
MODEM
Analogue Modem
ISDN Remote
ISDN Modem
OGM (DISA)
DISA
DSS
DSS Console
DPT-I/F CS
PT-interface CS
SVM
SVM Feature
SIP/IP-PT
IP Telephone
To view extension information
• From the Tool menu, select Extension List View.
PC Programming Manual
59
2.5.9 Tool—Import
2.5.9 Tool—Import
Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using
the Export tool (see 2.5.10 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files. Unsupported file types
cannot be opened.
For all tables except ARS - Routing Plan, it is possible to edit the CSV file directly using an appropriate editor,
before importing.
The types of data that can be imported using this tool, and the matching destination fields, are as follows:
Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID
Data Type
Import Destination
System Speed Dialling Number
Location
Name
Name
CO Line Access Number +
Telephone Number
Dial
CLI Destination
CLI Destination
Related programming: 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table
Data Type
Import Destination
Location
Location
DDI/DID Number
Dial In Number
DDI/DID Name
Dial In Name
DDI/DID Destination-Day
Destination-Day
DDI/DID Destination-Lunch
Destination-Lunch
DDI/DID Destination-Break
Destination-Break
DDI/DID Destination-Night
Destination-Night
Tenant Number
Tenant Number
VM Trunk Group No.
Group Number for VPS answer
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Day
CLI Ring - Day
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Lunch
CLI Ring - Lunch
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Break
CLI Ring - Break
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Night
CLI Ring - Night
Related programming: 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
60
PC Programming Manual
2.5.9 Tool—Import
ARS - Leading Digit
Data Type
Import Destination
No.
Location
Leading Number
Leading Digit
Additional Number of Digits
Additional Dial Digits
Routing Plan Number
Route Plan Number
Related programming: 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number
ARS - Except Code
Data Type
Import Destination
No.
Location
Leading Number Exception
Exception Code
Related programming: 10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception
ARS - Routing Plan
Data Type
Import Destination
(no fields to select)
(no fields to select)
Related programming: 10.3 [8-3] Routing Plan Time
Wired Extension
Data Type
Import Destination
No.
Location (selected automatically)
Extension Number
Extension Number (selected automatically)
Extension Name
Extension Name (selected automatically)
Related programming: 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PS Extension
*1
Data Type
Import Destination
No.
Location (selected automatically)
Extension Number*1
Extension Number (selected automatically)
Extension Name
Extension Name (selected automatically)
This data can only be exported, and cannot be imported.
Related programming: 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual
61
2.5.9 Tool—Import
Quick Dial (Basic)
Data Type
Import Destination
No.
Location
Dial
Dial
Phone Number
Phone Number
Related programming: 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Quick Dial (Expansion)
Data Type
Import Destination
No.
Location
Dial
Dial
Phone Number
Phone Number
Related programming: 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
SIP Extension
Data Type
Import Destination
No.
Location
Extension Number
Extension Number
Password
Password
Related programming: 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
V-IPGW16 GW Settings
62
Data Type
Import Destination
No.
Location
GW Name
GW Name
GW IP Address
GW IP Address
GW Group
GW Group No.
Connection for IP-GW16
Connection for IP-GW16
Protocol
Protocol
Progress Tone Send Mode
Progress Tone Send Mode
IP Codec Priority 1st
IP Codec Priority 1st
IP Codec Priority 2nd
IP Codec Priority 2nd
IP Codec Priority 3rd
IP Codec Priority 3rd
Packet Sampling Time (G.711A)
Packet Sampling Time (G.711A)
Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu)
Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu)
PC Programming Manual
2.5.9 Tool—Import
Data Type
Import Destination
Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)
Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)
Voice Activity Detection for G.711
Voice Activity Detection for G.711
FAX Detection Ability
FAX Detection Ability
DTMF
DTMF
Payload Type
Payload Type
Related programming: 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
V-IPGW16 DN2IP
Data Type
Import Destination
No.
Location
Leading Number
Leading Number
Remaining Number of Digits
Remaining Number of Digits
GW No./GW Group Selection
GW No./GW Group Selection
GW Group
GW Group
GW No.
GW No.
Related programming: 3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
To import system data
1. From the Tool menu, point to Import, and then click the type of data to import.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3. Select the file.
4. Click Open to open the file.
If applicable, a list of field names found in the imported file will be displayed.
5. For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, select the Speed Dial table to which to import the data
(system or tenant) from the drop-down list.
6. If required, select import fields.
When import fields can be selected, the selection screen is displayed automatically. Matching origin and
destination fields are entered by default.
• To change the destination for an import field, select the preferred field from the drop-down list.
• To not import a field, select the blank option from the drop-down list.
7. Click OK to perform the import operation.
Depending on the type of data imported, the relevant programming screen may be displayed.
• Click OK or Apply to complete the import operation.
If data in a field being imported does not match the required format for the import destination, an error
message will be displayed when the import operation is attempted, and the operation will be cancelled.
This can occur when, for example, the destination field can only accept numeric data, but the data being
imported contains alphabet characters, as the correct fields were not linked together.
PC Programming Manual
63
2.5.10 Tool—Export
2.5.10 Tool—Export
Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see
2.5.9 Tool—Import) to update another PBX.
Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
Note
The separator used in CSV files created using the Export tool is decided by the unit specified in List
Separator, in the Windows Regional Options Control Panel.
To export system data
1. From the Tool menu, point to Export, and then click the type of data to export.
2. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
3. Enter a file name.
4. Click Save.
• When export fields are automatically selected, the file will be saved.
• When export fields can be selected, the selection screen will be displayed automatically.
5. For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, select the Speed Dial table from which to export the
data (system or tenant) from the drop-down list.
A list of field names that can be exported will be displayed.
6. Click the check box beside the name of each field that you want to export.
7. Click OK.
64
PC Programming Manual
2.5.11 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level
2.5.11 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level
Allows you to specify which menu screens, tools and utilities can be accessed in User and Administrator levels.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Selected check boxes will be displayed on the main screen of the Maintenance Console and in the menu bar
to users with the level of access being edited.
To modify displayed screens
1. From the Tool menu, point to Screen Customize, and then click the access level to modify.
2. Select the items that you want to have displayed.
• Clear the check box beside the names of items you do not want to have displayed.
• Select the check box beside the names of items you want to have displayed.
3. Click OK.
PC Programming Manual
65
2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis
2.6 Utility
2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis
Performs diagnostic tests on cards installed in the PBX, to identify the source of problems.
If any of the tests listed here returns the result "NG" ("No Good"), contact your dealer. Test results can be
saved as a TXT-format (text) file.
When testing is complete, any cards that were set to OUS status must be returned to INS status if they are to
be used again.
Card Test
Tests the relevant functions of a card to ensure that it is operating correctly. The tests carried out vary according
to the type of card being tested.
The tests that are performed on each card are as follows:
Test Type
66
Available Cards
Local loop back diagnosis
DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16,
CSLC16, MCSLC16, ECSLC24, MCSLC24, CSIF, LCOT, ELCOT,
T1, E1, BRI, PRI, OPB, E&M, DID, IP-EXT
Card CT Bus diagnosis
(KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 only)
DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, CSLC16, CSIF, LCOT, T1,
E1, BRI, PRI, OPB, E&M, DID, IP-EXT
DTMF Receive test port
DHLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, MCSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16,
CSLC16, ECSLC24, MCSLC24, E&M, DID
PT loop back diagnosis
DHLC, DLC
DSP DTMF generator/receiver
diagnosis
T1, E1
DSP DTMF receiver diagnosis
T1, E1
Framer IC alarm signal detection
diagnosis
T1, E1, PRI
Framer IC error detection diagnosis
T1, E1, PRI
CS-INF loop back diagnosis
(KX-TDE series only)
CSIF
Super frame synchronization
diagnosis (KX-TDE series only)
CSIF
Caller ID card loop back diagnosis
LCOT, ELCOT
Extension mode setting test
BRI
IP-GW H.323 call simulate
diagnosis (KX-TDE series only)
IP-GW4, IP-GW16
LAN loop back diagnosis (KX-TDE
series only)
IP-GW4
PC Programming Manual
2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis
To perform a card test
1. From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis.
2. Click on the Status cell of the card to be tested, and set it to "OUS".
3. Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.
4. Select the Card Test option.
A new window will be displayed.
5. Click Test to perform the test(s).
The error report will be displayed. When all tests are completed, the words "Test End!" will be shown on
the last line of the output.
6. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen.
Pair Port Test (KX-TDE series only)
Tests the combination of an extension port and trunk port to ensure that communication with the trunk port can
be carried out successfully.
The pair port test can be carried out using one LCOT or ELCOT card and one DHLC, SLC8, SLC16,
MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16, CSLC16, or ECSLC24 card.
Note
With the KX-TDE600, the pair of cards to be used for the pair port tests must be installed within the same
shelf.
The tests that are performed are as follows:
Line current OFF (Ext->CO)
Line current from extension to trunk turns off.
Line current ON (Ext->CO)
Line current from extension to trunk turns on.
Off hook detection (CO->Ext)
Off-hook generation/detection from trunk to extension
DTMF detection (CO->Ext)
DTMF generation/detection from trunk to extension
DP detection (CO->Ext)
DP generation/detection from trunk to extension
BELL detection (Ext->CO)
BELL generation/detection from extension to trunk
Speech path (Ext->CO)
Speech path from extension to trunk
Speech path (CO->Ext)
Speech path from trunk to extension
To perform a pair port test
1. From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis.
2. Click on the Status cell of the extension card to be tested, and set it to "OUS".
3. Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.
4. Select the Pair Port Test option.
A new window will be displayed. The card you selected in Step 3 will be shown in the Extension Line Slot
No. drop-down list.
5. From the CO Line Slot No. drop-down list, select the slot number of the trunk card you want to test.
PC Programming Manual
67
2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis
6. From the CO Line Port No. drop-down list, select the port number of the trunk you want to test.
7. Click Test.
The error report will be displayed.
8. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen.
Network Loopback Test
Performs a remote loopback test on the PRI23 card.
Note
•
•
To perform this test, it is necessary to set Loopback Test started by Network in 3.35 [1-1] Slot
—Port Property - PRI Port to "Enable".
The version of the PRI23 card must be 2.000 or later.
To perform a network loopback test
1. From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis.
2. Click on the Status cell of the PRI23 card, and set it to "OUS".
3. Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.
4. Select the Loopback Type option.
A new window will be displayed.
5. Select Point1 or Point2 depending on the type of loopback test you want to perform
The available selections may vary depending on the hardware version of the card.
6. Click Apply.
Preparation for the test is complete. The test will start automatically.
7. After the test is complete, select Release and click Apply.
8. Click Close to return to the Diagnosis screen.
68
PC Programming Manual
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
Copies PBX system files (programme files, data files and activation key files) from the connected PC to the
SD memory card installed in the PBX. Pre-existing files on the SD memory card are overwritten.
This option is only available at Installer level.
The following types of files can be copied using this tool:
• Programme files: These contain the programmes used to operate cards within the PBX and CSs, acting
as on-board drivers.
• Data files: These contain the initial configuration data for individual cards and settings.
• Activation Key files: These contain the activation keys used to enable the use of IP trunks and IP telephones
through Virtual VoIP cards and upgrade the software.
Not all files that are copied using this tool are automatically made active. To install new programme files, main
system data, or activation key for software upgrade to the PBX, use the System Reset—Reset by the
Command utility (see 2.6.22 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command) for PBMPR/PMMPR/
PGMPR, DBSYS/DMSYS/DGSYS, and LIC files. Use the Activation Key button (see 3.3 [1-1] Slot—
Activation Key) for other LIC files, and the SD Card File View and Load utility (see 2.6.4 Utility—SD Card
File View and Load) for all other files.
The PBX examines the header information of a file to determine 2 things: whether the file contains supported
data, and which system component the file applies to.
Only files whose header information matches that of a system file supported by the PBX can be transferred.
Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message.
The names of all files that can be stored on the SD memory card are as follows:
Main Programme
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
*1
Name on SD Memory Card
Corresponding Card
PBMPR
IPCMPR
PBMPR_S
IPCMPR*1
PBMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "PBMPR_S".
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
*1
Name on SD Memory Card
Corresponding Card
PMMPR
IPCMPR
PMMPR_S
IPCMPR*1
PMMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "PMMPR_S".
KX-TDE600
*1
Name on SD Memory Card
Corresponding Card
PGMPR
IPCEMPR
PGMPR_S
IPCEMPR*1
PGMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "PGMPR_S".
PC Programming Manual
69
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
LPR Programme
Name on SD Memory Card
Corresponding Card
PCSINF
CSIF
PDHLC
DHLC8, DLC8, DLC16
PSLC
SLC8, SLC16
PCSLC
CSLC16
PEESLC
MCSLC16, MCSLC24
PT1
T1
PE1
E1
PEM
E&M
PBRI
BRI
PIPGWH
IP-GW4
PIPGW16
IP-GW16
PPRI23
PRI23
PPRI30
PRI30
POPB3
OPB
PDID
DID8
PIPEXT
IP-EXT16
PVOIPEX
IP-EXT16
PESLC
ESLC16, EMSLC16
PEESLC
ECSLC24
PELCOT
ELCOT
PEECHO
EECHO
PBUSS
BUS-S
CS Programme
70
Name on SD Memory Card
Corresponding Unit
PCSDECT
CS using a CSIF card for DECT Portable Station
PDCSDECT
CS using a DHLC/DLC card for DECT Portable Station
PHCSDECT
High-density CS for DECT Portable Station
PCS24G
CS using a CSIF card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station
PDCS24G
CS using a DHLC/DLC card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station
PC Programming Manual
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
System Data
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
*1
Name on SD Memory Card
Corresponding Card
DBSYS
IPCMPR
DBSYS_S
IPCMPR*1
DBSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DBSYS_S".
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
*1
Name on SD Memory Card
Corresponding Card
DMSYS
IPCMPR
DMSYS_S
IPCMPR*1
DMSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DMSYS_S".
KX-TDE600
*1
Name on SD Memory Card
Corresponding Card
DGSYS
IPCEMPR
DGSYS_S
IPCEMPR*1
DGSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "DGSYS_S".
Language Data
Name on SD Memory Card
Corresponding Unit
DLNG0–DLNG5
PT
DVMLNG1–DVMLNG5
VPS (Display Guidance data)
Activation Key
Name on SD Memory Card
Corresponding Card
LIC00–LIC99
V-IPEXT32, V-SIPEXT32, V-IPGW16, V-SIPGW16
Default Value Data
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
Name on SD Memory Card
Corresponding Card
DBINI
IPCMPR
DBIDHLC
DHLC4
DBISLC
SLC8
PC Programming Manual
71
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
Name on SD Memory Card
Corresponding Card
DBIDLC
DLC8/DLC16
DBIBRI
BRI
DBILCOT
LCOT4
DBIT1
T1
DBIE1
E1
DBIOPB3
OPB3
DBIEIO
EIO
DBIPRI23
PRI23
DBIPRI30
PRI30
DBISLCLC
SLC16
DBIVIPGW
V-IPGW16
DBIVSPGW
V-SIPGW16
DBIVIPEX
V-IPEXT32
DBIVSPEX
V-SIPEXT32
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
72
Name on SD Memory Card
Corresponding Card
DMINI
IPCMPR
DMIDHLC
DHLC8
DMISLC
SLC8/CSLC16
DMISLC3
MCSLC16, MCSLC24
DMIDLC
DLC8/DLC16
DMIBRI
BRI
DMICSINF
CSIF
DMILCOT
LCOT8/LCOT16
DMIT1
T1
DMIE1
E1
DMIEM
E&M
DMIOPB3
OPB3
DMIEIO
EIO
DMIIPGW2
IP-GW4
DMIIPGW3
IP-GW16
DMIPRI23
PRI23
PC Programming Manual
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
Name on SD Memory Card
Corresponding Card
DMIPRI30
PRI30
DMISLCLC
SLC16
DMIDID
DID8
DMIIPEXT
IP-EXT16
DMIVIPGW
V-IPGW16
DMIVSPGW
V-SIPGW16
DMIVIPEX
V-IPEXT32
DMIVSPEX
V-SIPEXT32
KX-TDE600
Name on SD Memory Card
Corresponding Card
DGINI
IPCEMPR
DGIDHLC
DHLC8
DGISLC
SLC8, EMSLC16, ESLC16, CSLC16, ECSLC24
DGIDLC
DLC8/DLC16
DGIBRI
BRI
DGICSINF
CSIF
DGILCOT
ELCOT16
DGIT1
T1
DGIE1
E1
DGIEM
E&M
DGIOPB3
OPB3
DGIEIO
EIO
DGIIPGW2
IP-GW4
DGIIPGW3
IP-GW16
DGIPRI23
PRI23
DGIPRI30
PRI30
DGIDID
DID8
DGIIPEXT
IP-EXT16
DGIVIPGW
V-IPGW16
DGIVSPGW
V-SIPGW16
DGIVIPEX
V-IPEXT32
DGIVSPEX
V-SIPEXT32
PC Programming Manual
73
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
To transfer files to the SD memory card
1. From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).
The dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Select the file to upload.
A window showing the upload progress will be displayed.
While transferring files to the SD memory card, the PBX automatically renames them according to the
header information.
A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
3. Click OK.
74
PC Programming Manual
2.6.3 Utility—File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC
2.6.3 Utility—File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC
Copies system data files from the SD memory card installed in the PBX to the connected PC.
This option is only available at Installer level.
The files that can be downloaded from the SD memory card are as follows:
File Name
File Type
DBSYS (KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000)
System Data
DMSYS (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)
DGSYS (KX-TDE600)
$SYSERR
Error Data
$SYSERR1–$SYSERR9
LIC00–LIC99
Activation Key
Downloading the DBSYS/DMSYS/DGSYS system data file allows you to make a backup of the configuration
of the PBX.
The error data files are snapshots of the configuration of the PBX taken automatically when a major error
causes a system reset. They can be analysed by your dealer to identify the source of a problem. If there is
only one error data file, its name will be $SYSERR. If there is more than one file, the files will be numbered in
chronological order, up to a maximum of 9 files.
To transfer files to the PC
1. From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC.
2. Select the file to download from the list of files on the SD memory card.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Only the files listed in the table above can be downloaded. Selecting any other file will cause an error
message to be displayed.
Click Transfer.
The Save dialogue box will be displayed
Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
Enter a file name.
Click Save.
A window showing the download progress will be displayed.
A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
Click OK.
PC Programming Manual
75
2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load
2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load
Displays a list of files on the SD memory card, and allows you to update the programmes stored in LPR cards
(cards with local processors) and Cell Stations (CSs).
This option is only available at Installer level.
To update the programme stored in an LPR card, the card must first be set to out of service (OUS). To update
the programme stored in a CS, the port of the card (CSIF/DHLC/DLC) that the CS is attached to must be set
to OUS, but the card itself must be set to in service (INS). Only cards that are in the correct status will be
displayed.
The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed.
This utility can also display information on activation key files stored in the SD memory card.
The effective date, IPCMPR-ID (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR-ID (for
KX-TDE600), activation key type, number of activation keys, and expiration date of activation keys are
displayed on the Detail screen. The expiration date of preinstalled activation keys is displayed as "Unlimited
duration".
To view and load files on the SD memory card
1. From the Utility menu, select SD Card File View and Load.
2. Click on the name of the desired file.
Only files containing programme data (whose filenames start with "P") can be selected.
3. Click Detail.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The Detail screen will be displayed. Header information from the chosen SD memory card file is displayed
on the left.
From the Card drop-down list on the right, select the card(s) whose software you want to update.
• To update a specific card or port:
• LPR cards: select the slot number and card name.
• CSs: select the slot number and card name, and then select the related CS port from the drop-down
list directly below.
• To update all matching cards simultaneously:
• Select "ALL".
Click View to update the displayed header information of the selected files.
The file with the higher File Version and File Revision numbers is newer.
Click Load to update the file stored on the PBX.
When the update is finished, a message will be displayed.
Click OK.
The display will return to the Detail screen.
To view information on activation key files stored in the SD memory card (Interactive mode
only)
1. From the Utility menu, select SD Card File View and Load.
2. Click on the name of the desired activation key file.
3. Click Detail.
The Detail screen will be displayed.
76
PC Programming Manual
2.6.5 Utility—SD Card File Delete
2.6.5 Utility—SD Card File Delete
Allows you to delete files from the SD memory card.
This option is only available at Installer level.
The following essential system files cannot be deleted by this utility:
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: PBMPR, DBSYS
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: PMMPR, DMSYS
KX-TDE600: PGMPR, DGSYS
To delete files from the SD memory card
1. From the Utility menu, select SD Card File Delete.
2. Click on the file to be deleted.
3. Click Delete.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
4. Click OK.
The display will return to the SD Card File Delete screen.
PC Programming Manual
77
2.6.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
2.6.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the selected MSG/ESVM card/block mounted on an
OPB/MPR card.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Note
•
When transferring to or from an MSG/ESVM card mounted on an OPB card, the OPB card must be
set to OUS status.
• When transferring to or from the built-in ESVM block on the MPR card, the ESVM block must be set
to OUS status.
Files are stored on the MSG/ESVM card/block in the location specified by the file’s header information.
Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary. If this location already contains an OGM, it will be
overwritten by the newly uploaded message.
To transfer OGMs to an MSG/ESVM card/block
1. From the Utility menu, select Message File Transfer PC to PBX.
2. Select the target MSG/ESVM card/block, or "ALL", from the drop-down list, and click OK.
The Open dialogue box will be displayed.
3. Select the message files to upload. The files must be in the WAV format.
It is possible to select multiple files.
4. Click OK.
The files will be uploaded. Files that do not contain message data will be ignored.
When complete, the display will return to the main screen.
78
PC Programming Manual
2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the MSG/ESVM card/block mounted on an OPB/MPR card to
the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Note
•
•
When transferring to or from an MSG/ESVM card mounted on an OPB card, the OPB card must be
set to OUS status.
When transferring to or from the built-in ESVM block on the MPR card, the ESVM block must be set
to OUS status.
To transfer OGMs to the PC
1. From the Utility menu, select Message File Transfer PBX to PC.
2. From the upper drop-down list, select the target MSG/ESVM card/block.
3. From the lower drop-down list, select the messages to transfer.
• To transfer a certain message, select the number of that message.
• To transfer all messages at once, select "ALL".
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.
4. Enter a file name.
5. Click Save.
6. Click OK.
When you choose to transfer all messages, each message is saved as an individual file, with a number
appended to the file name corresponding to that message’s location on the MSG/ESVM card/block.
When complete, the display will return to the main screen.
PC Programming Manual
79
2.6.8 Utility—Error Log
2.6.8 Utility—Error Log
Collects and displays system error information.
Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all
of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message.
The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows:
Button
Function
Cancel
Closes the Error Log screen without saving.
Capture
Saves the currently displayed Error Log information as a text file.
Minor
Displays minor errors, which affect only a certain part of system
operation.
Major
Displays major errors, which affect operation of the whole system, or
result in system failure.
Clear
Erases the stored error log information from both the screen and the
PBX.
Log Information
Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions.
The items displayed on screen are as follows:
80
Item
Description
Index
The ordinal number assigned to an error record in the current log.
Date
The date of the error detection.
Time
The time of the error detection.
Error Code
The 3-digit error code assigned by the PBX.
PC Programming Manual
2.6.8 Utility—Error Log
Item
Description
Sub Code
The 6-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (WXYYZZ).
• W: Shelf type
– Physical shelf: " " (blank)
– Virtual shelf: "*" (asterisk)
• X: Shelf number
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1
KX-TDE600:
• 1: Basic Shelf
• 2: Expansion Shelf 1
• 3: Expansion Shelf 2
• 4: Expansion Shelf 3
• YY: Slot number
– KX-NCP500 (Physical slot): 00 to 05
(00: IPCMPR Card Slot/Built-in ESVM card; 01 to 05: Free
Slots)
– KX-NCP1000 (Physical slot): 00 to 07
(00: IPCMPR Card Slot/Built-in ESVM card; 01 to 07: Free
Slots)
– KX-TDE100 (Physical slot): 00 to 06
(00: IPCMPR Card Slot/Built-in ESVM card; 01 to 06: Free
Slots)
– KX-TDE200 (Physical slot): 00 to 11
(00: IPCMPR Card Slot/Built-in ESVM card; 01 to 11: Free
Slots)
– KX-TDE600 (Physical slot):
• Basic Shelf: 00 to 10
(00: IPCEMPR Card Slot/Built-in ESVM card; 01 to 10:
Free Slots)
• Expansion Shelf: 01 to 12
(01 to 11: Free Slots; 12: BUS-S Card Slot)
– KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200/
KX-TDE600 (Virtual slot): 01 to 08
(01 to 04: Virtual Trunk Slots; 05 to 08: Virtual Extension
Slots)
• ZZ: Port number
– For optional service cards except OPB3 card:
Port number (01 to 16) will be displayed.
– For OPB3 card:
Sub slot number (1 to 3) + port number (1 to 4) will be
displayed as follows:
• Sub slot 1 of OPB3: 11 to 14
• Sub slot 2 of OPB3: 21 to 24
• Sub slot 3 of OPB3: 31 to 34
Note
When there is no parameter for slot and port number, YY and ZZ
will be displayed as "00".
Example: Sub code for IPCMPR card = " 10000"
Error Message
A description of the error.
PC Programming Manual
81
2.6.8 Utility—Error Log
To view the error log
• From the Utility menu, select Error Log.
82
PC Programming Manual
2.6.9 Utility—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor
2.6.9 Utility—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor
Displays reference signalling bit information for all channels of the T1 or E1 card, by monitoring sent and
received A, B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.
While monitoring is being performed, any displayed bits whose value changes from 0 to 1 or vice versa will be
highlighted in red until the next screen refresh is performed.
To view signalling bit information
1. From the Utility menu, select T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor.
2. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
3. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
4. Click Start.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
5. Click Stop to end monitoring.
To refresh the screen at any time while monitoring is stopped, click Refresh.
PC Programming Manual
83
2.6.10 Utility—T1/E1 Line Trace
2.6.10 Utility—T1/E1 Line Trace
Traces the sent and received signalling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the T1 or E1 line.
This utility is intended for use by dealers.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.
To view trace data
1. From the Utility menu, select T1/E1 Line Trace.
2. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
3. From the CH No drop-down list, select the target channel.
4. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed. The information is automatically updated whenever the data being
monitored changes.
5. Click Stop to end the trace.
6. Select an option:
• Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
Information is saved as a text-format file.
• Click Clear to erase the information.
84
PC Programming Manual
2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
This utility collects protocol trace data from BRI, PRI or IP-GW cards, and displays it on the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target BRI, PRI or IP-GW card be set to
INS status.
Protocol trace data is continually accumulated on ISDN and IP-GW cards, and 3 types of data can be
downloaded:
• Real Time Trace: Pseudo-real-time data is collected through data polling at one-second intervals. The
displayed information is updated beginning when the Start button is clicked.
• Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated data is retrieved and displayed.
• Error Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed. This trace shows
the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets.
To view trace data
1. From the Utility menu, select ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace.
2. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
3. From the Trace Data Type drop-down list, select the type of data to view.
4. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed.
5. Select an option:
• Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
• Click Clear to clear the screen display.
6. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.
PC Programming Manual
85
2.6.12 Utility—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace
2.6.12 Utility—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace
This utility collects trace data of protocol activity from V-IPGW16 card.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target V-IPGW16 card be set to INS status.
To save trace data to the SD Memory Card
1. From the Utility menu, select V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace.
When the progress bar disappears, the protocol trace is complete. The trace data has been saved to the
SD Memory Card (file name: "PRTH323").
To transfer trace data to the PC
1. From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
86
The trace data will be displayed.
Select the desired trace data file.
Click Transfer.
Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
Enter a file name.
Click Save.
Click OK.
PC Programming Manual
2.6.13 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report
2.6.13 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report
Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks.
This option is only available at Installer level.
The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period
selected. Average values for these items vary depending upon many factors, such as the equipment being
used, and the distance from the telephone company.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item
Description
Time
Time of error
Slot
Relevant slot and card type
Counter of Digital Trunk
Error Logs logged in
"Minor Error" Log
Counter of minor
communication error
Out of SYNC (#300)
Digital trunk out of sync (Loss of Signal)
RAI (#301)
Digital trunk RAI signal reception
AIS (#302)
Digital trunk Alarm Indication Signal reception
Frame Failure (#300)
Digital trunk frame failure (Loss of Frame)
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check error
SF
Severely errored frame (or Severe Framing
Error)
FE
Frame synchronisation bit-error
LV
Line Code Violation
SL
Controlled slip
To view digital trunk information
1. From the Utility menu, select Digital Trunk Error Report.
2. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
• To generate a report on a specific card, select the slot number and card name.
• To generate a report on all matching cards simultaneously, select "ALL".
3. From the Display form drop-down list, select the time period to view.
4. Click Execute.
The error report will be displayed.
PC Programming Manual
87
2.6.14 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information
2.6.14 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information
Displays accumulated statistical information on IP extensions, IP-EXT cards, V-IPEXT32 cards, V-IPCS4
cards, and the DSP card.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item
Description
Collection Started Time
Date and time the port was last reset.
Port No.
Number of the port.
RTP Receive Packet Counter
Total number of packets received.
RTP Receive Lost Packet Counter
Total number of packets lost.
RTP Receive Abandoned Packet Counter
Total number of packets abandoned.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MAX.) [ms]
Maximum time taken for a packet to
arrive.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MIN.) [ms]
Minimum time taken for a packet to
arrive.
To view IP extension information
1. From the Utility menu, select IP Extension Statistical Information.
2. From the Card Selection drop-down list, select the slot number for the card. "IPCMPR (VoIP-DSP)" (for
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/"IPCEMPR (VoIP-DSP)" (for KX-TDE600) can be
selected for the DSP card when DSP Card Status is enabled. See 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600).
3. Click Execute.
The statistical information will be displayed.
4. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Clear to erase the information and reset the Collection Started Time.
5. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.
88
PC Programming Manual
2.6.15 Utility—CS Information
2.6.15 Utility—CS Information
Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target CSIF, DHLC, DLC, or V-IPCS4 card
be set to INS status.
For DHLC/DLC cards, only the information for ports that have CSs connected to them is displayed.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item
Description
Slot
Number of the slot (for KX-TDE600, shelf and slot)
Port
Number of the port
CS Name
Name of the attached CS
Status
Service status of the attached CS: INS, OUS, or FAULT.
If the status is FAULT, subsequent data items for that port will be left
blank.
Version
Version number of the programme file stored in the CS
Revision
Revision number of the programme file stored in the CS
CSID
12-digit ID number of the CS
Path
Number of the wireless extension currently using each path. In the case
of a group, several extensions may be using the same floating extension
number.
When an extension number is not registered, the display shows
"OFF". The number of paths that can be used varies for each CS model.
For more details, see the documentation for your CS.
Group Call
Number of PSs registered to the attached CS that are members of a PS
Ring Group.
To view CS information
1. From the Utility menu, select CS Information.
2. From the Target CSI/F Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot.
• To display information on a single card, select the slot number and name of that card.
• To display information on all matching cards, select "All".
3. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
4. If you want to save the CS information, click Capture.
a. Create a file for saving the data.
b. Click Start.
c. Click Close.
5. Click Start to begin monitoring.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
To refresh the screen manually at any time, click Refresh.
6. Click Stop to end monitoring.
7. If you started to save the CS information in step 4, click Capture, then click Stop to record the information
to the specified file.
8. Click Close to return to the main screen.
PC Programming Manual
89
2.6.16 Utility—PS Information
2.6.16 Utility—PS Information
Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available at Installer level.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item
Description
PS No.
PS location number.
Only registered PSs will be displayed.
Extension Number
Extension number of the PS.
Location—Slot
Slot number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
Location—Port
Port number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
To view PS information
1. From the Utility menu, select PS Information.
2. Click Refresh.
90
PC Programming Manual
2.6.17 Utility—CS Status Monitor
2.6.17 Utility—CS Status Monitor
This utility monitors the status of CSs. CSs receive data from other CSs that they are currently synchronised
with. Current Sync CS information is displayed for IP-CSs that are in INS status.
This option is only available at Installer level.
The displayed items for the Current Sync CS of each CS are as follows:
Item
Description
CS Type
Type of CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Slot Type (for KX-NCP500/
KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE200)/
Shelf (for KX-TDE600)
Slot type (shelf) of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Slot
Slot number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Port
Port number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
CS / Repeater
Indicates whether the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with is a
CS or Repeater.
CS Name
Name of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
CS ID
12-digit ID number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Monitored Value
Monitored value (dBm) of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised
with.
Monitored Level
Monitored level (signal strength level) of the CS that each CS is currently
synchronised with.
To monitor the status of CSs
1. From the Utility menu, select CS Status Monitor.
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
refresh.
If you want to save the CS status monitor information, click Capture.
a. Create a file for saving the data.
b. Click Start.
c. Click Close.
Click Start to begin monitoring.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
To refresh the screen manually at any time, click Refresh.
Click Stop to end monitoring.
If you started to save the CS status monitor information in step 3, click Capture, then click Stop to record
the information to the specified file.
Click Close to return to the main screen.
PC Programming Manual
91
2.6.18 Utility—Ping
2.6.18 Utility—Ping
Performs a connection test on network devices. This function sends echo requests to a particular IP address
across an IP network, and displays the result of responses and round-trip time.
This option is only available when the Maintenance Console is in Interactive mode.
To perform a Ping test
1. Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box.
2. Click Test to perform the test.
The result will be displayed.
3. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Close to return to the Ping screen.
92
PC Programming Manual
2.6.19 Utility—File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment—IP-CS/NT400
2.6.19 Utility—File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment—IP-CS/NT400
Displays a list of files on the FTP server, and allows you to update the programmes stored in IP-CSs and
KX-NT400 IP-PTs.
This option is only available at Installer level.
It is possible to perform the update in 2 ways:
• Manual update
• Timed (automatic) update
To update manually:
1. From the Utility menu, select File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment, and then either IP-CS or NT400.
2. Input the FTP Server Address and File Name.
3. Put a check in the Select check boxes of the items to be updated.
4. Click Execute.
To set timed update:
1. From the Utility menu, select File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment, and then either IP-CS or NT400.
2. Input the FTP Server Address and File Name.
3. Put a check in the Select check boxes of the items to be updated.
4. Click Timed Update.
The Timed Update screen appears. For information on setting this screen, see 2.6.21 Utility—Card
Software Timed Update.
Note
•
•
•
•
Cards are automatically set to OUS status during an update, and returned to INS status when the
update is complete.
To display the file version of the file stored on the FTP server, click Load.
To refresh the status of all ports, click Refresh.
Timed updates can only be set for either LPR cards, IP-CSs, or KX-NT400 IP-PTs. They cannot be set
for more than one type of device.
PC Programming Manual
93
2.6.20 Utility—File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment—NT3xx
2.6.20 Utility—File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment—NT3xx
Displays a list of files on the FTP server, and allows you to update the programmes stored in KX-NT300 series
IP-PTs.
This option is only available at Installer level.
To perform an update
1. From the Utility menu, select File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment, and then NT3xx.
2. Input the FTP Server Address and File Name.
3. Click Execute.
Note
•
•
•
•
94
This utility is not available when the PBX is connected to the Maintenance Console via a LAN
connection.
Ports cannot be selected. All registered ports that are in OUS status will be activated, and then reset
when the update is complete.
To display the version and file type of the file stored on the FTP server, click Load.
FTP server passwords and user IDs can only contain capital letters and numbers.
PC Programming Manual
2.6.21 Utility—Card Software Timed Update
2.6.21 Utility—Card Software Timed Update
Updates programmes in the LPR cards (optional service cards with local processors) by comparing them with
files found on the SD memory card on a preset schedule, and downloading newer files to the cards.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Note
•
Timed updates can only be set for either LPR cards, IP-CSs, or KX-NT400 IP-PTs. They cannot be set
for more than one type of device.
• Cards are automatically set to OUS status during an update, and returned to INS status when the
update is complete.
• It is recommended to set the timed update to take place during the least active time period, for example
late at night.
This utility does not apply to CS programmes. These must be updated manually using the SD Card File View
and Load utility (see 2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load).
When this utility has been set, all commands that would affect the status of cards are prevented from operating.
The list of these commands is as follows:
• Card status change (INS/OUS)
• Diagnosis commands
• Card installation
• Card deletion
• Remote reset
• LPR programme download requests
• ISDN automatic setup requests (BRI card)
• Signalling Bit Monitor requests (T1/E1)
• Line trace start requests (T1/E1)
• ISDN/QSIG Protocol Data Trace start requests
• Time setting
• CS programme download requests
• File deletion
When a function other than those listed above, that cannot be performed while timed update has been set, is
selected, an error message will be displayed.
To turn this utility on:
1. From the Utility menu, select Card Software Timed Update.
2. Select the Set option.
The time setting box will become available.
3. Enter the desired time using the number keys.
Click in the hour or minute field and use the up and down arrows to adjust the displayed time in increments
of one unit.
4. Click Apply.
A message box will be displayed.
5. Click Yes.
To turn this utility off:
1. From the Utility menu, select Card Software Timed Update.
2. Select the Off (Cancel) option.
3. Click Apply.
A message box will be displayed.
4. Click Yes.
PC Programming Manual
95
2.6.22 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command
2.6.22 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command
Updates the main system programme and data files stored within the PBX using files taken from the SD memory
card, and resets the connected PBX.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Two copies of each of the main system files can be stored on the SD memory card. The names of these files
are as follows:
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
File Name
Description
DBSYS
Main system data file. Contains all of the current configuration data for
the PBX.
DBSYS_S
Backup main system data file
PBMPR
PBX programme file. Contains the software to run the IPCMPR board
of the PBX.
PBMPR_S
Backup PBX programme file
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
File Name
Description
DMSYS
Main system data file. Contains all of the current configuration data for
the PBX.
DMSYS_S
Backup main system data file
PMMPR
PBX programme file. Contains the software to run the IPCMPR board
of the PBX.
PMMPR_S
Backup PBX programme file
KX-TDE600
File Name
Description
DGSYS
Main system data file. Contains all of the current configuration data for
the PBX.
DGSYS_S
Backup main system data file
PGMPR
PBX programme file. Contains the software to run the IPCEMPR board
of the PBX.
PGMPR_S
Backup PBX programme file
When new DBSYS/DMSYS/DGSYS and PBMPR/PMMPR/PGMPR files are transferred from a connected PC
to the SD memory card using the File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) utility (see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer
PC to PBX (SD Card)), they are stored as the backup files. To use these files on the PBX, it is necessary to
first swap them with the currently active files on the SD memory card.
To update system files and reset the PBX
1. From the Utility menu, point to System Reset and then click Reset by the Command.
2. Choose whether to back up current system data or not.
• Click SD Backup to back up the current system data to the SD memory card before proceeding.
96
PC Programming Manual
2.6.22 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command
Select this if you intend to use the current system data unchanged after reset.
Click Skip to continue without backing up.
Select this if you intend to replace the current system data with data that was uploaded from the PC.
The second screen will be displayed. A list of matching files found on the SD memory card, with dates and
times, is shown at the top.
Select whether to replace the DBSYS/DMSYS/DGSYS and PBMPR/PMMPR/PGMPR files or not.
When no backup file is found, the corresponding options are not available.
Click OK.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
Select an option:
• Click OK to reset the PBX.
If OK is clicked, a final confirmation screen will be displayed.
• Click Cancel to return to the main screen without copying files.
Click OK to reset the PBX, or Cancel to return to the main screen without copying files.
If the reset command was not carried out correctly, an error message will be displayed, and you will be
returned to the main screen.
•
3.
4.
5.
6.
After resetting the PBX with this command, it is necessary to reconnect to the PBX to continue programming.
PC Programming Manual
97
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
2.7 Help
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
This section provides answers to some common questions about using the Maintenance Console software to
programme the PBX. The information is divided into the following topics:
Title
Description
Connection
Connecting to the PBX using Maintenance Console.
Maintenance Console Software
Using the Maintenance Console software.
Card Status
Changing the status (INS/OUS) of cards.
Portable Stations
Setting up portable stations, including registration and deregistration.
Numbering
Changing the numbering plan for the PBX, or numbers of individual
extensions or features.
Saving Modified Data
Safely saving PBX data edited with Maintenance Console.
Setting Features
Setting up individual features.
Connection
Q
The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via RS-232C cable.
A
•
•
•
•
•
Q
The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via USB.
A
•
•
•
•
Is the USB cable firmly connected to both the PC and the KX-DT300 series/
KX-T7600 series DPT with a USB Module?
Is the USB driver on the PC running?
To confirm, open the Windows Device Manager, and look for "Panasonic KX-TDA USB
Main Unit driver" in the USB Controllers section. If it is not present, re-install the USB
driver.
Is the password correct?
Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
Q
The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via LAN.
A
•
•
•
•
98
Is the cable firmly connected to both the PC and the PBX?
Is the serial port that the PC uses correctly specified?
Is the baud rate correct?
The default setting, and a safe rate, is 19 200 bps.
Is the password correct?
Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
Is the PC connected to the LAN?
Have the IP address and port number of the PBX been set correctly? For more details,
see 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600).
Is the password correct?
Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
PC Programming Manual
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Q
The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via modem.
A
•
•
•
•
•
Is the dial number of the modem correct? For more details, see 13.1 [11-1] Main.
Has a modem been installed to the PBX?
Are the modem settings of the PBX and Maintenance Console correct? For more
details, see 13.1 [11-1] Main.
Is the password correct?
Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
Q
The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via ISDN Remote.
A
•
•
•
•
Are the ISDN Remote settings of the PC correct? For more details, see 13.1 [11-1]
Main.
Is the ISDN Remote dial number correct?
Is the password correct?
Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
Q
Can I perform initial setup of the PBX without being connected to the PBX?
A
•
Yes. This is possible in Batch mode.
Create a new system data file using 2.2.1 Programme launcher—New, edit settings
as required, and then upload this file to the PBX later (see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer
PC to PBX (SD Card)).
Maintenance Console Software
Q
How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards?
A
•
Q
Not all of the characters of a setting can be displayed because the column is too
narrow.
A
•
From 3.1 [1-1] Slot, click Summary. Summary information, including software
versions, is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.
Move the mouse to the line between the names of 2 setting items, at the top of the
table.
The pointer will change to a double arrow. Click and drag the line to the right until all
characters are displayed.
Card Status
Q
The status of a new card will not change to "INS".
A
•
•
•
•
Q
With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or trunks exceed the
maximum supported by the PBX?
Is the type of card installed in the slot different from the card type set as "Pre-install"
for that slot? Confirm that the correct card is installed in the slot.
Is the card firmly and fully installed in the slot? Confirm that the card is installed
correctly in the slot.
Confirm that the card is not damaged.
I want to set the status of only 1 port of the IP-GW4 card to "OUS".
PC Programming Manual
99
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
A
•
Q
I cannot change an LCO port to INS status.
A
•
•
•
•
•
This cannot be done, since the IP-GW4 card requires both channels of a port to be
set to "OUS"/"INS" together.
Is the card installed in the appropriate slot?
Is the card installed in the correct slot, but not functioning correctly?
Check the condition of the card.
Is the card itself in INS status?
Set it to INS status.
Is a trunk line connected to the appropriate port?
Is the port in FAULT status, even though a trunk is connected?
Run diagnosis on the relevant slot.
Q
How do I prevent newly installed cards automatically being changed to "INS"?
A
•
Change New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card in 3.62 [1-3]
Option from "In Service (INS)" to "Out of Service (OUS)".
Portable Stations
Q
I cannot register Portable Stations using the method described in Portable Station
[1-2].
A
•
•
•
•
•
100
Is the status of the CSIF, DHLC or DLC card set to "INS"?
Is a CS connected to the CSIF, DHLC or DLC card? If not, connect one.
Do the PINs (Personal Identification Numbers) of the PBX and the Portable Station
match? Confirm that they are the same.
Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS?
Has the Portable Station previously been registered at another location?
It is not possible to register a Portable Station at 2 locations, so use the Forced
De-registration option to delete the previous registration.
Q
I cannot delete the extension number of a Portable Station.
A
•
Q
I cannot de-register a Portable Station.
A
•
•
Q
The Portable Station I want to de-register is broken, and will not turn on, or is not
available, or the registration information was deleted first from the Portable Station,
so it cannot be de-registered.
A
•
Q
I changed the extension number of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable
Station still shows the old extension number.
A
•
First, de-register the Portable Station itself, and then delete the extension number.
Is the Portable Station turned on? If not, turn it on.
Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS? If not, move it closer to
the CS and try the de-registration operation again.
The Portable Station can be forcibly de-registered by following the procedure shown
in Forced De-registration of 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station.
Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.
PC Programming Manual
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Q
I changed the FCO of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station still
shows the old FCO.
A
•
Q
If I delete the extension number of a Portable Station, and then turn the Portable
Station off and back on again, it does not function correctly.
A
•
Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.
Do not delete the extension number of the Portable Station, as this information is
necessary for it to operate.
Numbering
Q
How do I change the extension number of a wired extension?
A
•
Q
I changed the extension number of a wired extension while the extension was
engaged in a call, but the display still shows the previous extension number.
A
•
Q
How do I change the extension numbering plan from 3-digit numbers to 4-digit
numbers?
A
•
Q
How do I set a 3-digit numbering plan?
A
•
Q
What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?
Change the extension number of the target port to the new number, and click Apply.
Next, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.
The extension number will not change while the extension is in use. When the
conversation is finished, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.
Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2. Enter a 2-digit number in Leading Number, or change No. of Additional
Digits from "x" to "xx".
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?
in Numbering.
There are 2 methods of creating a 3-digit numbering plan, using 4.9 [2-6-1]
Numbering Plan—Main:
1. Set the leading number to be 2 digits, with one additional digit. This method allows
a maximum of 10 extensions.
Example: Leading Number = 10; No. of Additional Digits = x
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 109 can be used.
2. Set the leading number to be one digit, with 2 additional digits. This method allows
a maximum of 100 extensions.
Example: Leading Number = 1; No. of Additional Digits = xx
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 199 can be used.
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan? in
Numbering.
PC Programming Manual
101
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
102
A
•
Q
When modifying the Numbering Plan, I cannot change the Leading Number.
A
•
Q
When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number?
A
•
Q
How do I change a feature number?
A
•
Perform the following steps:
1. Confirm that the Numbering Plan you will change is not currently being used by
any extensions (see 2.5.8 Tool—Extension List View).
If it is being used by extensions, temporarily change the extension numbers of
those extensions to that of another numbering plan, or delete the extension
number (see 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings and
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings).
2. Clear the Leading Number cell.
3. Click Apply.
4. Modify the No. of Additional Digits cell as required.
5. Click Apply.
6. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
7. Click Apply.
8. Set all extension ports to OUS status.
9. On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired
values.
10. Set all extension ports back to INS status.
It is not possible to use the same Leading Number for 2 extension blocks, or to use a
number that could possibly overlap with another Leading Number.
So, for example, if "2" is already set as a Leading Number it is not possible to set
"21" as another Leading Number because of the possible overlap of extension
numbers.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
• A feature number
• Another extension block
• A Dial setting (see 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table)
• Quick Dialling (see 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.
Perform the following steps:
1. Clear the Leading Number cell.
2. Click Apply.
3. Set No. of Additional Digits to "None".
4. Click Apply.
5. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
6. Click Apply.
7. Set all extension ports to OUS status.
8. On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired
values.
9. Set all extension ports back to INS status.
Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
3. Click Apply.
PC Programming Manual
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Q
I cannot change a feature number.
A
•
Q
How do I change the code used to access another PBX?
A
•
Q
I cannot change an Other PBX Extension code.
A
•
Q
I cannot change a feature number on the B/NA DND Call Feature screen.
A
•
Q
How do I prevent extension numbers being automatically assigned to a newly
installed card?
A
•
It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
• A feature number
• An extension
• A Dial setting (see 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table)
• Quick Dialling (see 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.
Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2. Select the Other PBX Extension tab.
3. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
4. Click Apply.
It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
• A feature number
• An extension
• A Dial setting (see 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table)
• Quick Dialling (see 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.
The number you are trying to store is already being used by another call feature.
Please choose a different number.
Change New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for
Extension Card in the 3.62 [1-3] Option screen from "Automatic" to "Manual".
Saving Modified Data
Q
Modified settings have not been updated in the PBX.
A
•
Q
Modified settings are not saved even when I press the Apply button.
A
•
Q
If I reset the PBX directly after modifying settings, the modified settings are not
updated in the PBX.
Click Apply or OK in the sub-menu screen.
To save the system data files, choose Save from the File menu.
PC Programming Manual
103
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
A
•
When you click Apply, the settings are updated in the PBX, but are not yet saved to
the SD memory card. If system data is not saved to the SD memory card, the PBX will
restore the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX is reset, or
power is turned off and back on again.
Therefore, before resetting the PBX, click the SD memory backup icon to save the
system data to the SD memory card. Alternatively, exit the Maintenance Console. This
automatically saves system data to the SD memory card.
Note
Do not remove the SD memory card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so
may cause the PBX to fail to start when you try to restart the system.
104
Q
After reinitialising the PBX, I restored system data from a previous backup.
However, some of the settings have not been restored to their previous values.
A
•
The following setting data is not saved to the SD memory card, so will be deleted when
the PBX is initialised. This data is stored in the PBX’s battery backup memory.
• Incoming Call Log
• Outgoing Call Log (including Last Number Redial)
• Message Waiting
• SMDR
• Advice of Charge (AOC)/Pay Tone
• Hospitality guest billing data
• ICD Group monitor log for supervisor
• PBX date and time
• Timed Reminder
• LPR Timed Update time
• PT handset/headset volume
• PT SP-PHONE volume
• PT ring volume
• PT display contrast
• ICD Group login status
(All extensions are set to Login by default.)
• ICD Group Ready/Not Ready status
(All extensions are set to Ready by default.)
• Live Call Screening (LCS) On/Off
• Hands-free Answerback status
• Absent Message status of extensions
(Absent Message data itself is not cleared.)
• FWD/DND status
(FWD destinations are not cleared.)
• Extension Dial Lock/Remote Extension Dial Lock
• Extension PIN Lock/Extension PIN Lock counter
• Verification Code PIN Lock/Verification Code PIN Lock counter
• Password Lock counter for Remote System Programming
• PBX Error Log
• Digital Trunk Error Report data
In addition, the following data cannot be restored:
• SVM Log and messages (both greeting messages and voice messages left by
callers) recorded by the SVM feature.
PC Programming Manual
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Setting Features
Q
How do I change the dialling mode of an analogue trunk?
A
•
Q
How do I set disconnect detection (CPC Detection) for an analogue trunk?
A
•
Q
What settings do I change to enable use of an extension ISDN telephone?
A
•
Q
When using a TE with an extension ISDN, how do I enable power output?
A
•
Q
How do I connect to another PBX using QSIG?
A
•
Q
How do I change the type of an extension port?
A
•
Q
I have set the type of an extension port to "DSS Console", but I cannot apply this
setting. (Error E000402)
A
•
Q
I have set the type of an extension port to "VM (DPT)", but I cannot apply this setting.
(Error E000403)
A
•
Q
I have set the type of an extension port to "PC Console", but I cannot apply this
setting. (Error E000402)
A
•
From the 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port screen, change the
Mode setting of the target port to "DTMF" or "Pulse", as required.
Dialling
From the 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port screen, modify the CPC
Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming setting of the target port.
The required value varies by carrier. Transmission and reception can be set
separately.
From the 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port screen, set the
the port you want to use to "Extension".
From the 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port screen, set
on the ISDN Extension tab to "Enable".
Port Type of
ISDN TE Power
From the 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port or 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port
Property - PRI Port screen, set the Port Type of the port you want to use to either
"QSIG-Slave" or "QSIG-Master".
Set the port to OUS status. Then, change DPT Type—Type in the 3.24 [1-1] Slot
—Port Property - Extension Port window.
The number entered in DPT Type—Location No. on the 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port
Property - Extension Port screen is the same as that entered for another DSS
Console. Change this so that the numbers do not overlap.
The DPT Type—VM Unit No. and DPT Type—VM Port No. settings entered on
the 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port screen are the same as those
entered for another VM (DPT). Change this so that the numbers do not overlap.
The number entered in DPT Type—Location No. on the 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port
Property - Extension Port screen is the same as that entered for another PC Console.
Change this so that the numbers do not overlap.
PC Programming Manual
105
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
106
Q
What programming do I have to perform to use a headset with an extension?
A
•
Q
What programming do I have to perform to use XDP with an extension port?
A
•
Q
How do I edit a Class of Service, or create a new Class of Service?
A
•
Q
How do I restrict calls between 2 extensions?
A
•
Q
How do I restrict trunk calls made by extensions?
A
•
Q
How do I modify the hold operation for SLTs?
A
•
Q
How do I set up an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group to receive trunk calls
directly?
A
•
Set Headset OFF/ON on the 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
screen to "Headset ON".
Set XDP Mode on the 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port screen to
"On".
Class of Service feature restrictions can be set from the 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service
—COS Settings screen.
Calls between extensions can be restricted from the 4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—
Internal Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells to select the COS levels whose
extensions are blocked from calling each other.
Trunk calls made by extensions can be restricted from the 4.13 [2-7-2] Class of
Service—External Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells to select the trunk
groups that cannot be used by extensions associated with a particular COS in each
time mode.
To prevent extensions associated with a COS from making trunk calls, set all trunk
groups for that COS to "Block" (blue).
It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT using the
SLT—SLT Hold Mode option on the 4.18 [2-9] System Options screen.
For more details, see "1.13.1 Call Hold" of the Feature Guide.
Perform the following steps:
1. On the 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings screen,
enter the floating extension number you chose for the ICD group in the Floating
Extension Number cell.
2. Click Apply.
3. On the 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Member List screen, select the ICD group you created from the Incoming Call
Distribution drop-down list.
4. Enter the extension numbers of member extensions in the Extension
Number column.
5. Click Apply.
6. On the DIL tab of the 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings screen, enter the
floating extension number of the ICD group as the DIL Destination—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night of each time mode.
7. Modify other settings as required from the Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group submenu.
PC Programming Manual
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Q
How do I set the queuing operation for an Incoming Call Distribution group?
A
•
Q
How do I add an extension as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD)
group?
A
•
Perform the following steps:
1. On the 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Member List screen, from the Incoming Call Distribution drop-down list, select
the group you want to modify.
The ICD group must have an extension number set.
2. Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add in a blank cell of the
Extension Number column.
3. Set Delayed Ring as necessary.
4. Click Apply.
Note that it is necessary to set the extension number of the ICD group in advance.
Q
I cannot set system speed dialling numbers from PC Console.
A
•
•
Perform the following steps:
1. On the 5.15 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
screen, set the actions as required for each queuing table.
2. On the 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings screen,
from the Queuing Time Table tab, select the number of the Queuing Time Table
to use in each time mode.
Set the COS of the extension to which PC Console is connected to Manager class, by
setting Manager on the Manager tab of the 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS
Settings screen to "Enable".
System speed dialling numbers can only be edited by one PC Console at a time.
Q
I have set FWD through system programming, but calls are still not being forwarded.
A
•
Perform the following steps:
1. Check that the Forward / DND settings of the target extension on the 6.3 [4-1-2]
Wired Extension—FWD/DND or 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
screen are set to one of the forwarding settings.
2. Create a FWD button on the target extension if one does not already exist.
3. Press the FWD button so that it changes to FWD status.
PC Programming Manual
107
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
108
PC Programming Manual
Section 3
[1] Configuration
PC Programming Manual
109
3.1 [1-1] Slot
3.1 [1-1] Slot
The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed.
Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary
of status and MPR versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Summary button (see 3.2 [1-1] Slot
—Summary).
To install a new card to the PBX
1. Click on the name of the card to install in the list on the right.
An image of the card will be displayed to the left of the list, and information about the card will be shown
below.
2. Click and drag the image of the card to the free slot it is to be installed in, and release it.
The card will move into the slot space.
3. Click Yes to confirm.
To switch between physical and virtual shelves of the PBX
1. Move the mouse pointer over the small PBX image for virtual slots.
Select Shelf will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Click Select Shelf.
To install a new shelf to the PBX (KX-TDE600 only)
1. Move the mouse pointer over the first greyed PBX image at the bottom of the screen.
Pre-Install will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Click Pre-Install.
3. Click Yes to confirm.
To select a different shelf of the PBX (KX-TDE600 only)
1. Move the mouse pointer over the white PBX image at the bottom of the screen for the Expansion Shelf
you wish to select.
Select Shelf will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Click Select Shelf.
To access card properties
1. Move the mouse pointer over a card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Card Property.
The property screen for that card will be displayed.
To access port properties
1. Move the mouse pointer over a card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Port Property.
The property screen for that card’s port or ports will be displayed.
110
PC Programming Manual
3.1 [1-1] Slot
To remove a card from the PBX
1. Move the mouse pointer over the card to remove.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Delete.
3. Click Yes to confirm.
The card will be removed.
To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (Interactive mode only)
1. Move the mouse pointer over the card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select the desired status:
• Click INS to set the card to in-service status.
• Click OUS to set the card to out-of-service status.
To install an option card on an OPB3 card
1. Move the mouse pointer over the card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Option Card.
The OPB3 Option Card Setup screen will be displayed. See 3.60 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card
Setup.
To access IP-PT port properties
1. Click the IP Phone Registration button.
Supported Card Types
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
Card
Maximum Quantity
Card Programming
1 (fixed)
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/
KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
IPCMPR: IP Convergence Main
Processing Card
DHLC4: 4-Port Digital Hybrid
Extension Card
KX-NCP500: 1
KX-NCP1000: 1
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card
KX-NCP500: 2
KX-NCP1000: 2
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property Extension Type
SLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card
LCOT4: 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card
KX-NCP500: 3
KX-NCP1000: 4
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property LCO type
PC Programming Manual
111
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Card
BRI2: 2-Port BRI Card
Maximum Quantity
KX-NCP500: 3
KX-NCP1000: 4
PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels)
Card Programming
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI
type/PRI type
PRI30: PRI Card (30B channels)
T1: T-1 Trunk Card
KX-NCP500: 2
KX-NCP1000: 2
E1: E-1 Trunk Card
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1
type
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1
type
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card
KX-NCP500: 2
KX-NCP1000: 3
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card
Property
V-IPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel VoIP
Extension Card
KX-NCP500: 4
KX-NCP1000: 4
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property Virtual IP Extension
V-SIPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel SIP
Extension Card
KX-NCP500: 4
KX-NCP1000: 4
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property Virtual SIP Extension
V-IPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel VoIP
Gateway Card
KX-NCP500: 2
KX-NCP1000: 2
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway
V-IPCS4: Virtual 4 IP Cell Station
Interface Card
KX-NCP500: 4
KX-NCP1000: 4
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property Virtual IPCS
For more information on the IPCMPR card, virtual cards and other optional cards, see the following sections
in the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 Installation Manual:
→ 1.2.1 Optional Equipment
→ 3.3.1 IPCMPR Card
→ 3.4.1 Virtual Cards
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
Card
Maximum Quantity
Card Programming
1 (fixed in Slot 00)
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/
KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
IPCMPR: IP Convergence Main
Processing Card
112
PC Programming Manual
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Card
Maximum Quantity
Card Programming
DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid
Extension Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
MSLC16: 16-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension with Message
Lamp Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card
KX-TDE100: 6
KX-TDE200: 8
SLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property Extension Type
CSLC16: 16-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension Card with Caller
ID
MCSLC16*1: 16-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension with Caller ID
and Message Lamp Card
MCSLC24*1: 24-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension with Caller ID
and Message Lamp Card
KX-TDE100: 5
KX-TDE200: 5
IP-EXT16: 16-Channel VoIP Extension
Card
KX-TDE100: 6
KX-TDE200: 8
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP
Extension (KX-TDE series only)
CSIF4: 4 Cell Station Interface Card
KX-TDE100: 4
KX-TDE200: 4
None
KX-TDE100: 6
KX-TDE200: 8
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property LCO type
DID8: 8-Port DID Card
KX-TDE100: 6
KX-TDE200: 8
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID
type (KX-TDE series only)
BRI4: 4-Port BRI Card
KX-TDE100: 6
KX-TDE200: 8
CSIF8: 8 Cell Station Interface Card
LCOT4: 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card
LCOT8: 8-Port Analogue Trunk Card
LCOT16: 16-Port Analogue Trunk
Card
BRI8: 8-Port BRI Card
PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels)
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI
type/PRI type
PRI30: PRI Card (30B channels)
T1: T-1 Trunk Card
KX-TDE100: 4
KX-TDE200: 4
E1: E-1 Trunk Card
E&M8: 8-Port E & M Trunk Card
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1
type
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1
type
KX-TDE100: 6
KX-TDE200: 8
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM
type (KX-TDE series only)
PC Programming Manual
113
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Card
Maximum Quantity
Card Programming
KX-TDE100: 4
KX-TDE200: 4
3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP
Gateway (KX-TDE series only)
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card
KX-TDE100: 4
KX-TDE200: 4
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card
Property
V-IPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel VoIP
Extension Card
KX-TDE100: 4
KX-TDE200: 4
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property Virtual IP Extension
V-SIPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel SIP
Extension Card
KX-TDE100: 4
KX-TDE200: 4
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property Virtual SIP Extension
V-IPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel VoIP
Gateway Card
KX-TDE100: 2
KX-TDE200: 2
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway
V-IPCS4: Virtual 4 IP Cell Station
Interface Card
KX-TDE100: 4
KX-TDE200: 4
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property Virtual IPCS
IP-GW4: 4-Channel VoIP Gateway
Card
IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway
Card
*1
To use MCSLC16 or MCSLC24 cards with a KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PBX, the PBX must have an IPCMEC card installed.
For more information on the IPCMPR card, virtual cards and other optional cards, see the following sections
in the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 Installation Manual:
→ 1.2.1 Optional Equipment
→ 3.3.1 IPCMPR Card
→ 3.4.1 Virtual Cards
KX-TDE600
Card
IPCEMPR: IP Convergence Main
Processing Card
114
PC Programming Manual
Maximum Quantity
Card Programming
1 (fixed in Slot 11)
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/
KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Card
Maximum Quantity
Card Programming
DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid
Extension Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
EMSLC16: 16-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension with Message
Lamp Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card
ESLC16: 16-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension Card
40
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property Extension Type
CSLC16: 16-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension Card with Caller
ID
ECSLC24: 24-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension Card with Caller
ID
IP-EXT16: 16-Channel VoIP Extension
Card
CSIF4: 4 Cell Station Interface Card
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP
Extension (KX-TDE series only)
16
None
ELCOT16: 16-Port Analogue Trunk
Card
40
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property LCO type
DID8: 8-Port DID Card
40
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID
type (KX-TDE series only)
CSIF8: 8 Cell Station Interface Card
BRI4: 4-Port BRI Card
BRI8: 8-Port BRI Card
40
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI
type/PRI type
PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels)
PRI30: PRI Card (30B channels)
T1: T-1 Trunk Card
20
E1: E-1 Trunk Card
E&M8: 8-Port E & M Trunk Card
IP-GW4: 4-Channel VoIP Gateway
Card
IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway
Card
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1
type
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1
type
40
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM
type (KX-TDE series only)
40
3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP
Gateway (KX-TDE series only)
PC Programming Manual
115
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Card
Maximum Quantity
Card Programming
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card
16
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card
Property
EECHO16: 16-Channel Echo
Canceller Card
8
None
V-IPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel VoIP
Extension Card
4
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property Virtual IP Extension
V-SIPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel SIP
Extension Card
4
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property Virtual SIP Extension
V-IPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel VoIP
Gateway Card
2
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway
V-IPCS4: Virtual 4 IP Cell Station
Interface Card
4
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property Virtual IPCS
For more information on the IPCEMPR card, virtual cards and other optional cards, see the following sections
in the KX-TDE600 Installation Manual:
→ 1.2.1 Optional Equipment
→ 3.3.1 IPCEMPR Card
→ 3.4.1 Virtual Cards
116
PC Programming Manual
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.
For the KX-TDE600, when the PBX has more than two shelves, click a tab to select the shelves to view.
Physical Shelf
No.
Indicates the slot number (reference only).
Value Range
Available slot numbers.
Maintenance Console Location
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Guide References
None
Card Type
Indicates the type of service card installed in each slot of the physical shelf (reference only). Note that for
MPR cards, the PBX model code is displayed in parentheses after the name.
Value Range
Card Type for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000:
DHLC4: 4-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
SLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
LCOT4: 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card
BRI2: 2-Port BRI Card
PRI23: PRI Card
PRI30: PRI Card
T1: T-1 Trunk Card
E1: E-1 Trunk Card
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card
IPCMPR: MPR Card
Card Type for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
MSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with Message Lamp Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
PC Programming Manual
117
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
SLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
CSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with Caller ID
MCSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Caller ID and Message Lamp Card
MCSLC24: 24-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Caller ID and Message Lamp Card
CSI/F: 8 or 4 Cell Station Interface Card
LCOT16: 16-Port Analogue Trunk Card
LCOT8: 8-Port Analogue Trunk Card
LCOT4: 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card
BRI8: 8-Port BRI Card
BRI4: 4-Port BRI Card
PRI23: PRI Card
PRI30: PRI Card
T1: T-1 Trunk Card
E1: E-1 Trunk Card
E&M8: 8-Port E & M Trunk Card
DID8: 8-Port DID Card
IP-GW4: 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card
IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
IP-EXT16: 16-Channel VoIP Extension Card
IPCMPR: MPR Card
Card Type for KX-TDE600:
DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
EMSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
ESLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
CSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with Caller ID
ECSLC24: 24-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with Caller ID
CSI/F: 4 or 8 Cell Station Interface Card
ELCOT16: 16-Port Analogue Trunk Card
BRI8: 8-Port BRI Card
BRI4: 4-Port BRI Card
PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels)
PRI30: PRI Card (30B channels)
T1: T-1 Trunk Card
E1: E-1 Trunk Card
E&M8: 8-Port E & M Trunk Card
DID8: 8-Port DID Card
IP-GW4: 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card
IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
IP-EXT16: 16-Channel VoIP Extension Card
EECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card
IPCEMPR: MPR Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
118
PC Programming Manual
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only)
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only)
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Guide References
None
Status
Indicates the card status (reference only)
Note that MPR card status is always displayed as "-".
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Pre-Install: A card has been added to the slot.
Idle: No card is installed in the slot.
Maintenance Console Location
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Guide References
None
Version
Indicates the LPR version of the installed card (reference only).
For IP-EXT cards, both the LPR version and the VoIP version are displayed. The LPR version is shown on the
left, and the VoIP version on the right, as follows:
(Example) 1.002 / 1.001
Value Range
Version number
PC Programming Manual
119
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Maintenance Console Location
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Guide References
None
IPCMPR Virtual Slot (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/
IPCEMPR Virtual Slot (for KX-TDE600)
No.
Indicates the slot number (reference only).
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Guide References
None
Slot Type
Indicates the slot type (reference only).
Value Range
Trunk, Extension
Maintenance Console Location
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Guide References
None
120
PC Programming Manual
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Card Type
Indicates the type of virtual VoIP card installed in each slot of the virtual shelf (reference only).
Value Range
V-IPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel VoIP Extension Card
V-SIPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel SIP Extension Card
V-IPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
V-SIPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel SIP Trunk Card
V-IPCS4: Virtual 4 IP Cell Station Interface Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Feature Guide References
None
Status
Indicates the card status (reference only).
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Pre-Install: A card has been added to the slot.
Idle: No card is installed in the slot.
Maintenance Console Location
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
121
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key
Refreshes and displays information on activation keys provided by activation key files on the SD memory card
and pre-installed activation keys of the DSP card.
It is possible to programme the number of provided IP Trunk channels to be used for H.323 and SIP trunks.
In the The number of activated IP-GW box, type the number of IP Trunk channels to be used for H.323 trunks.
The remaining number of IP Trunk channels will be used for SIP trunks.
Similarly, you can programme how many IP softphones can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary
Telephone activation key. In the The number of activated IP Softphone box, type the number of IP softphones
to be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key. The remainder is the number of
IP-PTs that can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key. At default, only IP
softphones can be used.
IPCMPR-ID (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/
IPCEMPR-ID (for KX-TDE600)
Indicates the ID number of the MPR card (reference only).
Value Range
ID number of the MPR card
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Activated Feature
Indicates the type of activation keys (reference only).
Note that the types of activation keys are subject to change without notice. For CA activation keys, refer to the
documentation for CA.
Value Range
IP Trunk (ch): IP Trunk Activation Key
IP Proprietary Telephone (ch): IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key
IP Proprietary Telephone/IP Softphone (ch): IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone Activation Key
SIP Extension (ch): SIP Extension Activation Key
Enhanced Features: Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version
CA Basic (user): Activation Key for CA Basic-Express
CA Pro (user): Activation Key for CA Pro
CA Supervisor (user): Activation Key for CA ICD Group Monitor
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key
122
PC Programming Manual
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
The number of activated feature by—VoIP-DSP Card
Indicates the number of channels provided by the DSP card (reference only).
Value Range
For DSP4/DSP16 card:
IP Trunk (ch): 4
IP Proprietary Telephone (ch): 8
For DSP64 card:
IP Trunk (ch): 16
IP Proprietary Telephone (ch): 32
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
The number of activated feature by—Activation Key File in SD Card
Indicates the number of channels (or CA users) provided by activation key files on the SD memory card
(reference only).
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
123
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key
The number of activated feature by—Total
Indicates the total number of channels (or CA users) provided by the DSP card and activation key files on the
SD memory card (reference only).
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
124
PC Programming Manual
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/
IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600)
The properties of the MPR card can be specified.
LAN Setting
DHCP Client
Enables the DHCP Client function to assign IP address information automatically to the MPR card.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.4.5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment
MAC Address for IPCMPR Card (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE200)/MAC Address for IPCEMPR Card (for KX-TDE600)
Indicates the MAC address of the MPR card (reference only).
Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
125
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
IP Address for IPCMPR Card (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE200)/IP Address for IPCEMPR Card (for KX-TDE600)
Specifies the IP address of the MPR card. This parameter is only available for entering values when DHCP
Client is disabled.
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
MAC Address for VoIP-DSP
Indicates the MAC address of the DSP card (reference only).
Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
IP Address for VoIP-DSP
Specifies the IP address of the DSP card. This parameter is only available for entering values when DHCP
Client is disabled.
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
126
PC Programming Manual
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Subnet Mask
Specifies the subnet mask address of the MPR card. This parameter is only available for entering values when
DHCP Client is disabled.
Value Range
0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Default Gateway
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway for the network. This parameter is only available for entering
values when DHCP Client is disabled.
Value Range
0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
127
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
Feature Guide References
None
Speed/Duplex for Main Port
Specifies the connection mode of the main port. The connection is made in 100Mbps/half duplex when Auto
Negotiation fails.
Value Range
Auto Negotiation
100Mbps/full duplex
100Mbps/half duplex
10Mbps/full duplex
10Mbps/half duplex
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Speed/Duplex for Maintenance Port
Specifies the connection mode of the maintenance port. The connection is made in 100Mbps/half duplex when
Auto Negotiation fails.
Value Range
Auto Negotiation
100Mbps/full duplex
100Mbps/half duplex
10Mbps/full duplex
10Mbps/half duplex
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
128
PC Programming Manual
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
LAN Disconnect Decision Time
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before disconnecting LAN connection when no communication
via the LAN is detected.
Value Range
1–10 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DHCP Port Number
Specifies the port number used by a DHCP server.
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.4.5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment
DHCP Time Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive IP addressing information from a DHCP server.
Value Range
1–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
PC Programming Manual
129
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.4.5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment
VoIP-DSP Option
DSP Card Type
Indicates the type of the installed DSP card (reference only).
Value Range
For KX-NCP series:
None, DSP4, DSP16, DSP64
For KX-TDE series:
None, DSP16, DSP64
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DSP Card Status
Indicates whether the DSP card is enabled for use (reference only).
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
130
PC Programming Manual
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
IPCMPR-SVM TS Circuit Availability (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR-SVM TS Circuit Availability (for KX-TDE600)
Specifies whether the built-in ESVM card of the PBX is enabled or disabled.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
IP Extension Count of BGM
Specifies how many IP-PTs connected to the MPR card can send out BGM.
Value Range
When using the built-in ESVM card:
0–113
When not using the built-in ESVM card:
0–117
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Feature Guide References
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
Version
Indicates the programme software file version of the installed DSP card (reference only).
Value Range
Version number
PC Programming Manual
131
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Jitter Compensation Operation for G.711
Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for voice communications using the G.711 codec.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Jitter Compensation Operation for G.711 FAX
Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for fax communications using the G.711 codec.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
132
PC Programming Manual
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
Jitter Compensation Operation for G.729A
Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for communications using the G.729A codec.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for Voice
Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.
Value Range
0–200 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for Voice
Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.
Value Range
0–200 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
PC Programming Manual
133
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for Voice
Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for voice communications.
Value Range
0–200 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for Voice
Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for voice communications.
Value Range
1000–65530 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for FAX
Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications.
134
PC Programming Manual
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
Value Range
0–200 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for FAX
Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications.
Value Range
0–200 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for FAX
Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for fax communications.
Value Range
0–200 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
135
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
Feature Guide References
None
Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for FAX
Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for fax communications.
Value Range
1000–65530 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF Detection Level for G.711A
Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G.711A codec.
Value Range
-45– -12 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF Detection Level for G.711µ
Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G.711µ codec.
Value Range
-39– -6 dB
136
PC Programming Manual
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON)
Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal.
Value Range
20–5000 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 (OFF)
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected.
Value Range
20–5000 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
137
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter
Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation.
Value Range
1–3
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CED Signal Fixation Detection Time
Specifies the minimum length of time required for the CED (called station identification) signal to be detected
by the PBX.
Value Range
50 ´ n (n=1–100) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T38 FAX Transmit Level (Network to PBX) A-Law
Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T.38 protocol packets, when the
codec used is G.711A.
Value Range
-13–2 dB
138
PC Programming Manual
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T38 FAX Transmit Level (Network to PBX) µ-Law
Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T.38 protocol packets, when the
codec used is G.711µ.
Value Range
-7–8 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DSP CODEC G.711 only (SIP extension)
Specifies whether or not to only use the G.711 codec for SIP extension calls.
Value Range
Enable, Disable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
139
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
DSP CODEC G.711 only (IP-GW)
Specifies whether or not to only use the G.711 codec for IP trunk calls.
Value Range
Enable, Disable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Feature Guide References
None
DSP CODEC Priority-1 value only (others)
Specifies whether or not to only use the priority 1 codec set for the following types of calls:
• IP extension calls
• SIP trunk calls
Value Range
Enable, Disable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Feature Guide References
None
Port Number
Maintenance Port Number
Specifies the port number used to operate Maintenance Console via the LAN.
Value Range
1–65535
140
PC Programming Manual
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
LOGIN Port Number
Specifies the port number used to login to the PBX via the LAN.
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CTI Port Number
Specifies the port number used to operate CTI via the LAN. Selecting "0" disables the 3rd Party CTI feature.
Value Range
0–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features
PC Programming Manual
141
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
Built-in Communication Assistant Server
Specifies the port number for the Communication Assistant (CA) application.
Value Range
1024–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in Communication Assistant
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in Communication Assistant
Feature Guide References
1.32.3 CA (Communication Assistant)
LAN Status
LINK for Main Port
Indicates the current connection status of the main port (reference only).
Value Range
Disconnect, Connect
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
LINK for Maintenance Port
Indicates the current connection status of the maintenance port (reference only).
Value Range
Disconnect, Connect
142
PC Programming Manual
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DHCP
DHCP Client
Indicates the DHCP client function status of the MPR card (reference only).
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.4.5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment
IP Address for IPCMPR Card (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE200)/IP Address for IPCEMPR Card (for KX-TDE600)
Indicates the IP address of the MPR card (reference only).
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
143
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
Feature Guide References
None
IP Address for VoIP-DSP
Indicates the IP address of the DSP card (reference only).
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Subnet Mask
Indicates the subnet mask address of the MPR card (reference only).
Value Range
0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Default Gateway
Indicates the IP address of the default gateway for the network (reference only).
Value Range
0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
144
PC Programming Manual
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for
KX-TDE600)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
IPCMPR (for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600)
Memory Version (KX-TDE series only)
Indicates the hardware version of the IPCMEC card when it is mounted on the MPR card (reference only).
Value Range
None: Not mounted
2: Standard IPCMEC card
3: Optional IPCMEC card (6M)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.8 Software Upgrading
PC Programming Manual
145
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
The properties of the built-in SVM (Simplified Voice Message) and OGM (Outgoing Message) features can be
specified. To change the status of the built-in ESVM card, click Command.
Only the following parameters can be set. Other parameters on this screen are only applicable for the Optional
Base card. See 3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property for details.
Note
To reach this screen, move the mouse pointer over the MPR card and click SVM Property.
Slot
Indicates the slot type (reference only).
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Sub-Slot
Indicates the sub-slot number (reference only).
Value Range
Sub-slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Feature Card Type
Indicates the feature type of each sub-slot (reference only).
146
PC Programming Manual
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Value Range
In sub-slot 1–2:
Reserve: No feature is installed.
In sub-slot 3:
ESVM2: Built-in ESVM card is installed.
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Status
Indicates the status of the feature type of each slot (reference only).
The sub-slot 3 column offers two ways to open the screen to select the card command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
For sub-slot 1–2:
Not applicable.
For sub-slot 3:
INS: Built-in ESVM card is activated.
OUS: Built-in ESVM card is not activated.
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Feature Guide References
None
Port Number
Indicates the port number of the built-in ESVM card (reference only).
PC Programming Manual
147
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Status
Indicates the port status of the built-in ESVM card (reference only).
Value Range
For sub-slot 1–2:
Not applicable.
For sub-slot 3:
INS: The card is activated.
OUS: The card is not activated.
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
SVM Feature
Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature. It is possible to use the ESVM card for
the SVM feature, as an MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
148
PC Programming Manual
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—
SVM Feature
Feature Guide References
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
MSG Feature
Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as an MSG card (OGM feature). It is possible to use the
ESVM card for the SVM feature, as an MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—
MSG Feature
Feature Guide References
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
PC Programming Manual
149
3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Commands for the built-in ESVM card can be programmed.
INS
Puts the feature in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the feature out of service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
150
PC Programming Manual
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP Gateway port.
To change the status of virtual IP Gateway ports, click Command.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
PC Programming Manual
151
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Call Distribution Port Group
Specifies a call distribution port group to which incoming trunk calls are directed through the virtual VoIP
gateway port.
Value Range
1–16
Maintenance Console Location
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group
152
PC Programming Manual
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—Connection Command
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
—Connection Command
Commands for the virtual IP gateway ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
153
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Common settings for all of the V-IPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed.
Main
Gatekeeper Available
Specifies whether to use a gatekeeper. This setting can only be changed when all V-IPGW cards are set to
OUS.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Call Signalling Model
Specifies whether to carry out a call control (H.225) process directly between the cards or through a gatekeeper.
Value Range
Direct, GateKeeper
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Gatekeeper Connection Checking Interval (*60s)
Specifies the time between periodic checks of connection to the gatekeeper.
Value Range
0 (disabled), 1–1440
154
PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Primary Gatekeeper IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the primary gatekeeper.
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Primary Gatekeeper Port Number
Specifies the port number of the primary gatekeeper.
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
155
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Secondary Gatekeeper IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the secondary gatekeeper.
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Secondary Gatekeeper Port Number
Specifies the port number of the secondary gatekeeper.
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
H.225 Port Number
Specifies the port number for the H.225 protocol (call control) in an H.323 protocol suite.
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
156
PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Feature Guide References
None
RAS Port Number
Specifies the port number for the H.225 protocol (RAS) in an H.323 protocol suite.
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
QSIG Connectionless Tunneling TCP Port Number
Specifies the TCP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations
in a QSIG network.
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
QSIG Connectionless Tunneling UDP Port Number
Specifies the UDP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations
in a QSIG network.
Value Range
1–65535
PC Programming Manual
157
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
H.323 Dynamic Port Number
Specifies the starting port number from which 448 contiguous ports are used as dynamic ports.
Value Range
1–65000
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
RTCP Packet Sending Ability
Specifies whether to enable the PBX to send RTCP packets.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
158
PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
RTCP Packet Interval
Specifies the length of time until the PBX retries to send RTCP packets when no reply is received.
Value Range
5–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
RTP QoS Available
Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field of the packet.
Value Range
ToS, DSCP, HEX
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
RTP QoS-ToS Priority
Specifies the priority level in the ToS field.
Value Range
0–7
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
159
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Feature Guide References
None
RTP QoS-ToS Type
Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field.
Value Range
Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
RTP QoS-DSCP
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ.
Value Range
0–63
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
RTP QoS-HEX
Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number.
Value Range
00–FF
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
160
PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Echo Canceller Ability
Specifies the echo canceller ability time.
Value Range
OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
DSP Digital Gain (Up)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
PC Programming Manual
161
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.
Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
162
PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
QSIG-CT
Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
QSIG-CF
Enables a call to be forwarded to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network. When using the
Centralised VM feature, set this to "No".
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each trunk.
Value Range
Public, Private, VPN
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
PC Programming Manual
163
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Outgoing Call
First-digit Timer (T302-1)
Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a dial number must be dialled after seizing a virtual IP
trunk.
Value Range
5–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Inter-digit Timer (T302-2)
Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a dial number must be dialled.
Value Range
1–10 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Dial End Code
Specifies the delimiter code to be used to signal the end of a dialled number.
164
PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Value Range
0–9, #, *
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Incoming Call
Voice Activity Detection for G.711
Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth
by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Voice Codec Priority 1st
Specifies the highest priority codec type. For fax communications, it is necessary to specify G.711A or G.
711µ for this parameter.
Value Range
G.711A, G.711µ, G.729A
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
PC Programming Manual
165
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Voice Codec Priority 2nd
Specifies the second highest priority codec type.
Value Range
None, G.711A, G.711µ, G.729A
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Voice Codec Priority 3rd
Specifies the third highest priority codec type.
Value Range
None, G.711A, G.711µ, G.729A
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Packet Sampling Time for G.711A
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
166
PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Packet Sampling Time for G.711µ
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Packet Sampling Time for G.729A
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
167
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Feature Guide References
None
FAX Detection Ability
Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot
be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable
end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Incoming Call—
Voice Codec Priority 1st
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF
Specifies the type of DTMF tone to be sent out.
Value Range
Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (H.245)
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Payload Type
Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if
DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).
Value Range
96–127
168
PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T38 FAX Max Datagram
Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T.38 protocol.
Value Range
272–512
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy
Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
169
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T.30 messages
Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol.
Value Range
0–7
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data
Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol.
Value Range
0–3
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T38 FAX Rate Management Method
Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol.
Value Range
Transferred TCF, Local TCF
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
170
PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Feature Guide References
None
Timer
T301
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call.
Value Range
0–18000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T302
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T303
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
PC Programming Manual
171
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T304
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T305
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
172
PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
T308
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T309
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T310
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance message after receiving the Incoming Call
Proceeding message.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
PC Programming Manual
173
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T313
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T316
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T318
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
174
PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T319
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T322
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
175
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
T3D3
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
T3D9
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
176
PC Programming Manual
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GK Settings
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—
GK Settings
Gatekeeper registration information can be programmed.
Destination Number
Specifies a telephone number to register with a gatekeeper.
Value Range
Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GK Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Device Name
Specifies the name of the device for programming reference.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GK Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
177
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—
GW Settings
The settings related to destination gateway devices can be programmed. The following parameters can be
specified for a maximum of 100 destination gateway devices.
Main
GW Name
Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
GW IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the destination gateway device.
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
GW Group
Specifies the number of the gateway group to which the gateway entry belongs. A maximum of 256 gateway
groups can be created.
178
PC Programming Manual
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Value Range
1–256, None
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection for IP-GW16
Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature between the V-IPGW and KX-TDE/KX-TDA IP-GW
cards.
Value Range
Disable (TDE), Enable (TDA)
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Protocol
Specifies the type of protocol for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in
a QSIG network.
Value Range
TCP, UDP
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
179
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Feature Guide References
None
Progress Tone Send Mode
Specifies whether to send call progress tones to the destination. When selecting External, call progress tones
are audible at the destination.
Value Range
External, Internal
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Option 1
GW Name
Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
IP Codec Priority—1st, 2nd, 3rd
Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used. For fax communications, it is necessary to specify G.711A or
G.711Mu for 1st priority.
180
PC Programming Manual
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Value Range
For 1st:
G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A
For 2nd and 3rd:
None, G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Packet Sampling Time (G.711A)
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Packet Sampling Time (G.711Mu)
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
PC Programming Manual
181
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Option 2
GW Name
Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Voice Activity Detection for G.711
Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth
by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.
182
PC Programming Manual
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
FAX Detection Ability
Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot
be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable
end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings—Option 1—
3rd
IP Codec Priority—1st, 2nd,
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF
Specifies the method to transport DTMF tones.
Value Range
Inband, Outband (RFC2833), Outband (H.245)
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
183
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Feature Guide References
None
Payload Type
Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if
DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).
Value Range
96–127
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
184
PC Programming Manual
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—
DN2IP
The related settings of the address translation of telephone numbers and IP addresses can be programmed.
Leading Number
Specifies the leading digits in dialled numbers by which to associate calls with the appropriate destination.
Value Range
Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Remaining Number of Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be dialled following the leading number to access the destination.
Value Range
0–29
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
GW No./GW Group Selection
Specifies the type of destination when making calls: a gateway device or a gateway group.
Value Range
GW Group, GW No.
PC Programming Manual
185
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
GW Group
Specifies the number of the destination gateway group. This setting is only available when GW No./GW Group
Selection on this screen is set to GW Group.
Value Range
1–256
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
GW No.
Specifies the number of the destination gateway device. This setting is only available when GW No./GW Group
Selection on this screen is set to GW No..
Value Range
1–100
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
186
PC Programming Manual
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—
Hunt Pattern
The related settings of hunt patterns can be programmed. The hunt pattern determines how to route incoming
calls through virtual IP trunks to the PBX.
A maximum of 32 hunt patterns can be programmed.
Hunt Pattern 1–16
Leading Number
Specifies the leading digits of dialled numbers by which to determine the call distribution port group to direct
incoming calls.
Value Range
Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Call Distribution Port Group—1st–16th
Specifies the number of the call distribution port group to which incoming calls are directed in priority.
Value Range
For 1st:
CDPG1–CDPG16
For 2nd–16th:
None, CDPG1–CDPG16
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern
Programming Manual References
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—
Call Distribution Port Group
Feature Guide References
1.30.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group
PC Programming Manual
187
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified.
Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server)
Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
1024–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Signalling (MGCP) UDP Port No. (Server)
Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control
Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
1024–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Signalling (MGCP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT)
Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data on the
IP-PT side. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
188
PC Programming Manual
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Value Range
1024–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (Server)
Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol)
data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, the V-IPEXT card uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number
specified here.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
1024–65024
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT)
Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-PT side.
This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-PT uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified
here.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
1024–65024
PC Programming Manual
189
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Keep Alive Time-Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to consider an IP-PT to be active even if it receives no
transmissions from that IP-PT. The PBX constantly confirms the status of IP-PTs. If no communications are
received from an IP-PT for the duration specified here, the PBX considers the IP-PT to be unreachable, and
sets the port status to Fault.
During operation, set between 10 s and 60 s. Settings over 60 s, and Disable, are used for debugging purposes,
and IP-PTs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances. Do not use debugging settings
unless instructed to do so.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
Disable, 10–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
First Resending Time (PTAP)
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
500 ´ n (n=1–16) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
190
PC Programming Manual
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Resending Time Out (PTAP)
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
150–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
First Resending Time (MGCP)
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control
Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
500 ´ n (n=1–8) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
PC Programming Manual
191
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Resending Time Out (MGCP)
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol)
data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
75–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Echo Canceller Ability
Specifies the echo canceller ability time.
Value Range
OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
192
PC Programming Manual
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
DSP Digital Gain (Up)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.
Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong
PC Programming Manual
193
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
194
PC Programming Manual
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP extension port.
To change the status of virtual IP extension ports, click Command.
IP-PT Registration and De-registration
An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-PT later.
Preparation
Open 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/
IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600), and confirm that the IP addresses of the MPR and DSP cards, subnet mask
address, and default gateway address are set.
Registration
Follow the steps below to register the IP-PT.
1. Connect the IP-PT to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers and names are displayed on the
left.
3. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show "Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "Registered".
De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-PT.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".
Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-PT when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful
or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the IP-PT.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click
Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
PC Programming Manual
195
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".
Main
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.
196
PC Programming Manual
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
PC Programming Manual
197
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Status
Indicates whether a certain IP-PT is registered (reference only).
Value Range
None, Registered
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address)
Specifies the MAC address of the IP-PT.
This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS.
Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Current IP Address
Indicates the current IP address of the IP-PT (reference only).
198
PC Programming Manual
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Program Ver.
Indicates the programme software file version of the IP-PT (reference only).
Value Range
Version number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Option
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
199
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
200
PC Programming Manual
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Headset OFF/ON
Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP-PT.
Value Range
Headset OFF, Headset ON
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
PC Programming Manual
201
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Ringing Tone
Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls.
Value Range
A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz)
B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz)
C: 128 ms (697 Hz), 128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96 ms (852 Hz)
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
IP Codec Priority
Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data.
Some codecs may become unavailable depending on the value set here, as follows:
– When G.722 is selected, the priority is G.722 ® G.711 ® G.729A.
– When G.711 is selected, the priority is G.711 ® G.729A (G.722 is unavailable).
– When G.729A is selected, both G.711 and G.722 are unavailable.
Value Range
G.711, G.729A, G.722
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Packet Sampling Time (G.711/G.722)
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms
202
PC Programming Manual
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
PC Programming Manual
203
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Connection Command
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
—Connection Command
Commands for the virtual IP extension ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
Feature Guide References
None
204
PC Programming Manual
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
The properties of the virtual SIP Extension card can be specified.
UDP Port No. for SIP Extension Server
Specifies the UDP port number used for the SIP Extension server.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
SIP Location Hold Time Max.
Specifies the maximum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
10–3600 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
SIP Location Hold Time Min.
Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
10–3600 s
PC Programming Manual
205
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
SIP Location Hold Time Interval
Specifies the interval time that the PBX waits before starting to hold information on location of SIP Extensions.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
1–10 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
SIP Session Timer Min.
Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX waits before disconnecting SIP sessions when no
communication is detected.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
90–3600 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
206
PC Programming Manual
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Echo Canceller Ability
Specifies the echo canceller ability time.
Value Range
OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
DSP Digital Gain (Up)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
207
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.
Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
208
PC Programming Manual
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Port
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP extension port.
To change the status of virtual SIP extension ports, click Command.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
PC Programming Manual
209
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Password
Specifies the password used for registering a SIP Extension to the PBX. While it is possible to enter a password
manually for each SIP Extension, you can copy Extension Number to Password clicking Copy to button. This
parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS.
Value Range
3–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z)
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
210
PC Programming Manual
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Current IP Address
Indicates the current IP address of the SIP Extension (reference only).
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Bearer
Selects the bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set to Speech automatically.
Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Packet Sampling Time (G.711/G.722)
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
PC Programming Manual
211
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Voice Activity Detection for G.711
Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth
by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.
Value Range
OFF, ON
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
212
PC Programming Manual
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Voice Activity Detection for G.729A
Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.729A codec. This feature conserves bandwidth
by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.
Value Range
OFF, ON
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
PC Programming Manual
213
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension
Port—Connection Command
Commands for the virtual SIP extension ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
OUS
Takes the port out of service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
214
PC Programming Manual
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
The properties of the V-IPCS card can be specified.
Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server)
Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
1024–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Signalling (MGCP) UDP Port No. (Server)
Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control
Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
1024–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Signalling (MGCP) UDP Port No. (IP-CS)
Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data on the
IP-CS side. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
PC Programming Manual
215
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Value Range
1024–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (Server)
Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol)
data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, the V-IPCS card uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number
specified here.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
1024–65024
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-CS)
Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-CS side.
This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-CS uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified
here.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
1024–65024
216
PC Programming Manual
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Keep Alive Time-Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to consider an IP-CS to be active even if it receives no
transmissions from that IP-CS. The PBX constantly confirms the status of IP-CSs. If no communications are
received from an IP-CS for the duration specified here, the PBX considers the IP-CS to be unreachable, and
sets the port status to Fault.
During operation, set between 10 s and 60 s. Settings over 60 s, and Disable, are used for debugging purposes,
and IP-CSs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances. Do not use debugging settings
unless instructed to do so.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
Disable, 10–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
First Resending Time (PTAP)
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
500 ´ n (n=1–16) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
PC Programming Manual
217
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Resending Time Out (PTAP)
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending PTAP (Panasonic Telephony
Administration Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
150–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
First Resending Time (MGCP)
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control
Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
500 ´ n (n=1–8) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
218
PC Programming Manual
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Resending Time Out (MGCP)
Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol)
data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Value Range
75–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Echo Canceller Ability
Specifies the echo canceller ability time.
Value Range
OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
PC Programming Manual
219
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DSP Digital Gain (Up)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.
Value Range
Disable, Weak, Normal, Strong
220
PC Programming Manual
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
221
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP-CS port.
To change the status of virtual IP-CS ports, click Command.
IP-CS Registration and De-registration
An IP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-CS before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-CS later.
Preparation
Open 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/
IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600), and confirm that the IP addresses of the MPR and DSP cards, subnet mask
address, and default gateway address are set.
Registration
Follow the steps below to register the IP-CS.
1. Connect the IP-CS to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) IP-CSs are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
4. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show "Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully registered, the status of the IP-CS will update to show "Registered".
De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-CS.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered IP-CSs are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-CS will update to show "None".
Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-CS when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful
or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the IP-CS.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered IP-CSs are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
222
PC Programming Manual
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-CS will update to show "None".
Main
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CS Name
Specifies the CS name of the port.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
PC Programming Manual
223
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Status
Indicates whether a certain IP-CS is registered (reference only).
Value Range
None, Registered
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
224
PC Programming Manual
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Feature Guide References
None
MAC Address
Indicates the MAC address of the IP-CS (reference only).
Value Range
00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Current IP Address
Indicates the current IP address of the IP-CS (reference only).
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Program Ver.
Indicates the programme software file version of the IP-CS (reference only).
Value Range
Version number
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
PC Programming Manual
225
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Air Sync Group No
Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group number to the IP-CS.
Value Range
None, 1
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation
Feature Guide References
None
Option
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
226
PC Programming Manual
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CS Name
Specifies the CS name of the port.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
PC Programming Manual
227
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
IP Codec Priority
Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data.
Value Range
G.711, G.729A
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Packet Sampling Time (G.711)
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Packet Sampling Time (G.729A)
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
228
PC Programming Manual
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Value Range
10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Voice Activity Detection for G.711
Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This feature conserves bandwidth
by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
229
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS—Connection Command
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS—
Connection Command
Commands for the virtual IP-CS ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS
Feature Guide References
None
230
PC Programming Manual
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
The property for the extension cards can be specified.
KX-T7250 Transfer/Hold Key Mode
Selects whether the control signals sent by the Transfer and Hold buttons on KX-T7250 PTs are reversed or
not.
Value Range
Mode 1: Does not switch the control signals
Mode 2: Switches the control signals
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
SLT Pulse Dial Mode
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
SLT Off Hook Time
Specifies the minimum length that a pulse dial sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it as an
off-hook signal.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–255) ms
PC Programming Manual
231
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
SLT Off Hook Guard Time
Specifies the length of guard time used for off-hook signals from SLTs, to prevent the PBX mistaking them for
pulse dials.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=12–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
SLT Pulse Maximum Break Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=9–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
232
PC Programming Manual
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
SLT Pulse Minimum Make Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
SLT Flash Detection
Enables the PBX to detect the flash signal sent when an SLT user presses the hookswitch or the Flash/Recall
button.
Value Range
Disable: The PBX disconnects the line to prevent placing the call on hold.
Enable: The PBX places the call on consultation hold.
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.3 Call Splitting
Flash Timing - Min.
Specifies the minimum length that a signal sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch
flash signal.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
PC Programming Manual
233
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash Timing - Range
Specifies the maximum length that a signal sent from an SLT can be for the PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch
flash signal.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF-R STD Detection Time
Specifies the minimum length that a DTMF tone must be for the PBX to recognise it as a DTMF tone.
Value Range
2 ´ n (n=1–31) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
SLT Power Supply (KX-TDE series only)
Selects the voltage that enables an SLT to activate the Message Waiting lamp. When an MCSLC16 or
MCSLC24 card is installed, the value for this setting is fixed at "85 V". This setting is only available for
MSLC and MCSLC cards.
234
PC Programming Manual
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Value Range
85 V, 145 V
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.1 Message Waiting
Optional Equipment (KX-TDE series only)
Indicates whether an Extension Caller ID card is mounted on the SLC8 card. (reference only)
Value Range
None, Caller ID
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Installation Manual References
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000:
None
For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
3.6.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168)
For KX-TDE600:
3.8.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
APT/SLT Parallel Ring
Enables an SLT connected in parallel to an APT to ring with the APT for calls.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
PC Programming Manual
235
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone
Hook Threshold PD A-law (KX-TDE series only)
Specifies the current threshold (A-law) for switching from Power Save mode to an active state. Please consult
your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
This setting is only available when an MCSLC16, MCSLC24, or ECSLC24 card is installed.
Value Range
MCSLC16/MCSLC24: 1.5–4.0 mA
ECSLC24: 3.0–4.0 mA
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Hook Threshold PD µ-law (KX-TDE series only)
Specifies the current threshold (µ-law) for switching from Power Save mode to an active state. Please consult
your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
This setting is only available when an MCSLC16, MCSLC24, or ECSLC24 card is installed.
Value Range
MCSLC16/MCSLC24: 1.5–4.0 mA
ECSLC24: 3.0–4.0 mA
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
236
PC Programming Manual
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
237
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Various settings can be programmed for each extension port.
To change the status of extension ports, click Command. To view total numbers of each type of extension
connected, click Port Type View.
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port or channel number (reference only).
Value Range
Port or channel number
238
PC Programming Manual
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration
Port Type
Indicates the port type (reference only).
Value Range
DPT: DPT port (DLC)
SLT: SLT port (SLC/MSLC/CSLC/MCSLC)
S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC)
IP-EXT: Virtual IP-Extension port (V-IPEXT)
SIP: Virtual SIP Extension port (V-SIPEXT)
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration
Telephone Type
Indicates the connected telephone type (reference only).
The number of all connected telephones and Cell Stations can be viewed by clicking Port Type View.
Value Range
DPT (40V): DPT is connected.
APT (15V): APT is connected.
DSS: DSS Console is connected.
VM: VPS is connected.
SLT: SLT is connected (or no telephone is connected to the Super Hybrid or SLT port).
CS: CS is connected.
CS-M: High-density CS is connected with its master port.
CS-S1–3: High-density CS is connected with its slave port.
PC Programming Manual
239
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
Feature Guide References
2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command as follows:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the PBX.
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
240
PC Programming Manual
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
XDP Mode
Turns XDP mode on or off for the port. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to
S-Hybrid.
Value Range
On: XDP enabled (The main telephone and sub telephone have different extension numbers. This is called
XDP Mode.)
Off: XDP disabled (The main telephone and sub telephone both have the main telephone’s extension number.
This is called Parallel Mode.)
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone
2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration
Parallel Telephone Ringing
Specifies whether the sub telephone (SLT) rings at the same time as the main telephone (DPT) for an incoming
call. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to S-Hybrid.
PC Programming Manual
241
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone
DPT Type—Type
Selects the port type.
To change the port type of an extension port, follow the steps below:
1. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS".
2. Change the port type of the extension port, then click Apply.
3. Set the status of the extension port to "INS".
When changing the port type of an extension port for which Wireless XDP has been set on the
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings screen, the Wireless XDP setting must be deleted
first.
When changing the type of a port for which one or more SDN buttons are set (except when changing
between PC Console and Telephone), all SDN buttons customised for that device will be deleted. When
you attempt to apply the new settings, a warning message is displayed showing the slot and port number
for which SDN buttons will be deleted. If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port, click
Cancel.
Value Range
Normal: For connecting a DPT or CS
DSS: For connecting a DSS Console (A maximum of 8 [with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE200] or 64 [with the KX-TDE600] DSS Consoles can be connected to the PBX.)
VM (DPT): For connecting a Panasonic VPS through DPT Integration
PC Console: For connecting a PC Console (A maximum of 8 PC Consoles can be connected to the PBX.)
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
242
PC Programming Manual
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
DPT Type—Location No.
Specifies the location number of the connected DSS Console or PC Console. This setting is only available
when DPT Type—Type on this screen is set to DSS or PC Console.
Note that, depending on system traffic, there may be a limit to the number of PC Consoles that can be supported
by a single DLC/DHLC card.
When changing the location number of a DSS Console for which one or more SDN buttons are set, all SDN
buttons customised for that device will be deleted. When you attempt to apply the new settings, a warning
message is displayed showing the slot and port number for which SDN buttons will be deleted. If you do not
wish to delete SDN buttons for this port, click Cancel.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–8
For KX-TDE600:
Location number for DSS Console: 1–64
Location number for PC Console: 1–8
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
DPT Type—VM Unit No.
Selects the unit number of the connected VPS. This setting is only available when DPT Type—Type on this
screen is set to VM (DPT).
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1, 2
For KX-TDE600:
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
243
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
DPT Type—VM Port No.
Specifies the VM port number for the port. This setting is only available when DPT Type—Type on this screen
is set to VM (DPT).
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
DPT Type—Air Sync Group No
Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group number to the CS. This setting is only available when DPT Type—
Type on this screen is set to Normal.
Value Range
None, 1
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation
Feature Guide References
None
Headset OFF/ON
Turns on or off the use of a headset with a DPT. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen
is set to DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, or S-Hybrid(S-DPT).
Value Range
Headset OFF, Headset ON
244
PC Programming Manual
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.4 Headset Operation
Ringing Tone
Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls when Port Type on this screen is
set to DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, S-Hybrid(SLT), or S-Hybrid(S-DPT). This setting is not available for the
KX-T7200, the KX-T7451, APTs, or SLTs.
Value Range
A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz)
B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz)
C: 128 ms (697 Hz), 128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96 ms (852 Hz)
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
245
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—
Connection Command
Commands for the extension ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of
repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
246
PC Programming Manual
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port
Type View
Displays the number of connected telephones and Cell Stations (CSs).
This screen can only be accessed in Interactive mode.
Type
Indicates the types of telephone (reference only).
Value Range
New-DPT (KX-DT300 series/KX-T7600 series DPTs), Old-DPT (DPTs other than KX-DT300 series/
KX-T7600 series), APT, SLT, DSS Console, VM, Other, CS, High-density CS, IP-EXT, IP-PT, SIP
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
Total Count
Indicates the total number of each type of telephone and CS connected to the PBX (reference only). CSs are
counted on the basis of the number of ports in service plus the number of extension ports to which CSs are
connected.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
247
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only)
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE
series only)
The status of the CSIF ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in-service) or OUS (out-of-service). To change
the status of ports, click Command.
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
248
PC Programming Manual
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Status
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The Cell Station (CS) is in service.
OUS: The CS is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the CS.
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
CS Name
Specifies the name of the CSIF port.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
249
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
Air Sync Group No
Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group number to the CS.
Value Range
None, 1
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation
Feature Guide References
None
250
PC Programming Manual
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—
Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
Commands for the CSIF ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the Cell Station (CS) in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the CS out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the CS, for example, for the purpose of
repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
251
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified.
Outgoing Guard Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Value Range
3–6 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
First Dial Timer (CO)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a trunk, before sending the dialled digits to the
telephone company. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits
correctly.
Value Range
0.5 ´ n (n=1–16) s
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CO Feed Back Tone
Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be
heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled.
Value Range
No, Yes
252
PC Programming Manual
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Bell Detection—Bell Start Detection Timer
Specifies the minimum length of a bell signal that can be recognised by the PBX as the bell signal sent from
the telephone company, before the PBX detects an arriving call.
Value Range
24 ´ n (n=1–50) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Bell Detection—Bell Off Detection Timer
Specifies the duration of the bell off detection timer. If the PBX receives no bell signal from the telephone
company for the length of time specified here, the PBX treats the call as lost.
Value Range
1.0 s–15.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
253
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Pulse / DTMF Dial—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time
to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse / DTMF Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to
accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for a low speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make
(off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
Other, 60 %, 67 %
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
254
PC Programming Manual
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
None
Low Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a low speed pulse dial.
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse
Value Range
4 ´ n (n=6–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
None
Low Speed Pulse Dial—Make Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a low speed pulse dial.
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse
Value Range
4 ´ n (n=3–15) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
None
High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for a high speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and
make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
PC Programming Manual
255
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Value Range
Other, 60 %, 67 %
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
None
High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial—
Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Value Range
4 ´ n (n=4–18) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
None
High Speed Pulse Dial—Make Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a high speed pulse dial.
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Value Range
4 ´ n (n=3–15) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
256
PC Programming Manual
High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Option Card Equipment—Option 1 and Option 2
Indicates the type of the card that is installed on the LCOT card (reference only).
Value Range
None, Caller ID Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—
Caller ID Detection
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling
Selects the type of Caller ID signalling provided by the telephone company.
Value Range
FSK, FSK (with Visual Caller ID), DTMF
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
PC Programming Manual
257
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Max Receive Time
Specifies the maximum number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network.
Value Range
0 (no limit), 1, 2, 3
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Carrier Detection
Enables the PBX to detect the carrier when receiving Caller ID. To enable this setting,
Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) END Detection
Selects the method used to detect the end of Caller ID information.
258
PC Programming Manual
Caller ID—Caller ID
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Value Range
Length + Timer, Timer
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Header Examination
Enables the PBX to check the header of received Caller ID information. To enable this setting,
Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Caller ID—
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Start Timer
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before attempting to detect Caller ID information, after receiving
a call. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Value Range
None, 80 ´ n (n=1–15) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
259
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Timer
Specifies the total time required by the PBX to detect Caller ID information. To enable this setting,
ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Caller
Value Range
80 ´ n (n=13–50) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Start Code 1 and Start Code 2
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series. Start Code 1 is prior to Start Code
2.
Value Range
None, *, #, A, B, C, D
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Information Start Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of the information segment of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
None, *, #, A, B, C, D
260
PC Programming Manual
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) End Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
None, *, #, A, B, C, D
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Information Code-PRIVATE, OUT OF AREA,
TECHNICAL REASON, UNKNOWN NUMBER, RESTRICTED NUMBER
Specifies the number used to identify each type of information code.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
PC Programming Manual
261
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Caller ID—Caller ID Header[03]
Selects the type of the 3rd header in a Caller ID signal.
Value Range
DDN, Caller ID
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Frequency
Selects the frequency of the pay tone appropriate to your telephone company.
Value Range
12kHz, 16kHz
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Gain
Specifies the signal strength of the pay tone.
Value Range
0–31 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
262
PC Programming Manual
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Pulse - MIN
Specifies the minimum length that a received pay tone signal must be for the PBX to recognise it as a pay tone
signal.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=1–250) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Pulse - MAX
Specifies the maximum length that a received pay tone signal can be for the PBX to recognise it as a pay tone
signal.
Value Range
None, 8 ´ n (n=1–250) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Pulse - Interval
Specifies the maximum length of time between pay tone signals.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=1–250) ms
PC Programming Manual
263
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
Pay Tone—Sending Flash while end talk
Enables the PBX to send a flash signal at the end of call to demand a pay tone signal.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
264
PC Programming Manual
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Various settings can be programmed for each analogue trunk port.
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
PC Programming Manual
265
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Busy Out Status
Indicates the Busy Out status (reference only).
Value Range
Normal, Busy Out
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
266
PC Programming Manual
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out
Dialling Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the analogue trunk.
Value Range
DTMF, Pulse
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls
before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC
signal is not detected.
Value Range
None, 6.5 ms, 8 ´ n (n=1–112) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the analogue trunk.
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
PC Programming Manual
267
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the analogue trunk.
Value Range
Low, High
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Reverse Detection
Selects the type of trunk call for which the reverse signal from the telephone company is detected.
Value Range
Disable: For no trunk call
Outgoing: For outgoing trunk calls only
Both Call: For both outgoing and incoming trunk calls
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit
268
PC Programming Manual
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Caller ID Detection
Enables the PBX to detect a Caller ID signal from the analogue trunk.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Paytone Detection
Enables the PBX to receive a pay tone signal from the telephone company.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
269
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code
Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Value Range
None, 16 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
270
PC Programming Manual
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—
Connection Command
Commands for the LCO ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of
repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
271
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
The properties of the BRI or PRI card can be specified.
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T202
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the request to use an ISDN line as
a TIE line.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T203
Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
272
PC Programming Manual
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T301
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN.
Value Range
0–18000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T302
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
273
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T303
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T304
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T305
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message
to ISDN.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
274
PC Programming Manual
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T308
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T309
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T310
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance message after receiving the Incoming Call
Proceeding message.
PC Programming Manual
275
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T313
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T316
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
276
PC Programming Manual
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T318
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T319
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T322
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
PC Programming Manual
277
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D3
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D9
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T200
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
278
PC Programming Manual
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T201
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the TEI check request to ISDN.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T203
Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
279
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
ISDN Extension—T301
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN.
Value Range
0–18000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T302
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T303
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
280
PC Programming Manual
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T304
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T305
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message
to ISDN.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T306
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message
to ISDN. This setting is used when inband tones are supplied.
PC Programming Manual
281
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T307
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX maintains a suspended call, before restarting.
Value Range
0–6000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T308
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
282
PC Programming Manual
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T309
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T310
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding
message.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T312
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
PC Programming Manual
283
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T316
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T320
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for packet protocol.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
284
PC Programming Manual
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
ISDN Extension—T322
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.
Value Range
0–600 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T3D3
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T3D9
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.
Value Range
0–3000 ´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
285
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Feature Guide References
None
286
PC Programming Manual
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Various settings can be programmed for each BRI port.
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Main
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
PC Programming Manual
287
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
1.30.4.1 QSIG Standard Features—SUMMARY
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
288
PC Programming Manual
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
LLC Information
Enables the PBX to send LLC (Low Level Compatibility) information to the network when an outgoing call is
made when the ISDN bearer mode is speech.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Status Message
Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network.
Value Range
No Transmission: Status Message is not sent.
When Mandatory error detection: Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected.
When Option / Mandatory error detection: Send the Status Message when an error (Option or Mandatory) is
detected.
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
289
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Status Receive
Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status
of the call.
Value Range
Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network.
Disconnect: Disconnect the call.
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO
Parameters for ISDN CO are not applicable for the BRI extension port.
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
290
PC Programming Manual
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
291
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
292
PC Programming Manual
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Outgoing Call Type
Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network.
Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX
recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number
is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Overlap: The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time.
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
ISDN Centrex
Enables the use of the telephone company’s ISDN Centrex Service features.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
PC Programming Manual
293
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
BRI Data Link (P-MP) Mode
Assigns one or two TEIs (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) to the BRI CO port. To use the ISDN Hold supplementary
service with point-to-multipoint configuration, this parameter should be set to 2-link in some countries/areas.
Value Range
1-link: One TEI is assigned to the BRI CO port.
2-link: Two TEIs are assigned to the BRI CO port. (Available when
to P-MP.)
Access Mode on the Network tab is set
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Networking Data Transfer
Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available
when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.
A maximum of two ports of each BRI card can be assigned to transmit extension status information.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
Section 11 [9] Private Network
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
294
PC Programming Manual
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
ISDN Extension
Parameters for ISDN Extension are not applicable for BRI ports assigned as CO ports.
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
PC Programming Manual
295
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
296
PC Programming Manual
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension
ISDN TE Power
Enables the PBX to supply power to the ISDN TE (Terminal Equipment). This setting is only available when
Port Type on this screen is set to Extension.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension
Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00)
Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00". This setting is only
available when Port Type on this screen is set to Extension.
Value Range
Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Ring an Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension
ISDN Extension Progress Tone
Enables the PBX to send call progress tones to the ISDN extension. This setting is only available when Port
Type on this screen is set to Extension.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
PC Programming Manual
297
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension
Network
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
298
PC Programming Manual
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
PC Programming Manual
299
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Network Type
Selects the network type of the port.
Value Range
0–56
(2 UK (Domestic), 5 Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN (Standard), 14 France
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US National ISDN 2)
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
L1 Mode
Selects the active mode of L1 (Layer 1) on the BRI port.
Value Range
Call, Permanent
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
300
PC Programming Manual
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
L2 Mode
Selects the active mode of L2 (Layer 2) on the BRI port.
Value Range
Call, Permanent
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
Access Mode
Selects the configuration of the BRI port.
Value Range
P-P: Point-to-Point
P-MP: Point-to-multipoint
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
TEI Mode
Specifies the TEI mode assigned to the BRI port.
Value Range
Automatic, Fix 0–Fix 63
PC Programming Manual
301
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
Network Numbering Plan
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
302
PC Programming Manual
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
PC Programming Manual
303
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the port.
Value Range
Public: Public network
VPN: Virtual Private Network
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
1.30.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)
Calling Party number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private
Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
304
PC Programming Manual
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public or private networks.
Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Called Party number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private
Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Called Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Selects the type of number that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
PC Programming Manual
305
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Supplementary Service
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
306
PC Programming Manual
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
PC Programming Manual
307
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
When using the Centralised VM feature, set CF (Rerouting) to "No".
Value Range
For COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E:
No, Yes
For 3PTY:
No, Yes-3Pty
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
1.21.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)
1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
1.21.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN
1.21.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN
1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
1.30.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG
CCBS Option
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
308
PC Programming Manual
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
309
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
310
PC Programming Manual
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
CCBS Type
Selects the type of the call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber)
feature, from which the specified number of digits are deleted.
CCBS Delete Digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number.
Value Range
ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
CCBS Delete Digits
Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type
initiated by the CCBS feature from the network. CCBS Type on this screen specifies the applicable type of
call.
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
PC Programming Manual
311
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—
Connection Command
Commands for the BRI ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of
repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
312
PC Programming Manual
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port.
Main
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
PC Programming Manual
313
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
•
•
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
1.30.4.1 QSIG Standard Features—SUMMARY
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
314
PC Programming Manual
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Status Message
Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network.
Value Range
No Transmission: Status Message is not sent.
When error detection (Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected.
When error detection (Option / Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Option or Mandatory) is
detected.
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Status Receive
Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status
of the call.
Value Range
Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network.
Disconnect: Disconnect the call.
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
315
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
CRC4 Mode
Enables the use of CRC4 for error checking. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is an error checking control
technique that uses a specific binary prime divisor that results in a unique remainder. It is usually a 16- to
32-bit character. (Assignable only when using the PRI30 card.)
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of the PRI PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the port. This setting is only available
when using the PRI23 card.
Value Range
B8ZS, AMI
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Frame Sequence
Selects the type of frame sequence for the port. This setting is only available when using the PRI23 card.
Value Range
Extend Multi frame (ESF), 4-Frame Multi frame (F4), 12-Frame Multi frame (F12)
316
PC Programming Manual
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CO Setting
CO Setting parameters are not applicable to ports assigned as Extension in
Port Type.
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
317
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
•
•
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
318
PC Programming Manual
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
PC Programming Manual
319
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Outgoing Call Type
Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network.
Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX
recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number
is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Overlap: The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time.
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
ISDN Centrex
Enables the use of the telephone company’s ISDN Centrex Service features.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
320
PC Programming Manual
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
Networking Data Transfer
Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available
when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
Section 11 [9] Private Network
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
Loopback Test started by Network
Enables a loopback test started from the network side, to be performed on the PRI23 card.
Note
The version of the PRI23 card must be 2.000 or later.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
Network Loopback Test
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Setting
Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port.
PC Programming Manual
321
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
322
PC Programming Manual
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the type of the port.
Note
•
•
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
PC Programming Manual
323
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00)
Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00".
Value Range
Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Ring AN Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension
Network Configuration
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
324
PC Programming Manual
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
•
•
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
PC Programming Manual
325
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Network Type
Selects the network type of the port.
Value Range
0–56
(2 UK (Domestic), 5 Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN (Standard), 14 France
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US National ISDN 2)
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
326
PC Programming Manual
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Network Numbering Plan
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
PC Programming Manual
327
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
•
•
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
328
PC Programming Manual
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the port.
Value Range
Public: Public network
VPN: Virtual Private Network
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
1.30.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)
Calling Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private
Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public or private networks.
PC Programming Manual
329
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Called Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private
Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Selects the type of number that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
330
PC Programming Manual
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
Supplementary Service
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
PC Programming Manual
331
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
•
•
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX.
ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
332
PC Programming Manual
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY
Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
The available services depend on the setting of Port Type on this screen.
When using the Centralised VM feature, set CF (Rerouting) to "No".
Value Range
For COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911:
No, Yes
For 3PTY:
No, Yes-3Pty
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
1.21.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)
1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
1.21.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN
1.21.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN
1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
1.30.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG
CCBS Type
Selects the type of call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber) feature,
from which the specified number of digits are deleted.
CCBS Delete Digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number.
PC Programming Manual
333
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Value Range
ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
CCBS Delete Digits
Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type
initiated by the CCBS feature from the network. CCBS Type on this screen specifies the applicable type of
call.
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
334
PC Programming Manual
3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection
Command
Commands for the PRI ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of
repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
335
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
The properties of the T1 card can be specified.
Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of T1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) used.
Value Range
B8ZS, AMI
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Frame Sequence
Selects the type of frame sequence used for communications.
Value Range
D4, ESF
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ESF Frame Sequence
Selects the values for C-bit and D-bit. To enable this setting,
set to ESF.
Value Range
C=A, D=B; C=0, D=0; C=0, D=1; C=1, D=0; C=1, D=1
336
PC Programming Manual
Frame Sequence on this screen should be
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
LIU Send Option
Selects the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU.
Value Range
Mode-1–Mode-8
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
LIU Receive Option
Selects the receiving level (Receive Equalisation) of LIU.
Value Range
Automatic, 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
337
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
First Dial Timer (CO)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a trunk, before sending the dialled digits to the
telephone company. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits
correctly.
Value Range
0.5 ´ n (n=1–16) s
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
First Dial Timer (DDI/DID/TIE)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before sending the dialled
digits to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to
have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Answer Detection Timer
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognise the answer signal. This allows the telephone
company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
338
PC Programming Manual
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Wink Signal Width
Specifies the length of a wink signal.
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=4–9) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time
to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
339
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
DTMF Tone—DTMF Transmit
Specifies the volume of the DTMF tone to be transmitted.
Value Range
3-n (n=0–15) dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF Tone—DTMF Receive
Specifies the volume of the DTMF tone to be received.
Value Range
n-42–0 (n=0–31) dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook)
signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
60 %, 67 %
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
340
PC Programming Manual
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to
accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—CO Feed Back Tone
Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be
heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled.
PC Programming Manual
341
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Maximum BREAK Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=9–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Minimum MAKE Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
342
PC Programming Manual
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Flash Signal Detection (OPX)
Enables the PBX to detect hookswitch flash signals from an SLT connected to an OPX.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Minimum BREAK Width (OPX)
Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal from an SLT connected to an OPX.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Flash Width (OPX)
Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an SLT connected to an OPX that the PBX can
recognise as a hookswitch flash signal.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms
PC Programming Manual
343
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Flash Signal Detection (TIE)
Enables the PBX to detect a hookswitch flash signal sent from a TIE line.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Minimum BREAK Width (TIE)
Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal sent from a TIE line.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
344
PC Programming Manual
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Flash—Flash Width (TIE)
Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal received from a TIE line that the PBX can recognise as a
hookswitch flash signal.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Information End Code
Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
PC Programming Manual
345
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID End Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
346
PC Programming Manual
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Various settings can be programmed for each T1 channel.
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CH
Indicates the channel number (reference only).
Value Range
Channel number
PC Programming Manual
347
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the channel status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The channel is in service.
OUS: The channel is out of service.
Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
348
PC Programming Manual
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
CO Dial Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to a trunk.
Value Range
DTMF, Pulse
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
Channel Type
Selects the channel type.
Value Range
Undefined: Not assigned
GCOT: Ground Start Central Office
LCOT: Loop Start Central Office
DDI/DID: Direct Dialling In/Direct Inward Dialling
TIE: TIE Line
OPX: Off Premise Extension
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.23.1 T1 Line Service
Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the TIE channel.
Value Range
Public: Use the DIL/DDI/DID method to distribute incoming trunk calls.
PC Programming Manual
349
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
CPC Signal Detection (DID)—Outgoing, Incoming
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls
before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC
signal is not detected.
This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to DDI/DID.
Value Range
None, 80 ´ n (n=2–75) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
CPC Signal Detection (LCO/GCO)—Outgoing, Incoming
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls
before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC
signal is not detected.
This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to GCOT or LCOT.
Value Range
None, 8 ´ n (n=2–112) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
350
PC Programming Manual
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the T1 channel.
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CO Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the T1 channel.
Value Range
10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
Wink Signal Time-Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink signal is
not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.
PC Programming Manual
351
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Value Range
64 ´ n (n=1–128) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Start Signal Type
Selects the type of the start signal.
Value Range
Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires.
Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received.
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Sending Caller ID to TIE
Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when the channel type is TIE.
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
352
PC Programming Manual
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Feature Guide References
None
Receiving Caller ID from TIE
Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when the channel type is TIE.
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to DDI/DID.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Dial Tone to Extension
Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
PC Programming Manual
353
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code
Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Value Range
None, 16 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
354
PC Programming Manual
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
PC Programming Manual
355
3.39 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command
3.39 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection
Command
Commands for the T1 channels can be programmed.
INS
Puts the channel in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.39 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the channel out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose
of repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.39 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Feature Guide References
None
356
PC Programming Manual
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
The properties of the E1 card can be specified.
To adjust related settings, click Line Signal Setting, MFC-R2 Setting 1, and MFC-R2 Setting 2.
Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of E1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the E1 card.
Value Range
HDB3, AMI
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Frame Sequence
Selects the type of frame sequence for the E1 card.
Value Range
PCM30, PCM30-CRC
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Frame Option
Selects the value for C-bit and D-bit.
Value Range
C=A, D=B; C=0, D=0; C=0, D=1; C=1, D=0; C=1, D=1
PC Programming Manual
357
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
First Dial Timer (DDI/DID/TIE)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before sending the dialled
digits to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to
have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Answer Detection Timer
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognise the answer signal. This allows the telephone
company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
358
PC Programming Manual
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Seizure ACK Wait Timer
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the seizure ACK signal.
Value Range
0.5 ´ n (n=1–20) s
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
LIU Send Option
Indicates the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU (reference only).
Value Range
Mode 1–Mode 8
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
LIU Receive Option
Selects the receiving level (Receive Equalisation) of LIU.
Value Range
Automatic, 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
359
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Feature Guide References
None
RAI Signal Detection Mode
Selects the RAI signal detection mode.
Value Range
Type 1, Type 2
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause.
Value Range
64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook)
signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
60 %, 67 %
360
PC Programming Manual
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to
accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
361
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Pulse Dial—CO Feed Back Tone
Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be
heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Maximum BREAK Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=9–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Minimum MAKE Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
362
PC Programming Manual
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Flash Detection
Enables the PBX to detect a hookswitch flash signal sent from an E1 line.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Minimum BREAK Width
Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal sent from an E1 line.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Flash Width
Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an E1 line that the PBX can recognise as a hookswitch
flash signal.
PC Programming Manual
363
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Information End Code
Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
364
PC Programming Manual
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID End Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
PC Programming Manual
365
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal
Setting
DR2 Setting Type
Selects the control type of the DR2 (Digital System R2) signal.
Value Range
Normal, Option-1, Option-3
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Inter-digit Timer
Specifies the pseudo-answer time. This setting is available only when Option-1 or Option-3 is selected in
DR2 Setting Type on this screen.
Value Range
3–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Bit Position for Dial Pulse
Selects the position of the pulse dial control bit in a DR2 signal.
Value Range
A-bit, B-bit
366
PC Programming Manual
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Bit Position for Clear Back
Selects the position of the clear-back signal control bit in a DR2 signal.
Value Range
A-bit, B-bit, A&B-bit
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Forced Release
Enables the PBX to send a forced release signal.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
367
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Forced Release Pattern
Selects the bit pattern for a forced release signal.
Value Range
A=0/B=0, A=0/B=1, A=1/B=0, A=1/B=1
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
E&M Signalling Type
Selects the control bit of an E & M signal.
Value Range
Type-1:A bit=0, Type-2:A bit=1, Type-3:B bit=0, Type-4:B bit=1, Type-5:A bit=1,B bit=1
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Wink Signal Width
Specifies the length of a wink signal.
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=4–9) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
368
PC Programming Manual
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Feature Guide References
None
E&M-P Pulse Length—Seizure
Specifies the length of a seizure signal.
Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
E&M-P Pulse Length—Answer
Specifies the length of an answer signal.
Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
E&M-P Pulse Length—Clear
Specifies the length of a clear signal.
Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
PC Programming Manual
369
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
E&M-P Pulse Length—E&M-P Seizure ACK
Specifies whether the PBX waits for an E & M-P seizure ACK signal.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Meter Pulse Detection—Mode
Specifies the mode for call charge meter pulses.
Value Range
No Detection: Meter pulses are not sent or received.
Outgoing call only: Sends a call charge meter pulse for outgoing trunk calls.
Both calls: Sends and receives call charge meter pulses.
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Meter Pulse Detection—Bit Position
Specifies the bit position of a call charge meter pulse.
370
PC Programming Manual
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Value Range
A-bit, B-bit, C-bit, D-bit
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Meter Pulse Detection—Length
Specifies the length that a call charge meter pulse must be for the PBX to recognise it as a call charge meter
pulse.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=1–80) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DSP Gain Adjustment—DTMF Transmit
Specifies the output power of the DTMF signal sent from the DSP (Digital Signal Processor).
Value Range
-12 dB–3 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
371
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Feature Guide References
None
DSP Gain Adjustment—DTMF Receive
Specifies the strength range within which a DTMF signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as a DTMF signal.
Value Range
-42 - 0 dB – -11- 0 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DSP Gain Adjustment—MFC-R2 Transmit
Specifies the output power of MFC-R2 signals sent from the DSP.
Value Range
-31 dB–0 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DSP Gain Adjustment—MFC-R2 Receive
Specifies the strength range within which an MFC-R2 signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as an
MFC-R2 signal.
Value Range
-38 - 0 dB – -23 - 0 dB
372
PC Programming Manual
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Frame Error Detection—Error Detection
Specifies whether the PBX detects frame synchronisation errors.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Frame Error Detection—Error Rate
Specifies the number of frame errors per second which the PBX needs to recognise a remote alarm. To enable
this setting, Frame Error Detection—Error Detection on this screen should be set to Yes.
Value Range
No limit, 16 ´ n (n=1–7) errors/s
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
373
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2
Setting 1
ANI Service—Mode
Selects the ANI (Automatic Number Identification) service mode.
Value Range
None: ANI service is not activated.
Incoming call only: Receives the caller’s number from the E1 line.
Outgoing call only: Sends the caller’s number to the E1 line.
Both calls: Sends and receives the caller’s number through the E1 line.
Maintenance Console Location
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ANI Service—ANI Max. digits
Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received via ANI when receiving a call with ANI.
Value Range
None, 1–16
Maintenance Console Location
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
MFC-R2 Timer—Forward
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 forward signal sent from the telephone
company.
Value Range
1–30 s
374
PC Programming Manual
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Maintenance Console Location
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
MFC-R2 Timer—Backward
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 backward signal sent from the telephone
company.
Value Range
1–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
MFC-R2 Timer—Disappearance
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 disappearance signal sent from the telephone
company.
Value Range
1–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
375
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Start
Specifies the code used to indicate the beginning of an ANI number.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Complete (1)–(4)
Specifies the code used to indicate the end of an ANI number.
Value Range
ANI Complete (1): 1–15
ANI Complete (2)–(4): Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Reject
Specifies the code used to reject an ANI number.
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
376
PC Programming Manual
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-l Code Assignment—End of Digit
Specifies the code used to recognise the end of each digit in an ANI number.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-l Code Assignment—End of Digit Timer
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for further signal before detecting the end of digit of an ANI
number.
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-ll Code Assignment—G-ll Code Outgoing Call
Specifies the code for sending Group-ll code to the telephone company.
PC Programming Manual
377
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-ll Code Assignment—G-ll Code Incoming Call [1]–[15]
Specifies the destination of incoming trunk calls for each Group-ll code respectively.
Value Range
Undefined, Subscriber, Operator, Collect Call
Maintenance Console Location
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-ll Code Assignment—Group-ll ANI
Specifies the Group-ll ANI start code.
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
378
PC Programming Manual
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Feature Guide References
None
MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 MFC-R2 Group1[*] code
Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [*].
Value Range
11–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 MFC-R2 Group1[#] code
Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [#].
Value Range
11–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
379
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2
Setting 2
Group-A Code Assignment—Address Complete
Specifies the address complete (completion of dial reception) code sent to the telephone company.
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—ANI Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send an ANI number.
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—ANI (N+1)
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N+1)th digit of an ANI number.
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
380
PC Programming Manual
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—ANI (N+1) Additional Code
Specifies the second code when two codes are needed to request the telephone company to send the (N+1)th
digit of an ANI number.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—Set up Speech Path
Specifies the setup speech path code sent to the telephone company.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—(First) Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the first digit of an ANI number.
PC Programming Manual
381
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—(N) Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N)th digit of an ANI number.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—(N-1) Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-1)th digit of an ANI number.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
382
PC Programming Manual
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—(N-2) Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-2)th digit of an ANI number.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—(N-3) Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-3)th digit of an ANI number.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-B Code Assignment—Idle (1)
Specifies the code used normally to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is
idle.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
PC Programming Manual
383
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-B Code Assignment—Idle (2)
Specifies the code used in special circumstances, such as an international call, to inform the telephone
company that the status of the called destination is idle.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-B Code Assignment—Idle (3)
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is idle when
the call is disconnected by the caller.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
384
PC Programming Manual
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Group-B Code Assignment—Busy
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is busy.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-B Code Assignment—Unallocated
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the received number is not defined.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-B Code Assignment—Congestion
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the network is congested.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
385
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Feature Guide References
None
Group-B Code Assignment—Out-of-Service
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is out of
service.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-B Code Assignment—No Billing
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the call is not charged.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-B Code Assignment—Collect Call Reject
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the collect call has been rejected.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
386
PC Programming Manual
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Maintenance Console Location
3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
387
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Various settings can be programmed for each E1 channel.
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CH
Indicates the channel number (reference only).
Value Range
channel number
388
PC Programming Manual
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the channel status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The channel is in service.
OUS: The channel is out of service.
Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
389
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Channel Type
Selects the channel type.
Value Range
Undefined: Not assigned
DR2: Digital System R2
E&M-P: Pulsed E & M
E&M-C: Continuous E & M
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.22.1 E1 Line Service
Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the E & M channel.
Value Range
Public: Use the DIL/DDI/DID method to distribute incoming trunk calls.
Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
CO Dial Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to a trunk.
If MFC-R2 is selected, the PBX (not the telephone company) sends a dial tone to the caller when making a
trunk call using an E1 line.
390
PC Programming Manual
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Value Range
DTMF, Pulse, MFC-R2
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
1.22.1 E1 Line Service
E1 Receiver Type
Selects the type of signal the PBX receives from the E1 line.
This should be set to MFC-R2 when receiving ANI (Automatic Number Identification) numbers from the E1
line.
Value Range
DTMF, Pulse, MFC-R2, Undefined
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.22.1 E1 Line Service
Receive Digits
Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received from a DDI/DID number when receiving a call with the
DDI/DID number.
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
PC Programming Manual
391
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CPC Detection Time—Out, In
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls
before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC
signal is not detected.
Value Range
None, 80 ´ n (n=2–75) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the E1 channel.
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CO Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the E1 channel.
392
PC Programming Manual
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Value Range
10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
Wink Signal Time-Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink signal is
not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.
Value Range
64 ´ n (n=1–128) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Start Signal Type
Selects the type of the start signal.
Value Range
Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires.
Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received.
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
393
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Feature Guide References
None
Sending Caller ID to TIE
Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when
E&M-C.
Channel Type on this screen is set to E&M-P or
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Receiving Caller ID from TIE
Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when
E&M-C.
Channel Type on this screen is set to E&M-P or
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
394
PC Programming Manual
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Dial Tone to Extension
Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Answer Wait Timer (*60s)
Selects the length of time that the PBX waits for the called outside party to answer an outgoing trunk call. The
line will be disconnected automatically when this timer expires.
Value Range
None, 1–4
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
395
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code
Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Value Range
None, 16 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
396
PC Programming Manual
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
PC Programming Manual
397
3.45 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection Command
3.45 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection
Command
Commands for the E1 channels can be programmed.
INS
Puts the channel in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.45 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the channel out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the channel, for example, for the
purpose of repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.45 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Feature Guide References
None
398
PC Programming Manual
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE
series only)
The properties for the E & M card can be specified.
Interface
Selects E & M signal type.
Value Range
Continuous, Pulsed with Answer, Pulsed without Answer, Continuous No Answer
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
First Dial Timer (TIE)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before sending the dialled
digits to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to
have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Answer Detection Timer
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognise the answer signal. This allows the telephone
company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
PC Programming Manual
399
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Inter-digit Timer
Specifies the pseudo-answer time.
Value Range
3–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time
to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
400
PC Programming Manual
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook)
signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
60 %, 67 %
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to
accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms
PC Programming Manual
401
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Feed Back Tone
Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be
heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Maximum BREAK Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=9–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
402
PC Programming Manual
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Pulse Dial—Pulse Minimum MAKE Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Flash Detection
Enables the PBX to detect hookswitch flash signals.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Minimum Break Width
Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
403
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Flash Width
Specifies the maximum length of a hookswitch signal sent from an SLT that can be recognised by the PBX as
a flash signal.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Seizure
Selects the length of a seizure pulse.
Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Answer
Selects the length of an answer pulse.
Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms
404
PC Programming Manual
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Clear
Selects the length of a clear pulse.
Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—E&M-P Seizure ACK
Enables the PBX to wait for an E & M-P seizure ACK signal.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
405
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Wink Signal Width
Specifies the length of a wink signal.
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=4–9) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Information End Code
Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
406
PC Programming Manual
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID End Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
PC Programming Manual
407
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE
series only)
Various settings can be programmed for each E & M channel.
To change the status of channels, click Command.
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CH
Indicates the channel number (reference only).
Value Range
Channel number
408
PC Programming Manual
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the channel status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The channel is in service.
OUS: The channel is out of service.
Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
3.48 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the channel.
Value Range
Public: Use the DIL method to distribute incoming trunk calls.
Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
409
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
Dialling Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the E & M line.
Value Range
DTMF, Pulse
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
Gain Adjustment
Indicates the value for hardware adjustment (fixed, reference only).
Value Range
1
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the E & M line.
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
410
PC Programming Manual
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CO Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the E & M line.
Value Range
10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
Wink Signal Time-Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink signal is
not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.
Value Range
64 ´ n (n=1–128) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
411
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Start Signal Type
Selects the type of the start signal.
Value Range
Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires.
Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received.
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
E&M TIE Line Type
Selects the type of the voice path for an E & M line.
Value Range
2 wires, 4 wires
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Sending Caller ID to TIE
Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when
Trunk Property on this screen is set to Private.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
412
PC Programming Manual
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Receiving Caller ID from TIE
Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when
Trunk Property on this screen is set to Private.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Send Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Dial Tone to Extension
Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
PC Programming Manual
413
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code
Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Value Range
None, 16 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
414
PC Programming Manual
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
PC Programming Manual
415
3.48 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
3.48 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection
Command (KX-TDE series only)
Commands for the E & M channels can be programmed.
INS
Puts the channel in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.48 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the channel out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the channel, for example, for the
purpose of repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.48 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
416
PC Programming Manual
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE
series only)
The property for the DID card can be specified.
First Dial Timer
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DID line, before sending the dialled digits to the
telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to have enough
time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time
to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook)
signal in a pulse dial.
PC Programming Manual
417
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
Value Range
60 %, 67 %
Maintenance Console Location
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to
accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
418
PC Programming Manual
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Feed Back Tone
Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be
heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Maximum BREAK Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=9–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Minimum MAKE Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms
PC Programming Manual
419
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Line Signal Setting—Wink Signal Width
Specifies the length of a wink signal.
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=4–9) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
420
PC Programming Manual
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
Caller ID—Caller ID Information End Code
Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID End Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
PC Programming Manual
421
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE
series only)
Various settings can be programmed for each DID port.
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
422
PC Programming Manual
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
3.51 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
Dialling Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the DID line.
Value Range
DTMF, Pulse
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
423
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the DID line.
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CO Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the line.
Value Range
10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
Wink Signal Time Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink signal is
not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.
Value Range
64 ´ n (n=1–128) ms
424
PC Programming Manual
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Start Signal Type
Selects the type of the start signal.
Value Range
Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires.
Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received.
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CPC Detection Time—Out (DID), In (DID)
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls
before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC
signal is not detected.
Value Range
None, 80 ´ n (n=2–75) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
PC Programming Manual
425
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Sending Caller ID to CO
Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent to an analogue trunk.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Receiving Caller ID from CO
Specifies whether Caller ID information is received from an analogue trunk.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Send Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
426
PC Programming Manual
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
Dial Tone to Extension
Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code
Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Value Range
None, 16 ´ n (n=1–255) ms
PC Programming Manual
427
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
428
PC Programming Manual
3.51 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
3.51 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—
Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
Commands for the DID ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.51 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of
repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.51 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
429
3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only)
3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
(KX-TDE series only)
The properties of the VoIP Gateway card can be specified.
En-bloc Dialling setting
Selects the call dialling mode.
Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX
recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number
is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Overlap: The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time.
Maintenance Console Location
3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan
Feature Guide References
1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
QSIG-CT
Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
QSIG-CF
Enables a call to be forwarded to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.
430
PC Programming Manual
3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only)
When using the Centralised VM feature, set this to "No".
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
PC Programming Manual
431
3.53 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only)
3.53 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE
series only)
Status of the IP-GW ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service).
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.53 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.53 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
432
PC Programming Manual
3.53 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.53 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.53 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
433
3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—
Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
Commands for the IP-GW ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
3.53 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of
repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
3.53 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
None
434
PC Programming Manual
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only)
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
(KX-TDE series only)
The properties of the VoIP Extension card can be specified.
To adjust settings related to IP-PT network data transmission, click Common Settings (see 3.56 [1-1] Slot—
Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series only)).
IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the card.
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Subnet Mask
Specifies the subnet mask of the card.
Value Range
0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255)
Maintenance Console Location
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Gateway Address [Common Settings]
Displays the default gateway address of the network for IP-PTs (reference only).
To change the value displayed here, click Common Setting, and set the desired value for
Address.
Gateway
PC Programming Manual
435
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only)
Value Range
0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
3.56 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series only)
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Keep Alive Time Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to consider an IP-PT to be active even if it receives no
transmissions from that IP-PT. The PBX constantly confirms the status of IP-PTs. If no communications are
received from an IP-PT for the duration specified here, the PBX considers the IP-PT to be unreachable, and
sets the port status to Fault.
During operation, set between 10 s and 60 s. Settings over 60 s, and Disable, are used for debugging purposes,
and IP-PTs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances. Do not use debugging settings
unless instructed to do so.
Value Range
Disable, 10–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Echo Canceller Ability
Specifies the echo canceller ability time.
Value Range
OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only)
436
PC Programming Manual
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
DSP Digital Gain (Up)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
PC Programming Manual
437
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.
Value Range
Disable, Weak
Maintenance Console Location
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
438
PC Programming Manual
3.56 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series only)
3.56 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—
Common Settings (KX-TDE series only)
IP-PT network data transmission settings can be programmed. To activate any changes made to settings on
this screen, it is necessary to set all installed IP-EXT cards to OUS, then back to INS.
Gateway Address
Specifies the default gateway address of the network for IP-PTs.
Value Range
0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.56 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only)—
Gateway Address [Common Settings]
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (Server)
Specifies the UDP port used by the IP-EXT card to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol)
data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-EXT card uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number
specified here.
Value Range
1024–65472
Maintenance Console Location
3.56 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT)
Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-PT side.
This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
PC Programming Manual
439
3.56 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series only)
For voice communications, an IP-PT uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified
here.
Value Range
1024–65472
Maintenance Console Location
3.56 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
440
PC Programming Manual
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
(KX-TDE series only)
Various settings can be programmed for each IP extension port.
To change the status of extension ports, click Command.
IP-PT Registration and De-registration
An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-PT later.
Preparation
Follow the steps below to prepare before registering an IP-PT.
1. Open 3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only), and confirm that the IP
address and subnet mask settings of the IP-EXT16 card are correct.
2. Open 3.56 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series only) and
set the gateway address.
Registration
Follow the steps below to register the IP-PT.
1. Connect the IP-PT to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers and names are displayed on the
left.
3. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
4. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show "Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "Registered".
De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-PT.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".
Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-PT when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful
or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the IP-PT.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
PC Programming Manual
441
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click
Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
442
PC Programming Manual
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
PC Programming Manual
443
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Status
Indicates whether a certain IP-PT is registered (reference only).
Value Range
None, Registered
Maintenance Console Location
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
IP Address
Indicates the IP address of the IP-PT (reference only).
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Headset OFF/ON
Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP-PT.
Value Range
Headset OFF, Headset ON
444
PC Programming Manual
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
Maintenance Console Location
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.4 Headset Operation
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Ringing Tone
Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls.
Value Range
A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz)
B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz)
C: 128 ms (697 Hz), 128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96 ms (852 Hz)
Maintenance Console Location
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
IP Codec
Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data.
Value Range
G.711, G.729
Maintenance Console Location
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
PC Programming Manual
445
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
Packet Sampling Time
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller
this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
When IP Codec on this screen is set to G.711, only 20 ms and 30 ms are available.
Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only)
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
446
PC Programming Manual
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
The properties of the Optional Base card can be specified.
To change the status of slots on the OPB card, click Command.
The properties of the built-in SVM (Simplified Voice Message) and OGM (Outgoing Message) features can
also be specified on this screen. See 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property for details.
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Sub-Slot
Indicates the sub-slot number (reference only).
Value Range
Sub-slot number
PC Programming Manual
447
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Maintenance Console Location
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Feature Card Type
Indicates the type of option card that is installed or pre-installed in each sub-slot (reference only).
Note that only one ECHO16 card can be installed per OPB3 card.
Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card
ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Installation Manual References
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000:
1.2.1 Optional Equipment
For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1.2.1 Optional Equipment
For KX-TDE600:
1.2.1 Optional Equipment
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Status
Indicates the status of the option card in each slot (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the card command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
448
PC Programming Manual
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The card is in service.
OUS: The card is out of service.
Fault: The card has been removed from the sub-slot, or is not communicating with the PBX.
Pre-Install: There is no card in the sub-slot, but the card type is programmed for the sub-slot.
Idle: There is no card in the sub-slot, no programming of the card type for the sub-slot.
Maintenance Console Location
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
3.59 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Feature Guide References
None
Port Number
Indicates the port number of the mounted option card (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Status
Indicates the port status of the mounted option card (reference only).
Value Range
INS: The card is in service.
OUS: The card is out of service.
Fault: The card is pulled out from the sub-slot, or is not communicating with the PBX.
Maintenance Console Location
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
PC Programming Manual
449
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Device Type
Selects the type of connected output device (for output ports only).
Value Range
Relay, Ringer
Maintenance Console Location
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.10 External Relay Control
Input Signal Decision Time
Specifies the minimum duration of continuous input from the triggered sensor before the PBX recognises the
input and makes a sensor call.
Value Range
32 ´ n (n=2–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.9 External Sensor
Input Signal Detection Reopening Time
Specifies the length of time after the sensor has been triggered during which any further input from the sensor
will be ignored.
450
PC Programming Manual
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–255) s
Maintenance Console Location
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.9 External Sensor
SVM Feature
Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature. It is possible to use the ESVM card for
the SVM feature, as an MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
MSG Feature
Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as an MSG card (OGM feature). It is possible to use the
ESVM card for the SVM feature, as an MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
451
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Guide References
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
452
PC Programming Manual
3.59 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
3.59 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card
Command
Commands for the service cards installed on the OPB card can be programmed.
INS
Puts the card in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.59 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the card out of service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.59 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pre-INS
Assigns the card type to a certain sub-slot (Pre-installation).
Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card
PC Programming Manual
453
3.59 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card
ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.59 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Installation Manual References
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000:
1.2.1 Optional Equipment
For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1.2.1 Optional Equipment
For KX-TDE600:
1.2.1 Optional Equipment
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Delete
Assigns the card type to be deleted from the sub-slot.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.59 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
454
PC Programming Manual
3.60 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
3.60 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
Option cards can be installed to and removed from the OPB3 cards installed in the PBX.
Click the right and left arrow buttons (">", "<") to add or remove option cards.
Option Card Type
Selects the type of option card to install to the OPB3 card.
Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card
ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.60 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
Installation Manual References
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000:
1.2.1 Optional Equipment
For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1.2.1 Optional Equipment
For KX-TDE600:
1.2.1 Optional Equipment
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Guide References
None
Slot 1–Slot 3
Selects the slot on the OPB3 card to install or remove the option card for.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.60 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
PC Programming Manual
455
3.60 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Guide References
None
Card Inserted
Displays the type of option card currently installed to each slot of the OPB3 card
Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card
ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.60 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Guide References
None
456
PC Programming Manual
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station
Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/
KX-NCP1000), 128 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), or 512 (with the KX-TDE600) PSs can be registered.
Information on 32 PSs is displayed at a time. To display other PSs, click the applicable tab.
PS Registration and De-registration
A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used. Programming
instructions of the PBX are given below; programming instructions of the PS are found in the Installation
Manual.
It is possible to de-register the PS later.
Registration
Follow the steps below to register the PS.
1. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers and names are displayed on the
left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
3. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show "Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once a PS is successfully registered, the status of the PS will update to show "Registered".
De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the PS.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None".
Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the PS when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful or
de-registration has been performed only on the PS.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click
Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None".
PC Programming Manual
457
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station
Personal Identification Number
Specifies the Personal Identification Number (PIN) of the PBX, used to avoid registering a PS to the wrong
PBX.
Note that the same PIN should be entered at the PS, before the PS is registered to the PBX.
Value Range
4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
Index
Indicates the PS number (reference only).
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000:
1–64
For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–128
For KX-TDE600:
1–512
Maintenance Console Location
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
Extension No.
Specifies the extension number of the PS.
In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS can be used as a sub telephone with a wired main telephone (PT/SLT),
and two of them will share one extension number of the main telephone. However, note that the PS extension
458
PC Programming Manual
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station
number specified here will not be altered by the extension number of the main telephone even if the PS is in
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Extension Name
Feature Guide References
1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
Status
Indicates whether a certain PS is registered (reference only).
Value Range
None, Registered
Maintenance Console Location
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
459
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station
Feature Guide References
1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
460
PC Programming Manual
3.62 [1-3] Option
3.62 [1-3] Option
System options can be programmed.
It is possible to clear the master CS information (Master CS Port and Radio System ID) by following the
procedure below in batch mode:
1. Click Clear Master CS.
2. Click Yes. To abort the procedure, click No.
If the system data is downloaded to the PBX after the master CS information has been cleared, it is necessary
to register all PSs again in the interactive mode. Master CS information will be assigned automatically when
a CS is connected to the PBX. Without the Radio System ID, PSs cannot be registered.
System Wireless—System ID
Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS (reference only).
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.62 [1-3] Option
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card
Selects the initial status of cards after installation.
Value Range
In Service, Out of Service
Maintenance Console Location
3.62 [1-3] Option
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
461
3.62 [1-3] Option
New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension Card
Selects whether extension numbers are assigned to extension ports automatically or manually.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.62 [1-3] Option
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card
Specifies whether a PRI23 card is automatically set to ISDN Standard mode or T1-LCOT mode when it is
installed for the first time.
Value Range
ISDN Standard mode: The CCBS, CF, CT, and Centralised VM features are supported. DIL and DID call
distribution are available for the D channel.
T1-LCOT mode: DIL and DID call distribution are available for all 23B channels. The CCBS, CF, CT, and
Centralised VM features are not available in this mode.
Maintenance Console Location
3.62 [1-3] Option
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
1.30.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG
1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail
462
PC Programming Manual
3.63 [1-4] Clock Priority
3.63 [1-4] Clock Priority
Slot Number (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), Shelf-Slot
Number (for KX-TDE600)
Selects and prioritises slot numbers for the BRI, PRI, T1, and E1 cards that are used to forward a clock pulse
from an external source to the PBX.
Obtain the master clock time from the outside line that the telephone company provides.
To change Clock Priority, follow the steps below:
1. Assign a Clock Priority to each BRI, PRI, T1 and/or E1 card.
2. Set the status of the present clock source card to "OUS", then "INS".
Note
If multiple PBXs are used to establish a private network (TIE line service, QSIG network, etc.) without being
connected through the telephone company, assign only one PBX as the clock source on the network. That
PBX should have a card connected to a telephone company line selected as its clock source. All other
PBXs should have cards connected to the network selected as the clock source. This enables all PBXs on
the network to synchronise their timing.
Value Range
For KX-NCP series:
None, BRI2, PRI23, PRI30, T1, E1
For KX-TDE series:
None, BRI4, BRI8, PRI23, PRI30, T1, E1
Maintenance Console Location
3.63 [1-4] Clock Priority
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
463
3.63 [1-4] Clock Priority
464
PC Programming Manual
Section 4
[2] System
PC Programming Manual
465
4.1 [2-1-1] Date & Time—Date & Time Setting
4.1 [2-1-1] Date & Time—Date & Time Setting
The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions
(e.g., PT, PS).
This option is only available in Interactive mode.
Date & Time
Indicates the current date and time. Values can be entered by clicking the parameter you want to change and
typing the new value, or by clicking the up/down arrows beside the date and time.
Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 01–12
Day: 01–31
Hour: 00–23
Minute: 00–59
Second: 00–59
Maintenance Console Location
4.1 [2-1-1] Date & Time—Date & Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
466
PC Programming Manual
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Automatic clock adjustment and Summer time (daylight saving time) settings of the PBX can be programmed.
Automatic clock adjustment can be performed using one of two methods, ISDN & Caller ID or SNTP (Simple
Network Time Protocol).
To set Summer time, click 4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving.
Automatic Time Adjustment
Enables the PBX to automatically adjust its clock every day according to the time information provided by the
network.
Value Range
Disable, ISDN & Caller ID (FSK), SNTP
Maintenance Console Location
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.5 Automatic Setup
SNTP—SNTP Server—IP Address
Specifies the IP address of an SNTP server.
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.5 Automatic Setup
SNTP—SNTP Server—Port Number
Specifies the port number used for communication with an SNTP server.
Value Range
1–65535
PC Programming Manual
467
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Maintenance Console Location
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.5 Automatic Setup
SNTP—Time Zone—Time Zone
Specifies your local UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) time zone using the up and down arrows.
Value Range
-14:00–+14:00
Maintenance Console Location
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.5 Automatic Setup
SNTP—Time Zone—Time Zone for PC
Indicates the UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) time zone of the PC (reference only).
Value Range
-14:00–+14:00
Maintenance Console Location
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.5 Automatic Setup
468
PC Programming Manual
4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—
Daylight Saving
Summer time can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date,
and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer
times can be programmed.
Setting
Enables Summer time.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Feature Guide References
2.3.5 Automatic Setup
Start Date—Year, Month, Day
Specifies the start date of daylight savings time.
Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 1–12
Day: 1–31
Maintenance Console Location
4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Feature Guide References
2.3.5 Automatic Setup
PC Programming Manual
469
4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
End Date—Year, Month, Day
Specifies the end date of daylight savings time.
Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 1–12
Day: 1–31
Maintenance Console Location
4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving
Feature Guide References
2.3.5 Automatic Setup
470
PC Programming Manual
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified.
PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be
designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). To select an extension number,
click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Programming Manual References
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
2.2.5 Operator Features
BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM (for KX-NCP series)/Music
Source of BGM2 (for KX-TDE series)
Selects the audio source of BGM (for KX-NCP series)/BGM2 (for KX-TDE series).
Value Range
For KX-NCP series:
External BGM, Internal BGM 1, Internal BGM 2
For KX-TDE series:
External BGM Port 2, Internal BGM 1, Internal BGM 2
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.4 Music on Hold
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
PC Programming Manual
471
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2–7 (for KX-NCP series)/Music
Source of BGM3–8 (for KX-TDE series)—OGM No.
Selects the OGM number and name of the audio source of BGM.
Note
To use this feature it is necessary to disable the SVM Feature setting for the corresponding card.
Value Range
None, OGM1–OGM64
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— SVM Feature
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— SVM Feature
Feature Guide References
1.13.4 Music on Hold
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2–7 (for KX-NCP series)/Music
Source of BGM3–8 (for KX-TDE series)—Card
Selects the card (MPR [ESVM Circuit] or ESVM) of the audio source of BGM. Cards must have the MSG
Feature setting enabled to be available for selection.
Value Range
Available cards
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— MSG Feature
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— MSG Feature
Feature Guide References
1.13.4 Music on Hold
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
472
PC Programming Manual
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
Selects the audio source for Music on Hold.
Value Range
For KX-NCP series:
Tone, BGM, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, BGM5, BGM6, BGM7
For KX-TDE series:
Tone, BGM, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, BGM5, BGM6, BGM7, BGM8
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.4 Music on Hold
BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer
Selects the audio source for Music for Transfer (either the same music source chosen for the Music on Hold,
or ringback tone).
Value Range
Same as Music on Hold, Ringback Tone
Maintenance Console Location
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.12.1 Call Transfer
PC Programming Manual
473
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Various system timers and counters can be programmed.
Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter
Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being cancelled.
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
Automatic Redial—Repeat Interval
Specifies the length of time between repeated Automatic Redial attempts.
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–360) s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer an Automatic Redial attempt. This
is the length of time that the called party’s extension will ring for each attempt.
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–30) s
474
PC Programming Manual
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
Automatic Redial—Analogue CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer
Specifies the length of time before the PBX stops muting the caller’s voice and cancels busy tone detection
when Automatic Redial to analogue trunk is performed.
Value Range
0–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Specifies the length of time between going off-hook and the start of automatic dialling when the Hot Line feature
is set.
Value Range
0–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.7 Hot Line
PC Programming Manual
475
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Dial—Extension First Digit
Specifies the length of time after going off-hook within which the first digit of a feature number or destination
must be dialled before a reorder tone is heard.
Value Range
1–250 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release
Dial—Extension Inter-digit
Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits must be dialled before the PBX sends a reorder
tone.
Value Range
1–250 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release
Dial—Analogue CO First Digit
Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue
trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and stops muting the
caller’s voice over the analogue trunk.
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
476
PC Programming Manual
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Dial—Analogue CO Inter-digit
Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue
trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and stops muting the
caller’s voice over the analogue trunk.
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Dial—Analogue CO Call Duration Start
Specifies the length of time between the end of dialling and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing analogue
trunk calls.
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
PC Programming Manual
477
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered trunk call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in
each time mode.
Note that this setting is only valid for extensions whose Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break,
Night is set to "0".
Value Range
1–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept No Answer Time—
—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Intercept No Answer Time
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Recall—Hold Recall
Specifies the length of time until the holding extension receives a Hold Recall ring or alarm tone when a held
call remains unretrieved.
Value Range
0 (disable the Hold Recall)–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.1 Call Hold
Recall—Transfer Recall
Specifies the length of time that a transferred call waits to be answered, before being redirected to the Transfer
Recall destination assigned to the original transferring extension.
Value Range
1–240 s
478
PC Programming Manual
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.12.1 Call Transfer
Recall—Call Park Recall
Specifies the length of time that a parked call waits to be retrieved, before the Transfer Recall destination
assigned to the extension that parked the call hears a Call Park Recall ring.
Value Range
1–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.13.2 Call Park
Recall—Disconnect after Recall
Specifies the length of time after an extension with a trunk call on hold receives a Hold Recall tone that the
held call is disconnected.
Value Range
60 ´ n (n = 1–30) s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
479
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Feature Guide References
1.13.1 Call Hold
Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone
Specifies the length of time that a busy/DND tone is heard when a call is made to an extension in busy status
or DND mode. A reorder tone will be sent when this timer expires. (For a call through DISA, the call will be
disconnected when this timer expires.)
Value Range
0 (continuous)–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
1.8 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset
Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard when using a PT handset. The PT will return to idle
status when this timer expires.
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release
Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard from the built-in speaker of a PT in hands-free mode.
The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires. This setting is applied to PSs as well as PTs.
Value Range
1–15 s
480
PC Programming Manual
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release
1.11.1 Hands-free Operation
DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
DISA—Delayed Answer Timer
Specifies the length of time that the caller hears a ringback tone before hearing an OGM.
Value Range
0–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering
Specifies the length of time until the caller hears an OGM after reaching the DISA line.
Value Range
0.0–12.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
PC Programming Manual
481
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer
Specifies the length of time after the OGM finishes playing in which the caller must begin dialling before the
call is redirected to the operator.
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Operator (Extension Number)
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA
Specifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service activates.
Value Range
0–5 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered DISA call is intercepted and redirected to the intercept routing
destination after the original destination receives the call in each time mode.
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
482
PC Programming Manual
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept
Specifies the length of time that an intercepted DISA call rings at the intercept routing destination before being
disconnected.
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
Specifies the number of times that the caller can prolong a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line. (Selecting "0"
enables the caller to prolong the trunk-to-trunk call without restriction.)
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
PC Programming Manual
483
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time
Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line is prolonged each time that the caller
prolongs the call. (Selecting "0" prevents the caller from prolonging the trunk-to-trunk call.)
Value Range
60 ´ n (n = 0–7) s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message
Specifies the length of time that a progress tone is sent to the manager extension before recording an OGM.
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
DISA—Reorder Tone Duration
Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is sent to the caller before the call is disconnected.
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
484
PC Programming Manual
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Doorphone—Call Ring Duration
Specifies the length of time that a call from a doorphone rings until the call is cancelled when there is no answer.
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–15) s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Feature Guide References
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
Doorphone—Call Duration
Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected.
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=0–30) s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Feature Guide References
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
Doorphone—Open Duration
Specifies the length of time that a door stays unlocked after being opened from an extension.
Value Range
2–7 s
PC Programming Manual
485
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Feature Guide References
1.17.2 Door Open
Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter
Specifies the number of times that an alarm is repeated.
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.4 Timed Reminder
Timed Reminder—Interval Time
Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms.
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–120) s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.4 Timed Reminder
486
PC Programming Manual
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration
Specifies the length of time that an alarm rings.
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–30) s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.4 Timed Reminder
Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer
Specifies the length of time until the conference originator receives an Unattended Conference Recall tone.
Value Range
60 ´ n (n = 0–60) s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.14.1.2 Conference
Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer
Specifies the length of time until the parties involved in an Unattended Conference receive a warning tone after
the conference originator receives the Unattended Conference Recall tone but does not return to the
conference.
Value Range
0–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
PC Programming Manual
487
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.14.1.2 Conference
Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer
Specifies the length of time until an Unattended Conference is disconnected after the parties involved in the
conference receive a warning tone but the conference originator does not return to the conference.
Value Range
0–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.14.1.2 Conference
Miscellaneous
Caller ID—Waiting to receive
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive Caller ID from an analogue trunk. If the Caller ID is
received through an analogue trunk card on which no Caller ID card is mounted or through a port to which
Caller ID Detection is disabled, this timer is not applicable.
Value Range
0–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
488
PC Programming Manual
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display
Specifies the length of time that a Caller ID number, with the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line
from the telephone company, is shown on the display. The Caller ID number flashes on the display for five
seconds, followed by a 10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.
Value Range
0–250 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
1.18.1 Caller ID
Extension PIN—Lock Counter
Specifies the number of successive incorrect PIN entries allowed before the extension PIN is locked. A locked
extension PIN can not be used until reset from the extension assigned as manager. (Specifying "None" disables
this counter.)
Value Range
None, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.5 Walking COS
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
External Sensor—Ring Duration
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer before cancelling a sensor call.
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=1–15) s
PC Programming Manual
489
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.9 External Sensor
Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DDI / DID
Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a DDI/DID number from a public network. The call
will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.
Value Range
0–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—TIE
Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a dialled number from a TIE line. The call will be
redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.
Value Range
3–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
490
PC Programming Manual
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode
Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to
idle status.
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Air Synchronisation—Watching Degeneracy
Specifies the length of time that a Slave CS can maintain an ongoing call after air synchronisation is lost.
Value Range
60 ´ n (n=0–300) s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation
Feature Guide References
None
Voice Mail (Caller from VM to CO)—On-hook Wait Time
Specifies the length of time from when the VPS seizes a trunk (for example, to transfer a call) until the VPS
goes on hook. If the time specified here is too short, the VPS will be unable to dial the number and make a
connection.
Value Range
1–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
PC Programming Manual
491
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24 Voice Mail Features
During Conversation—DTMF Signal Length
Specifies the length of time that a DTMF signal is sent when a number is dialled from a PT or PS during a
conversation.
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms, 240 ms, 320 ms
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
During Conversation—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of time between DTMF signals when numbers are dialled in succession from a PT or PS
during a conversation.
Value Range
64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–15) ms
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
During Conversation—Pause Signal Time
Specifies the length of the pause inserted when the PAUSE button is pressed during a conversation.
492
PC Programming Manual
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer
When the destination of an incoming call is a PS, specifies the length of time the PBX searches for the PS
before setting its status to Out of Range.
If "0" is assigned, the timer is controlled by the cell station.
Value Range
0 s, 4 s, 8 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
4.18 [2-9] System Options—
System Wireless—Out of Range Registration
Feature Guide References
1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group
SVM—Recording Time
Specifies the maximum length of a message recorded by the SVM feature.
Value Range
1–600 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
PC Programming Manual
493
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
SVM—Dial Tone Continuous Time
Specifies the length of time that dial tone 3 is heard after all messages stored by the SVM feature for an
extension are finished playing.
Value Range
1–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Conference Group Call—Ring Duration
Specifies the length of time that a conference group call will ring. The conference group call will be established
with members who answer within this time. If no members answer the call before this timer expires, the call is
cancelled.
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Conference Group Call Operation
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call Operation
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Conference Group Call
494
PC Programming Manual
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day.
The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the
Time Service Switching Mode option.
Time Table numbers correspond to tenant numbers (for example, Tenant 1 uses Time Table 1). Select the
desired Time Table from the Time Table No. list.
When in Automatic Switching mode, the time modes of the tenant are switched as programmed in the
corresponding Time Table. Manual switching is possible only from an authorised extension (determined by
COS).
• To adjust the currently displayed Time Table, click and drag the divisions between two time periods.
• To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Time Table, including adding or deleting time
blocks, click Time Setting.
PC Programming Manual
495
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Time
Table, as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods.
1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Setting
Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service
1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Hour,
Minute
Specifies the start time for each time block. Times can only be set when
Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Setting is set to Enable.
Value Range
00:00–23:59
Maintenance Console Location
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service
2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting
Enables the setting of the start time for each break period.
496
PC Programming Manual
1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start,
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service
2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Hour, Minute
Specifies the start time for each break period. Times can only be set when
Setting is set to Enable.
2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—
Value Range
00:00–23:59
Maintenance Console Location
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service
2. Break—Break 1–3 End—Hour, Minute
Specifies the end time for each break period. Times can only be set when
Setting is set to Enable.
2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—
Value Range
00:00–23:59
Maintenance Console Location
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
PC Programming Manual
497
4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service
498
PC Programming Manual
4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table
4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table
A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the
desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list.
The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed.
Holiday Table—Setting
Enables the setting of the holiday.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Holiday Table—Start Date—Month
Specifies the month of the holiday start date.
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Holiday Table—Start Date—Day
Specifies the day of the holiday start date.
Value Range
1–31
PC Programming Manual
499
4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Holiday Table—End Date—Month
Specifies the month of the holiday end date.
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Holiday Table—End Date—Day
Specifies the day of the holiday end date.
Value Range
1–31
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
500
PC Programming Manual
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, numbers to access other PBXs in a
network, and KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling numbers can be programmed here.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Guide.
Extension
The leading numbers and the number of additional digits of the extension numbers for a maximum of 64
different extension numbering schemes can be programmed.
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number of extension numbers and floating extension numbers.
Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
13.1 [11-1] Main
Feature Guide References
None
No. of Additional Digits
Specifies the number of additional digits following the leading number.
Value Range
None: 0 digit
X: 1 digit
XX: 2 digits
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
PC Programming Manual
501
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Features
Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available
while hearing a dial tone.
Operator Call
Specifies the feature number used to call the operator.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
Feature Guide References
2.2.5 Operator Features
Idle Line Access (Local Access)
Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call by Idle Line Access (selects an idle trunk automatically).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
502
PC Programming Manual
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Trunk Group Access
Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using an idle trunk from a certain trunk group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
None
TIE Line Access
Specifies the feature number used to make a TIE line call.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
Redial
Specifies the feature number used to redial the last number dialled.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
503
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling
Specifies the feature number used to make a call using a System/Personal Speed Dialling number.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
Personal Speed Dialling - Programming
Specifies the feature number used to programme Personal Speed Dialling numbers at an extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
Doorphone Call
Specifies the feature number used to make a call to a doorphone.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
504
PC Programming Manual
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Feature Guide References
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
Group Paging
Specifies the feature number used to page a certain paging group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
External BGM On / Off
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to turn on or off the external BGM.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—
Manager
Feature Guide References
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
PC Programming Manual
505
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
OGM Record / Clear / Playback
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to record, clear, or play back a certain
OGM.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—
Manager
Feature Guide References
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
Single CO Line Access
Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using a certain trunk.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parallel Telephone (Ring) Mode Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel an SLT connected in parallel with a DPT to ring when
receiving an incoming call.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
506
PC Programming Manual
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone
Group Call Pickup
Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain call pickup group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup
Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup Deny
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup Deny
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
TAFAS Answer
Specifies the feature number used to answer a trunk call notified through an external pager.
PC Programming Manual
507
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
7.2 [5-2] External Pager
Feature Guide References
1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
Group Paging Answer
Specifies the feature number used to answer a page to a paging group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
Automatic Callback Busy Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to cancel Automatic Callback Busy.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
508
PC Programming Manual
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Guide References
1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code
Specifies the feature number used to change the COS of an extension temporarily, and also change the feature
settings (for example, FWD, DND) of an extension from another extension or through DISA.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions—
by Other Extension
Remote Operation
Feature Guide References
1.9.5 Walking COS
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Wireless XDP Parallel mode.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions—
Parallel Mode Set by PS
Accept Wireless XDP
Feature Guide References
1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Account Code Entry
Specifies the feature number used to enter an Account Code.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
PC Programming Manual
509
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry
Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve
Specifies the feature number used to hold a call or retrieve a call on hold from the holding extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.1 Call Hold
Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number
Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held call from a different extension by specifying a holding
extension number.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.1 Call Hold
510
PC Programming Manual
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Call Park / Call Park Retrieve
Specifies the feature number used to hold a call in a parking zone or retrieve a call held in a parking zone.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.2 Call Park
Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number
Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held trunk call from a different extension by specifying the held
trunk number.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.1 Call Hold
Door Open
Specifies the feature number used to open a door.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
PC Programming Manual
511
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Feature Guide References
1.17.2 Door Open
External Relay Access
Specifies the feature number used to activate a relay.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Feature Guide References
1.17.10 External Relay Control
External Feature Access
Specifies the feature number used to access the features of a host PBX or the telephone company.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
SIP Refer (Blind)
Specifies the feature number used to perform a blind transfer from a SIP extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
512
PC Programming Manual
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
ISDN Hold
Specifies the feature number used to hold a call using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of
the PBX feature.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN
COLR Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel COLR, which suppresses the presentation of the called
party’s number to the caller.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY
PC Programming Manual
513
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
CLIR Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel CLIR, which suppresses the presentation of the caller’s
number to the called party.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension
Specifies the feature number used to send either the CLIP number of the trunk in use (subscriber’s number)
or the extension to the network.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Subscriber Number
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber Number
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
514
PC Programming Manual
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
MCID
Specifies the feature number used to ask the telephone company to trace a malicious call. This feature can
be used during a call or while hearing a reorder tone after the caller hangs up.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)
ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the FWD of incoming ISDN calls to an outside party using
the ISDN service of the telephone company (instead of the PBX), or confirm the FWD setting.
Extension users can set the FWD destination to the network on an MSN basis.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)
1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Message Waiting, or call back the caller.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
PC Programming Manual
515
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.1 Message Waiting
FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk and intercom calls.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk calls.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming intercom calls.
516
PC Programming Manual
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
FWD No Answer Timer Set
Specifies the feature number used to set the length of time before a call is forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk and intercom calls to an incoming
call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
PC Programming Manual
517
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk calls to an incoming call distribution
group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming intercom calls to an incoming call
distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Call Pickup Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from
picking up calls to your extension).
518
PC Programming Manual
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
Paging Deny Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Paging Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from paging
your extension).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
Walking Extension
Specifies the feature number used to use the same extension settings at a new extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
519
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Guide References
1.28.3 Walking Extension Features
Data Line Security Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Data Line Security (i.e., preventing signals from other
extensions during data transmission).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.5 Data Line Security
Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call
Specifies the feature number used to set or change the method of receiving a Call Waiting notification from an
extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Automatic Call Waiting
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Call Waiting notification from a trunk, doorphone, or a
call via an incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
520
PC Programming Manual
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Executive Busy Override (i.e., preventing other extensions
from joining your conversation).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive—
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive—
Executive Busy Override
Executive Busy Override Deny
Feature Guide References
1.8.2 Executive Busy Override
Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off
Specifies the feature number used to enter or leave Not Ready mode.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
PC Programming Manual
521
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Log-in / Log-out
Specifies the feature number used to join or leave an incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Incoming Call Queue Monitor
Specifies the feature number, available only for extensions assigned as a supervisor, used to monitor the status
of an incoming call distribution group with the extension display.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous—
Number
Supervisor Extension
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature
Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set/cancel the Hot Line feature, or programme the number to be
automatically dialled.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
522
PC Programming Manual
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.7 Hot Line
Absent Message Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the display of an Absent Message.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.2 Absent Message
BGM Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the BGM heard through the telephone speaker while
on-hook.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Feature Guide References
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder remotely (Wake-up Call).
PC Programming Manual
523
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.4 Timed Reminder
Timed Reminder Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.4 Timed Reminder
Printing Message
Specifies the feature number used to select a Printing Message to be output on SMDR.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge—Main—
524
PC Programming Manual
SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Guide References
1.26.2 Printing Message
Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to lock or unlock an extension to make certain trunk calls and change the
forwarding destination, using the Extension Dial Lock feature.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock
Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to change the time mode manually.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—
Time Service Switch
Manager
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Remote Extension Dial Lock Off
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to unlock other extensions using the
Extension Dial Lock feature.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
PC Programming Manual
525
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—
Manager
Feature Guide References
1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock
Remote Extension Dial Lock On
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to lock other extensions using the
Extension Dial Lock feature.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—
Manager
Feature Guide References
1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock
Extension Feature Clear
Specifies the feature number used to reset certain features of an extension to the default values.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear
526
PC Programming Manual
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Extension PIN Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set a PIN for an extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
Dial Information (CTI)
Specifies the feature number used to send dial information to the CTI feature instead of the PBX.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Conference Group Call Operation
Specifies the feature number used to make a conference group call.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—
Conference Group Call—Ring Duration
PC Programming Manual
527
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous—
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group
Conference Group Call Operation
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Conference Group Call
Centralised BLF Monitor Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to cancel monitoring of an extension using an NDSS button.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
Busy Out Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to cancel the Busy Out status of an analogue trunk.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 5—
Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue CO
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out
Simplified Voice Message Access
Specifies the feature number used to access the SVM feature to record, listen to and delete messages.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
528
PC Programming Manual
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Other PBX Extension
Other PBX extension numbers can be used to easily call extensions connected to PBXs at different locations
in a TIE line network. The leading numbers of all PBXs in the network that will be called should be entered in
this table. A maximum of 16 leading numbers can be programmed.
Dial
Specifies the leading extension number of the other PBX.
Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table—
Leading Number
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
KX-T7710
The settings of the MESSAGE button and One-touch buttons on the KX-T7710 can be programmed.
Dial
Indicates the DTMF tone dial required by the PBX to recognise it and dial the preprogrammed number for each
button (reference only).
Value Range
B: For MESSAGE button
A1: For One-touch button 1
A2: For One-touch button 2
A3: For One-touch button 3
PC Programming Manual
529
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
A4: For One-touch button 4
A5: For One-touch button 5
A6: For One-touch button 6
A7: For One-touch button 7
A8: For One-touch button 8
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling
Message Key—Phone Number
Specifies the feature number or telephone number dialled when the MESSAGE button on the KX-T7710 is
pressed. By default, this is set to the feature number used to call back a caller who left a message waiting
indication, Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back.
This is available only when the position of the Mode switch lever on the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX".
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—
Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling
One-touch Dial 01–08—Phone Number
Specifies the number dialled when a one-touch button on the KX-T7710 is pressed.
This is available only when the position of the Mode switch lever on the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX".
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
530
PC Programming Manual
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling
PC Programming Manual
531
4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Quick Dialling numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without having
to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other registered
numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks" in the Feature Guide).
A maximum of 80 Quick Dialling numbers can be programmed in Basic Memory, and a maximum of 4000
Quick Dialling numbers can be programmed in Expansion. To display other sets of numbers, click the
applicable tab.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Guide.
Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not work
Specifies whether to check if the quick dial numbering plan is compatible (does not overlap) with the main
numbering plan.
Value Range
Disable: Checks whether the quick dial numbering plan is compatible with the main numbering plan.
Enable: Does not check whether the quick dial numbering plan is compatible with the main numbering plan.
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling
1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Dial
Specifies the Quick Dialling number.
Value Range
Basic Memory: Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Expand 1–4000: Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Programming Manual References
None
532
PC Programming Manual
4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling
1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Phone Number
Specifies the number to be dialled when the corresponding Quick Dialling number is used.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling
1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
PC Programming Manual
533
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are
available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Guide.
BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call an
extension in DND mode.
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3
1.3.1.3
1.8.4.2
1.8.4.3
1.8.4.4
Call Waiting
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Call Waiting Tone
Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
Whisper OHCA
Executive Busy Override
Specifies the feature number used to interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Executive Busy Override
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny
Feature Guide References
1.8.2 Executive Busy Override
534
PC Programming Manual
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice
Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension’s preset call receiving
method to ring tone or voice.
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.3 Intercom Call
Message Waiting Set
Specifies the feature number used to leave a Message Waiting notification.
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.1 Message Waiting
Call Monitor
Specifies the feature number used to listen to a busy extension’s conversation.
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
PC Programming Manual
535
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Call Monitor
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny
Feature Guide References
1.8.3 Call Monitor
Automatic Callback Busy
Specifies the feature number used to reserve a busy line and receive callback ringing when the line becomes
idle.
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call an
extension in DND mode. This is the same setting as BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override on
this screen, and can be used to provide two methods of activating the specified features. This can be useful,
for example, if users prefer to use a separate feature number to activate DND Override.
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
536
PC Programming Manual
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA
PC Programming Manual
537
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of
Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum
of 64 COS levels can be programmed.
TRS
Restrictions to features related to making trunk calls can be programmed for each COS.
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) level for making trunk calls in each time mode.
Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls
2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all trunk calls
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— COS
9.1 [7-1] Denied Code
9.2 [7-2] Exception Code
538
PC Programming Manual
COS
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
TRS Level on Extension Lock
Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making trunk calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial
Lock feature.
Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls
2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all trunk calls
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
9.1 [7-1] Denied Code
9.2 [7-2] Exception Code
Feature Guide References
1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock
TRS Level for System Speed Dialling
Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making a trunk call using System Speed Dialling numbers, which overrides
the TRS/Barring set for the current time mode.
Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls
2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all trunk calls
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Override by System Speed Dialling
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
PC Programming Manual
539
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
CO & SMDR
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit
Enables the extension-to-trunk call duration feature. The maximum call duration can be set using
Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s) on 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Guide References
1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
Transfer to CO
Enables the transferring of calls to trunks.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
540
PC Programming Manual
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Guide References
1.12.1 Call Transfer
Call Forward to CO
Enables the forwarding of calls to trunks.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Account Code Mode
Specifies whether the entry of an account code is optional or mandatory when making a trunk call.
Value Range
Option, Forced
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
PC Programming Manual
541
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry
CF (MSN)
Enables forwarding of ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead
of the PBX, on an MSN basis.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)
1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR)
Enables the automatic recording of information about outgoing trunk calls on SMDR.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
13.1 [11-1] Main
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Assistant
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
542
PC Programming Manual
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Call Pickup by DSS
Enables using a DSS button to pick up a call to a specified extension.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
DND Override
Enables making a call to an extension in DND mode by entering the feature number.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
PC Programming Manual
543
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
OHCA / Whisper OHCA
Enables using OHCA/Whisper OHCA as a method of second call notification by entering the feature number.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Guide References
1.8.4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension
1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA
Transfer to busy Extension w/o BSS Operation
Enables a transferred call to be queued when the transfer destination is busy.
Value Range
Disable: The call is not transferred. (If the transfer destination has enabled the call waiting notification feature,
it is possible to inform the destination about the call transfer.)
Enable: The transferred call is queued for the time period specified in Recall—Transfer Recall in 4.5 [2-3]
Timers & Counters.
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—
544
PC Programming Manual
Recall—Transfer Recall
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Guide References
1.12.1 Call Transfer
Automatic Answer (Caller)
Enables a caller to have calls automatically answered when the destination has set Hands-free Answerback.
Value Range
Disable: Even if the destination has set Hands-free Answerback, the call will not be automatically answered.
Enable: The call will be automatically answered.
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback
Executive
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Call Monitor
Enables listening to a busy extension’s conversation.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
PC Programming Manual
545
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Guide References
1.8.3 Call Monitor
Executive Busy Override
Enables interrupting an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Guide References
1.8.2 Executive Busy Override
Executive Busy Override Deny
Enables preventing other extensions from interrupting calls.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
546
PC Programming Manual
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Manager
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Group Forward Set
Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Disable: An extension cannot set call forwarding for any group.
Enable-All: An extension can set call forwarding for all groups.
Enable-Group: An extension can only set call forwarding for the group to which the extension belongs.
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Programming Mode Level
Specifies the level of authorisation for performing PT programming.
Value Range
Disable: A PT user cannot perform any programming.
PROG Only: A PT user can perform only personal programming.
PROG and PROG **/*#: A PT user can perform both personal and system programming.
PC Programming Manual
547
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Guide References
2.3.2 PT Programming
Manager
Specifies the authorisation to use manager features.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Guide References
2.2.6 Manager Features
Time Service Switch
Enables manual switching of time modes.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
548
PC Programming Manual
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
PDN/SDN
An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and to pick up
or transfer calls to that extension easily. The settings here control how SDN buttons operate for extensions at
each COS level.
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
SDN Key Mode
Selects what happens when an extension user presses an SDN button while on hook.
Value Range
Enhanced DSS: The registered (owner) extension is called.
Standard SDN: A dial tone is heard.
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Making call by COS of SDN key’s owner
Selects whether an extension that uses an SDN button to make calls is given the COS of the SDN button’s
registered (owner) extension.
This setting is only available when SDN Key Mode above is set to "Standard SDN".
PC Programming Manual
549
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN—
COS Name
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
SDN Key Assignment by PT Program
Selects whether PT users can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Optional Device & Other Extensions
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
550
PC Programming Manual
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Door Unlock
Enables using the door opener feature.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Guide References
1.17.2 Door Open
External Relay Access
Enables access to external relays.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Feature Guide References
1.17.10 External Relay Control
Accept the Call from DISA
Enables reception of calls from DISA.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
PC Programming Manual
551
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Remote Operation by Other Extension
Allows the Walking COS feature to be used from a remote location (inside the PBX, or outside the PBX using
DISA).
Value Range
Allow, Deny
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
Feature Guide References
1.9.5 Walking COS
Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS
Allows Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to be set by a PS.
Value Range
Allow, Deny
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
552
PC Programming Manual
COS
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
CA
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
CA Chat
Enables the chat feature when using Communication Assistant (CA) Client.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CA—
CA ICD Group Log Out
Feature Guide References
1.32.3 CA (Communication Assistant)
CA ICD Group Log Out
Enables logging out of ICD groups when using Communication Assistant (CA) Client.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
PC Programming Manual
553
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CA—
CA Chat
Feature Guide References
1.32.3 CA (Communication Assistant)
Miscellaneous
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Conference Group Call Operation
Enables making conference group calls.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Conference Group Call—Ring Duration
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Conference Group Call Operation
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Conference Group Call
Accept a collect call (for Brazil)
Enables accepting collect calls.
554
PC Programming Manual
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
555
4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode (day/
lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list.
Outgoing Trunk Group 1–64 (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE200) or 1–96 (for KX-TDE600)
Specifies the available trunk groups.
Value Range
Block (blue), Non Block
Maintenance Console Location
4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
Programming Manual References
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
556
PC Programming Manual
4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call
distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom
calls from those belonging to a certain COS.
COS Number of the Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension 1–
64
Specifies the combinations of COS levels for which intercom calls are blocked.
Value Range
Block (blue), Non Block
Maintenance Console Location
4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— COS
COS
Feature Guide References
1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
PC Programming Manual
557
4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that the calls
are received on. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can
be selected for use by an extension.
Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming trunk calls.
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option1, Option2
Maintenance Console Location
4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings— Trunk Group Number
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
558
PC Programming Manual
4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from
Doorphone
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port
that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern
table can be selected for use by an extension.
Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming doorphone calls.
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, S-Double, Option 1, Option 2
Maintenance Console Location
4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
PC Programming Manual
559
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX
features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables
can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
For more information on ring tone patterns, see "1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection" in the Feature Guide.
Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls.
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
Feature Guide References
None
Timed Reminder—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for Timed Reminder alarms.
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
Feature Guide References
None
Call Back—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for callback ringing by Automatic Callback Busy.
560
PC Programming Manual
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, S-Double, Option 1, Option 2
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
Feature Guide References
None
Live Call Screening—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for LCS warning tones.
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
Feature Guide References
None
External Sensor—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for calls from an external sensor.
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2
Maintenance Console Location
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
PC Programming Manual
561
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Feature Guide References
None
562
PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-9] System Options
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Various system settings can be programmed.
Option 1
PT LCD—Date Display
Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions.
Value Range
Date-Month, Month-Date
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PT LCD—Time Display
Selects the time format shown on the displays of extensions. The time display format assigned here applies
when setting the Timed Reminder feature.
Value Range
12H, 24H
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.4 Timed Reminder
PT LCD—Password / PIN Display
Selects whether passwords and PINs (Personal Identification Number) are hidden or shown on the displays
of extensions while being entered.
Value Range
Hide, Display
PC Programming Manual
563
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the FWD feature is activated.
Value Range
On (Solid): Red on
Flash: Slow red flashing
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.20.3 LED Indication
PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the DND feature is activated.
Value Range
On (Solid): Red on
Flash: Slow red flashing
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
564
PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.20.3 LED Indication
PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle
Selects the function of the FWD/DND button (fixed button) when it is pressed in idle status. (A FWD/DND button
customised on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, and the mode cannot be changed.)
Value Range
FWD/DND Setting Mode: Enter programming mode for the FWD/DND setting.
FWD/DND Cycle Switch: Switch the FWD on/DND on/Off mode instead of entering the programming mode
for the FWD/DND setting. (When there are separate FWD/DND settings for calls from trunks and calls from
extensions, mode switching cannot be performed.)
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension
Specifies whether extensions can receive paging when in DND mode.
Value Range
Do Not Page, Page
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
PC Programming Manual
565
4.18 [2-9] System Options
PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor for KX-T74xx/T75xx/T76xx
Enables the use of Off-Hook Monitor with KX-T7400, KX-T7500, KX-T7600, or KX-DT300 series telephones
and IP-PTs.
Value Range
Disable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handsfree microphone. The other party’s voice is heard
through the hands-free speaker.
Enable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handset microphone. The other party’s voice is heard through
both the hands-free speaker and the handset.
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.2 Off-hook Monitor
PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key
Selects the function of the S-CO button during a trunk call.
Value Range
Enable: Pressing the S-CO button activates the Privacy Release feature
Disable: Pressing the S-CO button switches the information shown on the PT display.
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.14.1.3 Privacy Release
PT Operation—One-touch Busy Override by SCO key
Specifies whether calls in progress can be joined (Executive Busy Override) simply by pressing the S-CO
button.
Value Range
Enable, Disable
566
PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.8.2 Executive Busy Override
PT Operation—JOG Dial Speed
Selects the speed at which items scroll on the display when the Jog Dial is used.
Value Range
Normal, High Speed
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting
Specifies whether incoming call ringing can be turned off at individual extensions. If disabled, users cannot
prevent incoming calls from ringing.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
PC Programming Manual
567
4.18 [2-9] System Options
PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after
Specifies the number of times a PT in Hands-free Answerback mode will ring before a conversation is
established automatically when it receives a call from a trunk.
Value Range
No Ring, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback
PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group key
Selects whether calls are disconnected or held when an INTERCOM, PDN, CO, or ICD Group button is pressed
while having a conversation.
Value Range
Disable (Disconnect), Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.13.1 Call Hold
PT Operation—Hold Key Mode
Selects which extensions can retrieve a held call or a call that is transferred by Call Transfer without
Announcement feature.
Value Range
Hold: Any extension can retrieve a held call.
Exclusive Hold: Only the holding extension can retrieve a held call.
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
568
PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.1 Call Hold
Option 2
Extension Clear—Call Waiting
Specifies whether the Call Waiting setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.
Value Range
Clear, Do not clear
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear
Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
Specifies whether the FWD/DND setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.
Value Range
Clear, Do not clear
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear
Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
Specifies whether the Hot Line setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.
PC Programming Manual
569
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Clear, Do not clear
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear
CODEC—System CODEC
Selects the codec type for DPTs and PSs.
Value Range
A-Law, µ-Law
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CODEC—Network CODEC
Selects the codec type for ISDN or T1/E1 lines.
Value Range
A-Law, µ-Law
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
570
PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Feature Guide References
None
CODEC—Priority Notification from SIP Network (for Incoming Call)
Specifies whether the priority notification from the SIP network is used in place of the PBX’s codec priority for
SIP trunks.
Value Range
Enable, Disable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
Specifies whether to automatically send "#" as an end code when dialling to an ISDN line; if used as the end
code, "#" will not be dialled out as part of a number even when the "#" key is pressed.
Value Range
Enable, Disable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— ISDN Outgoing Call Type
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— ISDN Outgoing Call Type
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)
Selects whether Automatic Redial to an ISDN line is performed when the called party does not answer within
a preprogrammed time period.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
PC Programming Manual
571
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—
Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
Redial—Automatic Redial for Analogue CO
Selects whether Automatic Redial to an analogue trunk is performed when the called party does not answer
within a preprogrammed time period.
Value Range
Enable, Disable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—
Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory
Specifies whether any digits dialled after the called party answers (for example, to access a specific extension
within another company) are also saved as part of the redial number.
Value Range
Enable, Disable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
572
PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Redial—Call Log by Redial key
Enables display of the Outgoing Call Log on a DPT by pressing the REDIAL button while on hook.
Value Range
Enable, Disable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
Selects whether the time limit for extension-to-trunk calls applies to outgoing calls only or for both outgoing
and incoming calls. COS determines the use of this feature, and the length of the time limit can be assigned
on a trunk group basis.
Value Range
Enable, Disable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
Feature Guide References
1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
CO - CO Call Limitation—After Conference
Selects whether to allow a call between 2 outside destinations to continue after the originator of the conference
has left the conference.
Value Range
Enable: The call will be disconnected.
Disable: The call will continue.
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
PC Programming Manual
573
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.14.1.2 Conference
1.30.5 QSIG Enhanced Features
Option 3
Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 1. Confirmation Tone 1 is heard from a PT when it receives a call
in voice-calling mode.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 2. Confirmation Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it receives a call
in Hands-free Answerback mode, or paging.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback
1.16.1 Paging
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone
574
PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from
Doorphone
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-1. Confirmation Tone 3-1 is heard from an extension when, for
example, it pages another extension, or from a doorphone when the doorphone button is pressed.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-2. Confirmation Tone 3-2 is heard from an extension when
answering a call by, for example, the Call Pickup feature.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-1. Confirmation Tone 4-1 is heard from an extension when a
new party joins a conference call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
PC Programming Manual
575
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.14.1.2 Conference
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-2. Confirmation Tone 4-2 is heard from an extension when a
party leaves a conference call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.14.1.2 Conference
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 5. Confirmation Tone 5 is heard from an extension when it holds
a call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone
576
PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
Enables the PBX to send dial tones at different frequencies depending on the setting of the extension.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.29.1 Dial Tone
Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension
Selects the dial tone the PBX sends to extensions to inform about the features activated on them.
Value Range
Type A, Type B
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.29.1 Dial Tone
Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
Selects the dial tone the PBX (instead of the network) sends to the caller when a call is made using the ARS
feature, or ISDN En Bloc dialling.
Value Range
Type A, Type B
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
PC Programming Manual
577
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
10.1 [8-1] System Setting
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
1.29.1 Dial Tone
Echo Cancel—Conference
Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for conference calls.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.14.1.2 Conference
Echo Cancel—CO-to-CO
Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for trunk-to-trunk calls.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Echo Cancel—Extension to Analogue Line
Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for extension-to-analogue trunk calls.
578
PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Echo Cancel—Extension to Digital Line
Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for extension-to-ISDN/T1/E1 line calls.
If set to "Enable", the echo canceller card is used for extension-to-ISDN/T1/E1 line calls.
If set to "Disable", the echo canceller card is not used for extension-to-ISDN/T1/E1 line calls.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Option 4
DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call
Enables the use of a DSS button to pick up an incoming call to another extension or an ICD group.
Value Range
ON or Flash, OFF
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
PC Programming Manual
579
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
1.20.3 LED Indication
DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call
Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified extension. To enable
this setting, DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to ON or Flash.
Value Range
Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call.
Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call
Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified incoming call distribution
group.
To enable this setting, DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to ON or
Flash.
Value Range
Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call.
Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
580
PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-9] System Options
DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call
Specifies whether pressing a DSS or SDN button during an extension-to-extension call disconnects the current
call or places the call on consultation hold.
Value Range
Disable: The PBX disconnects the current call, and calls the extension assigned to the DSS or SDN button.
Enable: The PBX places the current call on consultation hold.
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.12.1 Call Transfer
Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call
Enables transferred calls (including direct extension calls) to be automatically answered, when using the
Hands-free Answerback feature.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback
Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller
ID Digits
Specifies the minimum length of Caller ID required for a call from a private network to be considered as a call
from a public network.
Value Range
0–15
PC Programming Manual
581
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering (Activation Key Required)
Enables extensions at two PBXs connected in a network to have the same leading number. For example,
extension 101 is registered at PBX 1, and extension 102 is registered at PBX 2. Only the Extension Number
Method is supported.
If disabled, different leading numbers need to be assigned for extensions at each PBX.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table—
Leading Number
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is transferred to CO (CLIP of Held Party)
Enables the transfer of related CLIP information when a party on hold is transferred. When set to "Enable", the
transfer destination will receive the original caller’s CLIP information, not the information of the extension that
performed the transfer.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
582
PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
Selects whether the CLIP number of the calling party or the CLIP number of the forwarding extension or virtual
PS is sent to the forwarding destination to identify the origin of a trunk call.
Value Range
Disable: The CLIP number assigned to the forwarding extension or virtual PS is sent.
Enable: The CLIP number of the calling party is sent.
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
1.30.6 Network ICD Group
Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
Selects whether the CLIP number of the calling extension or the CLIP number of the forwarding extension or
virtual PS is sent to the forwarding destination to identify the origin of a call.
Value Range
Disable: The CLIP number assigned to the forwarding extension or virtual PS is sent.
Enable: The CLIP number of the calling extension is sent.
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
1.30.6 Network ICD Group
PC Programming Manual
583
4.18 [2-9] System Options
System Wireless—Out of Range Registration
Selects whether the PBX can set the status of a PS to Out of Range if no signal is received from the PS for a
preset length of time. This feature must be enabled to allow PS roaming.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—
System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer
Feature Guide References
1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group
System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD
Selects whether call information (such as Caller ID) is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS (i.e., a PS
with one or more PDN buttons) when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—
Parameter Selection (for SDN)
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Option 5
SLT—SLT Hold Mode
Selects how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT. For details of each mode, see "1.13.1 Call Hold" in
the Feature Guide.
Value Range
Mode 1, Mode 2, Mode 3, Mode 4
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
584
PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.1 Call Hold
SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern (KX-TDE series only)
Specifies the Message Waiting Lamp light pattern of SLTs.
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.1 Message Waiting
Whisper OHCA—for SLT / APT / KX-T72xx
Enables the use of Whisper OHCA to SLTs and IP-PTs, and DPTs other than KX-T7400 series, KX-T7500
series, KX-T7600 series, or KX-DT300 series.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA
Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call
Selects whether Busy Station Signalling (BSS) is automatically performed when an extension user calls a busy
extension.
PC Programming Manual
585
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue CO
Enables the PBX to automatically set a trunk to Busy Out status when a loop current is not detected, preventing
that trunk from being used.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out
ISDN Voice Path Connection—Connect when "Alert" is sent from ISDN
Enables the voice path of an ISDN line to connect even when an "Alert" signal is received from the telephone
company.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
586
PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Feature Guide References
None
PT Feature Access—No. 1–8
Specifies the System Feature Access Menu (1–8) shown on the display of an extension.
Value Range
None, Call Back Cancel, Call Pickup Direct, Call Pickup Group, Doorphone Call, Door Open, Relay On,
External BGM, Paging
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Option—Fwd from ISDN to ISDN
Specifies whether alert messages are sent to the ISDN network. This setting should be enabled for networks
that disconnect a call if an alert message is not received.
Value Range
Mode1: Disable
Mode2: Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Option—Calling Party Name Presentation to PRI23
Specifies whether the name of the calling party is displayed when making a call to the ISDN network.
Value Range
Enable, Disable
PC Programming Manual
587
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Option—Calling Party Name Sending Format
Specifies the sending format of the calling party name when making a call to the ISDN network.
Value Range
Display, Facility
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Option 6 (CTI)
Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for First Party Call
Control CTI such as Communication Assistant (CA).
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
588
PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry counter
Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for First Party Call Control CTI such as
Communication Assistant (CA). When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times
without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
Value Range
0–10
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
3rd Party CTI—System status retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for Third Party Call
Control CTI.
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
3rd Party CTI—System status retry counter
Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive
check has been attempted the programmed number of times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical
connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
Value Range
0–10
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
PC Programming Manual
589
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
3rd Party CTI—CDR retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR is retried when no response is received, for Third Party
Call Control CTI.
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
3rd Party CTI—CDR retry counter
Specifies the number of times that the alive check of CDR is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When
the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times, the association is released automatically.
Value Range
0–10
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
CTI Multi PBX Control—PBX Name
Specifies the name of the PBX, for network programming reference.
590
PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CTI Multi PBX Control—USB Serial Number
Specifies the serial number assigned to this PBX’s USB data transfers, used when multiple PBXs are
connected via USB to one PC (for example, for CTI).
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CTI Make Call—SLT Ring
Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a call is made from CTI, instead of the SLT.
Value Range
Enable, Disable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
591
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Feature Guide References
None
CTI Hold—Forced Idle when Hold by PDN/SDN Key
Selects whether to force an extension (e.g., KX-NT400) to become idle while having a call held on a PDN/SDN
button.
Value Range
Enable, Disable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Option 7
Incoming Call Log—Busy / Intercept (when Called Party is Busy)
Specifies whether the following types of calls are recorded in the incoming call log of the original destination.
• Calls received when the extension is busy.
• Calls rerouted via the Intercept Routing—Busy feature.
If this setting is enabled, calls are recorded as "Not Answered".
Value Range
Enable (Not Answered), Disable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Incoming Call Log
Incoming Call Log—Fwd All / Fwd Busy
Specifies whether the following types of calls are recorded in the incoming call log of the original destination.
• Calls rerouted via the FWD—All Calls feature.
592
PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-9] System Options
•
Calls rerouted via the FWD—Busy feature.
If this setting is enabled, calls are recorded as "Not Answered".
Value Range
Enable (Not Answered), Disable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Incoming Call Log
Incoming Call Log—Call Pickup
Specifies how calls answered using the Call Pickup feature are recorded in the incoming call log of the original
destination.
Value Range
Answered, Not Answered
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Incoming Call Log
PC Programming Manual
593
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed.
Extension Caller ID Modulation Type
Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Value Range
V.23(ETSI), Bell202(Bellcore)
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Channel Seizure Signal Bits
Specifies the number of seizure bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=3–40) bits
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Mark Signal Bits
Specifies the number of mark bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=3–40) bits
594
PC Programming Manual
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Channel Seizure Wait Time
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to send the seizure signal following the first ring
when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Value Range
64 ´ n (n=5–35) ms
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID Signal Type
Specifies the type of signal modulation to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT (reference
only).
Value Range
FSK
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
PC Programming Manual
595
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Additional Local Trunk Access Code to Extension Caller ID
Enables the PBX to automatically add a Trunk Access number to the received telephone number when sending
the Caller ID number of an incoming trunk call to an SLT.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Send Caller ID Date & Time to Extension
Enables the PBX to send the date and time of an incoming call when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Send Caller ID Name to Extension
Enables the PBX to send the caller’s name when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
596
PC Programming Manual
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Send Caller ID Long Distance to Extension
Enables the PBX to send a call qualifier (Long Distance) (if received from the trunk) when sending Caller ID
information to an SLT.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
FSK Transmission Level
Specifies the transmission level for FSK signal modulation.
Value Range
-14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 dB, 0 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
FSK Transmission Level (for MCSLC Card)
Specifies the transmission level for FSK signal modulation for MCSLC cards.
PC Programming Manual
597
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Value Range
-14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 dB, 0 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
598
PC Programming Manual
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed.
Paging—EPG (External Pager) (for KX-NCP series)/EPG 1 (External Pager 1) (for
KX-TDE series)
Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 1. KX-NCP series PBXs have only one External Pager
port.
Value Range
-15–15 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
Paging—EPG 2 (External Pager 2) (KX-TDE series only)
Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 2.
Value Range
-15–15 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker
Specifies the volume when paging is broadcast through the speaker of a PT.
Value Range
-15dB, -12dB, -9dB, -6dB, -3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB
PC Programming Manual
599
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Maintenance Console Location
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
MOH—MOH (Music On Hold) (for KX-NCP series)/MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1) (for
KX-TDE series)
Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 1. KX-NCP series PBXs have only one External BGM port.
Value Range
-11–11 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Feature Guide References
1.13.4 Music on Hold
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
MOH—MOH 2 (Music On Hold 2) (KX-TDE series only)
Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 2.
Value Range
-11–11 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Feature Guide References
1.13.4 Music on Hold
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
600
PC Programming Manual
4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card
4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card
Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card.
Up Gain (To PBX)
Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX.
Value Range
-15–15 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Down Gain (From PBX)
Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to the selected type of card.
Value Range
-15–15 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
601
4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card
602
PC Programming Manual
Section 5
[3] Group
PC Programming Manual
603
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of each trunk group determine the settings of the
trunks within that group. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or
96 (with the KX-TDE600) trunk groups can be programmed.
For more information on trunk groups, see "2.2.2 Group" in the Feature Guide.
Main
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
None
COS
Specifies the COS of the trunk group, applied when making a call from a trunk to another trunk with TIE Line
Service.
If you wish to prevent such calls from being made, ensure that the COS specified here has a TRS level of
"7" assigned for all relevant time modes in 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings.
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
604
PC Programming Manual
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Line Hunting Order
Specifies the trunk hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed to start
from the lowest or highest numbered trunks, or to rotate uniformly among all trunks.
Value Range
High -> Low, Low -> High, Rotation
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call can be maintained before being disconnected.
Value Range
None, 60 ´ n (n = 1–60) s
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
Specifies the length of time that an extension-to-trunk call can be maintained before being disconnected.
Value Range
None, 60 ´ n (n = 1–60) s
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
PC Programming Manual
605
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
4.18 [2-9] System Options
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
Caller ID Modification Table
Specifies the table to be used for modifying caller information (telephone number).
Value Range
1–4
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Dialling Plan Table
Specifies the table to be used for en-bloc dialling.
Value Range
1–4
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan
Feature Guide References
None
606
PC Programming Manual
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Tone Detection
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
None
DISA Tone Detection—Silence
Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by silence detection.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by continuous signal detection.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
PC Programming Manual
607
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence
Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by silence detection.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Continuous
Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by continuous signal detection.
608
PC Programming Manual
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic
Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Host PBX Access Code
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
PC Programming Manual
609
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Feature Guide References
None
Host PBX Access Code 1–10
Specifies the feature number used to access a trunk from the host PBX.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
Collect Call Reject (For Brazil)
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
None
Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Mode
Enables the PBX to automatically reject collect calls. This setting is only for users in Brazil.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
610
PC Programming Manual
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Wait Time
Selects the length of time that the PBX waits before sending a flash signal to reject a collect call. This setting
is only for users in Brazil.
Value Range
500 ms, 1000 ms, 1500 ms, 2000 ms
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Flashing Time
Selects the length of the flash signal that the PBX sends to reject a collect call. This setting is only for users in
Brazil.
Value Range
1000 ms, 1500 ms, 2000 ms, 2500 ms
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
611
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a trunk call by Idle Line Access,
the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle trunk according to the priority assigned here.
Trunk Group No. & Name
Specifies the trunk group assigned to the corresponding priority level.
Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
Trunk Group No. 1–64
For KX-TDE600:
Trunk Group No. 1–96
Maintenance Console Location
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
Programming Manual References
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
612
PC Programming Manual
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to preprogrammed
modification tables, and then recorded for calling back.
Leading Digits
After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables,
the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID
Modification Table assigned to that trunk group. If it finds such a code, it removes digits and adds a number
to the modified number. If this number is stored as a System Speed Dialling number, the caller’s name can be
shown on a PT display and the call can be routed to a certain extension (CLI destination). A maximum of 4
Caller ID Modification Tables, each containing 10 local/international call data and 1 long distance code, can
be programmed. Each trunk group can select a table for use. Select the desired table from the Modification
Table list.
If the modified number does not contain an area code programmed here, the PBX applies the Long Distance
Code settings to the modified number.
Area Code (for Local / International Call Data 1–10)
Specifies the leading number (area code) to look for in the incoming caller’s number.
Value Range
Max. 6 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Removed Number of Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be removed from the beginning of the incoming caller’s number.
Value Range
0–9
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Caller ID Modification Table
PC Programming Manual
613
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Caller ID Modification Table
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Length of Digits
The PBX adds a certain number of digits to the caller’s number depending on the length of digits, as
programmed in the Length of Digits Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group. This modification is applied
to incoming trunk calls routed through public networks when the type of network numbering plan is Unknown
or not specified.
A maximum of 4 Length of Digits Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the
Modification Table list.
If the length of digits of an incoming trunk call is less than the Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National), the
caller’s number is not modified.
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International)
Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognised as an international
call. The value specified here must be larger than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National).
Value Range
1–31
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
614
PC Programming Manual
Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Called Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National)
Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognised as a national
call. The value specified here must be smaller than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
Value Range
0–30
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Called Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Added Number (for International)
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
Value Range
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Called Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Added Number (for National)
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National) but does not exceed Minimum Caller ID Digits (for
International).
PC Programming Manual
615
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Value Range
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Called Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
CLIP
When incoming caller information is sent through an ISDN line and the type of the network numbering plan is
International, National, or Subscriber, the caller’s number can be modified as programmed in the Modification
Tables assigned to the trunk group. The modified number will then be recorded, and it is used for sending to
the network as a CLIP number.
A maximum of 4 CLIP Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the Modification
Table list.
Removed Number of Digits
Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming caller’s number for each type of network
numbering plan.
Value Range
0–9
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits for each
type of network numbering plan.
616
PC Programming Manual
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
PC Programming Manual
617
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan
The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can
recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed leading number
and contains the programmed total number of digits.
When the PBX recognises the end of dialling to an analogue trunk, the PBX cancels the muting of the caller’s
voice sent to the analogue trunk immediately. If the PBX cannot recognise the end of dialling, the PBX mutes
the caller’s voice sent to an analogue trunk from the time at which the last digit is dialled until the analogue
trunk inter-digit timer expires.
4 tables can be programmed, each with a maximum of 50 leading numbers. Select the table to programme
from the Dialling Plan Table list.
To assign a set of leading numbers automatically, click Auto Assign.
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number to be regarded as the beginning of dialling.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, N [2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9], P [0, 1], and X [0-9, *, and #])
Maintenance Console Location
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Analogue CO First Digit
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Analogue CO Inter-digit
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Dialling Plan Table
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
Removed Number of Digits
Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the number dialled by en-bloc dialling.
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
618
PC Programming Manual
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan
Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the number dialled by en-bloc dialling in the place of the removed digits.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
PC Programming Manual
619
5.5 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign
5.5 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign
It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically.
Select Auto Assigning Table
Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialling plan table. When Type D is
selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialling plan
table.
Value Range
Type A: 1:N11, 2:NXX XXXX, 3:1NXX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored
Type B: 1:N11, 2:NNX XXXX, 3:1NPX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored
Type C: 1:N11, 2:NXX XXXX, 3:1NNX XXXX, 4:1NPX NXX XXXX, 5-50: Not stored
Type D: 1-47: Not stored, 48:N11, 49:NXX XXXX, 50:1NXX NXX XXXX
Type E: 1:N11, 2:NXX NXX XXXX, 3:1NXX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored
Maintenance Console Location
5.5 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign
Programming Manual References
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan
Feature Guide References
None
620
PC Programming Manual
5.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate
5.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate
The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk group.
Trunk Group Name
Indicates the name of the trunk group (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Rate
Specifies the call charge rate.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in
Digits After Decimal Point in 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge.
Charge Options—
Value Range
0–9999999
Maintenance Console Location
5.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate
Programming Manual References
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
PC Programming Manual
621
5.7 [3-2] User Group
5.7 [3-2] User Group
Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group can
belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups and
several paging groups. A maximum of 8 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 32
(with the KX-TDE600) tenants can be programmed.
User Group Name
Specifies the name of the extension user group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.7 [3-2] User Group
Programming Manual References
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— User Group
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— User Group
Feature Guide References
2.2.2 Group
Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant to which the extension user group belongs.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–8
For KX-TDE600:
1–32
Maintenance Console Location
5.7 [3-2] User Group
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
2.2.2 Group
622
PC Programming Manual
5.7 [3-2] User Group
2.2.3 Tenant Service
PC Programming Manual
623
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension
user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 96 (with the KX-TDE600) call pickup groups can be programmed.
To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.
User Group Name
Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
2.2.2 Group
Pickup Group—1st–8th
Selects the call pickup groups that the extension user group belongs to. One extension user group can be
assigned to a maximum of 8 call pickup groups on this screen. To assign an extension user group to more
than 8 call pickup groups, click All Setting.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
None, 01–64
For KX-TDE600:
None, 01–96
Maintenance Console Location
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
624
PC Programming Manual
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
2.2.2 Group
PC Programming Manual
625
5.9 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
5.9 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension
user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups.
Call Pickup Group Name
Specifies the name of the call pickup group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.9 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
2.2.2 Group
User Group 1–32 (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 1–96
(for KX-TDE600)
Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group.
Value Range
ON (blue), OFF
Maintenance Console Location
5.9 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
2.2.2 Group
626
PC Programming Manual
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can
also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging
groups. A maximum of 32 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 96 (with the
KX-TDE600) paging groups can be programmed.
To assign external pagers to paging groups, click External Pager. To assign extension user groups to paging
groups easily, click All Setting.
User Group Name
Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group
Paging Group—1st–8th
Selects the paging groups that the extension user group belongs to. One extension user group can be assigned
to a maximum of 8 paging groups on this screen. To assign an extension user group to more than 8 paging
groups, click All Setting.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
None, 01–32
For KX-TDE600:
None, 01–96
Maintenance Console Location
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual
627
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group
628
PC Programming Manual
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. One extension user
group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.
Paging Group Name
Specifies the name of the paging group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group
User Group 1–32 (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 1–96
(for KX-TDE600)
Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group.
Value Range
ON (blue), OFF (white)
Maintenance Console Location
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group
PC Programming Manual
629
5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.
Paging Group Name
Indicates the name of the paging group (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group
External Pager 1
Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group.
Value Range
ON (blue), OFF
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group
External Pager 2 (KX-TDE series only)
Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group.
Value Range
ON (blue), OFF
630
PC Programming Manual
5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group
PC Programming Manual
631
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Group Settings
Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call
distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed. A maximum of 128 incoming call
distribution groups can be programmed.
To set the Call Forwarding (FWD) settings of ICD groups easily, click Group FWD. To assign extensions to
ICD groups and change extension settings, click Member List.
For more information on ICD Groups, see "1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY"
in the Feature Guide.
Main
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
632
PC Programming Manual
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Distribution Method
Selects the method for distributing calls to idle extensions of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Ring, UCD, Priority Hunting
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
Call Waiting Distribution
Specifies whether call waiting distribution is enabled for the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Enable, Disable
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
FWD Mode
Specifies whether extensions in FWD mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
No Ring, Ring
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
PC Programming Manual
633
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
DND Mode
Specifies whether extensions in DND mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
No Ring, Ring
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs, to determine the Time Table and
the audio source for the group. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.)
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–8
For KX-TDE600:
1–32
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Music On Hold
Feature Guide References
1.13.4 Music on Hold
2.2.3 Tenant Service
634
PC Programming Manual
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
COS
Specifies the COS of the incoming call distribution group. Depending on the COS, calls from certain extensions
are restricted as determined by the Internal Call Block feature. Also, when calls are forwarded or overflowed
to a trunk, the TRS/Barring assigned for the COS of the incoming call distribution group applies.
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
Feature Guide References
1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
CLIP on ICD Group Button
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the network when making calls using the ICD Group button.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Overflow Queuing Busy
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
PC Programming Manual
635
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Queuing Busy—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the overflow destination of calls that cannot be queued in each time mode.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature
636
PC Programming Manual
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Queuing Busy—Queue Call Capacity
Specifies the number of calls that can wait in a queue.
Value Range
None, 1–100
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Overflow No Answer
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
PC Programming Manual
637
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the overflow destination of queued calls when they are not answered or are redirected by Manual
Queue Redirection in each time mode.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature
Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Overflow Time
Specifies the length of time calls wait in a queue before they are redirected to the overflow destination.
Value Range
None, 10 ´ n (n=1–125) s
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature
638
PC Programming Manual
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Hurry-up Level
Specifies the number of calls to hold in the queue before prompting Manual Queue Redirection by flashing the
Hurry-up button.
Value Range
None, 1–30
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Queuing Time Table
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
PC Programming Manual
639
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Queuing Time Table—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the Queuing Time Table to be used in each time mode.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
None, Table 1–Table 64
For KX-TDE600:
None, Table 1–Table 128
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Queuing Time Table When Extension Ringing
Enables the PBX to play messages/BGM to the caller according to the Queuing Time Table, when the call
arrives at an extension without being queued or after being queued.
Value Range
Disable (Ringback Tone), Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
640
PC Programming Manual
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Miscellaneous
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Extension No Answer Redirection Time
Specifies the length of time that a call queues at an extension before it is redirected to the next member
extension of the incoming call distribution group, in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method.
Value Range
None, 10 ´ n (n=1–15) s
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
PC Programming Manual
641
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out
Specifies the number of consecutive unanswered calls before a member extension is automatically logged out
from the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
None, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Maximum No. of Busy Extension
Specifies the number of extensions that can accept calls simultaneously in the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max.: Call arrives at an idle extension.
1–32: Call will not arrive at an idle extension when the number of busy extensions exceeds the assigned
number.
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
642
PC Programming Manual
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Last Extension Log-out
Specifies whether the last extension logged-in to the incoming call distribution group is allowed to log out.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
VIP Call Mode
Enables VIP Call mode, to prioritise calls received from multiple incoming call distribution groups.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.5 VIP Call
Supervisor Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the incoming call distribution group’s supervisor. The supervisor can monitor
and control the status of each member of the group using a 6-line display PT. The supervisor extension need
not belong to the group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
PC Programming Manual
643
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature
Programmed Mailbox No.
Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems
(VPS) with DTMF Integration.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Group Log / Group FWD
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
644
PC Programming Manual
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Incoming Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of unanswered calls to the incoming call distribution group that can be logged in the call
log memory.
Value Range
0–100
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Incoming Call Log
Group FWD Call from CO—Setting
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
645
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Group FWD Call from CO—Destination
Specifies the forward destination of incoming trunk calls directed to the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Group FWD Call from Extension—Setting
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Group FWD Call from Extension—Destination
Specifies the forward destination of incoming intercom calls directed to the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret] and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
646
PC Programming Manual
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
PC Programming Manual
647
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Group Settings—Member List
Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 128 members (extensions) assigned to it, and
each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of
multiple incoming call distribution groups. An ICD Group can also contain cellular phones, and network ICD
groups (ICD groups at other PBXs in a network) using virtual PS (see "1.25.6 Virtual PS" in the Feature
Guide). The forward destination assigned to a virtual PS (e.g., a cellular phone) can act as a member of an
ICD group. Select the desired ICD group (1–128) from the ICD Group No. list.
To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting). To copy the members to another group, click Member list copy, select the group, and click OK.
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of each member. In addition to the extension numbers of PT, SLT, PS, and
T1-OPX extensions, floating extension numbers of PS Ring groups can also be specified.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY
648
PC Programming Manual
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Delayed Ring
Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. (Applicable when the call distribution method of the
incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.)
Value Range
Immediate, 1–6 Rings, No Ring
Maintenance Console Location
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before the member extension can accept
another call.
This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "ICD Group Member" in
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=0–300) s
Maintenance Console Location
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
PC Programming Manual
649
5.15 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
5.15 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Queuing Time Table
A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled.
A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 128 (with the
KX-TDE600) Queuing Time Tables can be programmed.
Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16
Specifies the command activated by the corresponding sequence.
Value Range
None: Redirects the call to the next sequence.
Overflow: Redirects the call to the overflow destination when there is no answer.
Disconnect: Disconnects the line.
Sequence 01–16: Redirects the call to a different sequence.
Wait 5 ´ n (n=1–16) s: If preceded by an OGM, plays the Music on Hold for the specified period of time; if not
preceded by an OGM, sends a ringback tone for the specified period of time.
OGM 01–64: Sends a certain OGM.
Maintenance Console Location
5.15 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature
1.13.4 Music on Hold
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
650
PC Programming Manual
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Miscellaneous
Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed.
Options—Call Log to ICD Group when ICD Member Answered
Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in
addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY
Options—Call Log to ICD Group when Overflow Destination Answered
Selects whether the calls to an ICD Group that are redirected and are answered by the overflow destination
are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in addition to the log of the extension that answered
the call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY
Options—ICD Group Key Mode
Selects whether ICD Group buttons at extensions operate as normal or in Enhanced Phantom button mode.
PC Programming Manual
651
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
When set to Enhanced Phantom mode, creating an ICD Group button at an extension using PT personal
programming automatically registers the extension as a member of the relevant ICD Group. The extension
user can also specify the delayed ringing settings.
Value Range
Group DN, Enhanced Phantom
Maintenance Console Location
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List—
Delayed Ring
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY
Options—Longest Idle Distribution (Activation Key Required)
Selects whether incoming calls are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order (UCD), or to the extension
that has been idle the longest (ACD).
Value Range
Disable (UCD), Enable (ACD)
Maintenance Console Location
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
Selects whether the ICD Group member wrap-up timer or extension wrap-up timer is used.
If Extension is selected here, Wrap-up Timer on 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Settings—Member List becomes unavailable. If ICD Group Member is selected, Wrap-up Timer on
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings and 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension
Settings become unavailable.
Value Range
Extension: The timer is activated after all calls to or from the extension, including a retrieved call on hold.
ICD Group Member: The timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group.
652
PC Programming Manual
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Maintenance Console Location
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Wrap-up Timer
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
PC Programming Manual
653
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the call can
be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a preprogrammed hunting type. If
there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which can
be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/
KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 128 (with the KX-TDE600) hunting groups can be programmed,
each containing up to 16 extensions.
To assign members to the group, click Member List. To assign extensions as overflow destinations easily,
click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Hunting Group Name
Specifies the name of the hunting group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
Hunting Type
Specifies the hunting type for the hunting group.
Value Range
Circular: Circulates until the call is answered or overflowed
Terminated: Terminates at the last extension
Maintenance Console Location
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
2.2.2 Group
654
PC Programming Manual
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Overflow—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the overflow destination of an unanswered call in each time mode.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
PC Programming Manual
655
5.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
5.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the Hunting
Group No. list.
To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension
No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the hunting group member.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Feature Guide References
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified in
(reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Feature Guide References
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
656
PC Programming Manual
Extension Number above
5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of the PBX.
The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group.
With the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200, 2 VM (DPT) Groups can be programmed; and
with the KX-TDE600, 8 VM (DPT) groups can be programmed.
Call Waiting on VM Group
Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DPT) group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is
not sent to any VM port.)
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Intercept to Mailbox for Call to Extension
Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VPS when a call is redirected to
the VM (DPT) group by Intercept Routing. When the VPS receives the mailbox number, the VPS answers the
call with the appropriate mailbox.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
PC Programming Manual
657
5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Overflow to Mailbox for Call to ICD Group
Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VPS when a call is redirected from
an incoming call distribution group to the VM (DPT) group by Intercept Routing. When the VPS receives the
mailbox number, the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features
Transfer Recall to Mailbox
Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the VPS in these
situations: (1) when a call is transferred to an extension by the Call Transfer without Announcement feature
using the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS, and the call is not answered within a programmed
time period; (2) when the VPS is assigned as the Transfer Recall destination of a certain extension. When the
VPS receives the mailbox number, the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
658
PC Programming Manual
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected
calls and incoming calls.
To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension
numbers and types, click Extension List View.
Floating Extension No.
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Group Name
Specifies the name of the VM (DPT) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM
(DPT) group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
PC Programming Manual
659
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Centralised VM Unit Setting
Floating Extension No. (TIE)
Specifies the floating extension number of the centralised VM (DPT) group. This floating extension number
must start with the number used to access a TIE line or the extensions of another PBX.
Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TIE Line Access
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail
Group Name
Specifies the name of the centralised VM (DPT) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that
call the VM (DPT) group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail
660
PC Programming Manual
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member
List
Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM(DPT) in DPT Type—Type of
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port will be displayed. In addition, the other information displayed
here can also be set in 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
DPT Type—Type
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
DPT Type—Type
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Guide References
2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration
VM Unit No.
Indicates the unit number of the connected VPS (reference only).
PC Programming Manual
661
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1, 2
For KX-TDE600:
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
DPT Type—Type
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
VM Port No.
Indicates the VM port number for the port (reference only).
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
DPT Type—Type
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Extension No.
Indicates the extension number assigned to the VM port (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
662
PC Programming Manual
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
DPT Type—Type
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
DPT Type—Type
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
PC Programming Manual
663
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of the
PBX. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. A maximum of 2 (with the
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 8 (with the KX-TDE600) VM (DTMF) Groups can be
programmed.
For more information on Voice Mail groups and DTMF integration, see "1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group" and
"1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration" in the Feature Guide.
VM DTMF Status Signal—Ringback Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is ringing.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Busy Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is busy.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Reorder Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the dialled number is invalid.
664
PC Programming Manual
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—DND Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is in DND mode.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Answer
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension has answered the call.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
665
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Confirm
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when a certain feature (e.g., Message Waiting)
has been successfully set or cancelled on an extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Disconnect
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the caller hangs up.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Ringback Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and
the PBX is calling another port of the VPS.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
666
PC Programming Manual
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Busy Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and
all ports of the VPS are busy.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to Extension Ringback Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to another
extension and the PBX is calling the destination extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
667
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
VM DTMF Command—Recording Message
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when a call is forwarded, intercepted, or transferred
to the VPS, so that the caller can leave a message in a certain mailbox.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Command—Listening Message
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when an extension user answers a message waiting
notification from the VPS, so that the extension user can retrieve a new message in a certain mailbox without
having to dial the mailbox number manually.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.1 Message Waiting
VM DTMF Command—Switching to AA
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from VM Service Mode to AA Service Mode.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
668
PC Programming Manual
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Command—Switching to VM
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from AA Service Mode to VM Service Mode.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Timing—DTMF Length for VM
Specifies the length of DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS.
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Timing—Inter-digit Time
Specifies the length of pause time between DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS.
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
PC Programming Manual
669
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Timing—Waiting Time before Sending Follow on ID
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the Follow on ID to the VPS after the VPS has
answered a call.
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Timing—Waiting Time before Sending VM DTMF Status Signal
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the DTMF status signal to the VPS after the
VPS has finished dialling.
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
670
PC Programming Manual
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Others—Call Waiting on VM Group
Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DTMF) group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is
not sent to any VM port.)
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Others—FWD to the VPS Sequence
Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is forwarded to the VPS, so
that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode. It is also possible to send
no DTMF signal to the VPS.
Value Range
None, Answer by Mailbox, AA
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Others—Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence
Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is intercepted to the VPS, so
that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode. It is also possible to send
no DTMF signal to the VPS.
Value Range
None, Answer by Mailbox, AA
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
PC Programming Manual
671
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Others—Mailbox for Extension
Specifies whether the mailboxes use the same numbers as the extensions and incoming call distribution
groups, or use different numbers as programmed for each extension or incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Extension Number, Programmed Mailbox Number
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Programmed Mailbox No.
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.
Feature Guide References
None
Others—Message Waiting Lamp Control
Specifies whether the PBX or VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning off the MESSAGE button
light) when an extension user answers the message waiting notification from the VPS.
Value Range
By PBX, By VM
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
672
PC Programming Manual
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected
calls and incoming calls.
To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and
types, click Extension List View.
Floating Ext. No.
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF) group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Group Name
Specifies the name of the VM (DTMF) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM
(DTMF) group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Type
Specifies the initial service mode in which the VPS answers calls.
Value Range
AA, VM
PC Programming Manual
673
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
674
PC Programming Manual
5.24 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List
5.24 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—
Member List
Select the group to programme from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list.
To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member list copy, select the group, and click OK.
Extension Number of the SLT Port Connected to VM
Specifies the extension number assigned to the SLT port that is connected to the VPS.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.24 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.24 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
PC Programming Manual
675
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group
A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension
number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be
programmed, each containing up to 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000), 128 (with the KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE200), or 512 (with the KX-TDE600) PS extensions.
To add PSs to the PS Ring Group, click Member List.
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the PS ring group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.25.2 PS Ring Group
Group Name
Specifies the name of the PS ring group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the PS ring
group when Incoming Trunk Call Information Display on this screen is set to Called Number.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.25.2 PS Ring Group
Incoming Trunk Call Information Display
Specifies the information of the incoming trunk call to be shown on the displays of the PSs that belong to the
PS ring group. If the caller’s name or called party’s name is not recognised, the telephone number will be
shown.
676
PC Programming Manual
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group
Value Range
Caller ID, Called Number
Maintenance Console Location
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.25.2 PS Ring Group
PC Programming Manual
677
5.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
5.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Each PS Ring Group can have up to 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000), 128 (with the KX-TDE100/
KX-TDE200), or 512 (with the KX-TDE600) PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the
PS Ring Group Number list.
To assign members to the PS Ring Group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member list copy, select the group, and click
OK.
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the PS assigned to the PS Ring Group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits
Maintenance Console Location
5.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.25.2 PS Ring Group
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.25.2 PS Ring Group
678
PC Programming Manual
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group
A conference group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a conference
group call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple conference groups. Up to 31 members
can be assigned to each of 8 conference groups. To assign members to a group, click Member List.
When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these
members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
Conference Group Name
Specifies the name of the conference group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Conference Group Call
Broadcast Mode
Specifies whether only the original caller can speak or up to 8 people can speak at the start of a conference
group call.
Value Range
Disable: The original caller and up to 7 participants can speak at the start of a conference group call.
Enable: Only the original caller can speak at the start of a conference group call.
Maintenance Console Location
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Conference Group Call
PC Programming Manual
679
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group
Ability to Talk
Enables extension users to use the push-to-talk feature during a conference group call, when Broadcast
Mode is set to "Enable". The push-to-talk feature allows extension users to speak during the call by pressing
any of their dial keys.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group
Programming Manual References
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group—
Broadcast Mode
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Conference Group Call
Automatic Answer w/o Extension Setting
Specifies if the extensions of the conference will automatically answer a conference group call, even if
Hands-free Answerback is not set for those extensions. This setting can be used with PTs and KX-WT125/
KX-TCA175/KX-TCA275 PSs.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group
Programming Manual References
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group—
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Conference Group Call
680
PC Programming Manual
Broadcast Mode
5.28 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List
5.28 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List
Up to 31 members can be assigned to each conference group. Select the group to programme from the
Conference Group No. list.
When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these
members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
To copy the numbers to another group, click Member list copy, select the group to copy to, and click OK.
To assign destinations for conference groups easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting).
Dial Number
Specifies the destination number of each member of the conference group.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.28 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.27 [3-10] Conference Group
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Conference Group Call
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified in
(reference only).
Dial Number above
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.28 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Conference Group Call
PC Programming Manual
681
5.28 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List
682
PC Programming Manual
Section 6
[4] Extension
PC Programming Manual
683
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For
each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned.
To search for a specific extension, enter the extension number or the extension name in the search box and
click Find Next.
To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/DND,
personal speed dialling, and flexible button settings.
To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate.
Main
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
684
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only).
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
Physical, Virtual
For KX-TDE600:
Shelf number, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual
685
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Indicates the extension port type (reference only).
Value Range
DPT: DPT port (DLC)
SLT: SLT port (SLC/MSLC/CSLC/MCSLC)
S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC)
ISDN: ISDN port (BRI/PRI)
OPX: T1-OPX port (T1)
IP-EXT: IP-Extension port (IP-EXT/V-IPEXT)
SIP: Virtual SIP Extension port (V-SIPEXT)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration
Telephone Type
Indicates the type of telephone connected to the extension port (reference only).
Value Range
DPT (15V)/DPT (40V): DPT is connected.
APT (15V): APT is connected.
DSS: DSS Console is connected.
VM: VPS is connected.
SLT: SLT is connected (or no telephone is connected to the Super Hybrid or SLT port).
ISDN-Ext: ISDN telephone is connected.
No Connection: No telephone is connected.
CS: CS is connected.
CS-M: High-density CS is connected with its master port.
CS-S1–3: High-density CS is connected with its slave port.
IP-EXT (KX-TDE series only): IP-PT belonging to the IP-EXT card is connected.
IP-PT: IP-PT belonging to the V-IPEXT card is connected.
686
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
SIP: SIP Extension is connected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
User Group
Specifies the extension user group to which the extension belongs. Extension user groups are used to compose
tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–32
For KX-TDE600:
1–96
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.2 Group
2.2.3 Tenant Service
COS
Specifies the COS of the extension.
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual
687
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Extension PIN
Specifies the PIN of the extension.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0-9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
Intercept Destination
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
688
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and
Intercept Routing–DND.
Note that Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Busy below.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Called Party is Busy
Intercept Destination—When
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy.
PC Programming Manual
689
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Intercept No Answer Time
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
690
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
None
Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each
time mode.
When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used.
Value Range
0–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Lunch, Break, Night
Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day,
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
ISDN CLIP
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
PC Programming Manual
691
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CLIP ID
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when
making a trunk call.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
CLIP on Extension/CO
Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party’s telephone.
Value Range
Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID on the Option 1 tab.
CO: Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI
Port or 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port.
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Subscriber Number
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber Number
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID
692
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
ARS Itemised Code/2nd CLIP (10 digits)
Specifies the itemised billing code or 2nd CLIP number used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made from
the extension for accounting and billing purposes.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Feature Guide References
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a
public network trunk call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
COLR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the extension on the caller’s telephone display
when answering a call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
PC Programming Manual
693
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Option 1
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
694
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Wireless XDP
Specifies the extension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established. To enable
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS must be turned off once and then turned on after assigning this setting.
When changing the port type of an extension port in DPT Type—Type on the 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port
Property - Extension Port screen, the Wireless XDP setting must be deleted first.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Ring Pattern Table
Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the extension.
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Automatic Recording
Specifies the floating extension number to use for the Automatic Recording feature to automatically record
calls for the extension. The floating extension numbers and names displayed here are specified in 5.20 [3-7-2]
VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings.
Value Range
None, Floating Extension No.
PC Programming Manual
695
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—
Floating Extension No.
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Programmed Mailbox No.
Specifies the mailbox number of the extension’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF
Integration, or specifies a mailbox number for the Automatic Recording feature.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Transfer Recall Destination
Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.12.1 Call Transfer
696
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Option 2
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions.
Value Range
Off: No notification
BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker
OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker
W-OHCA: Voice from the handset
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual
697
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
1.8.4.1 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension—SUMMARY
Automatic C. Waiting
Specifies whether to receive call waiting notifications for calls from a trunk, doorphone calls, and calls via an
incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Pickup Dial Set
Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. The number specified in Pickup Dial No. on this screen is dialled
automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.7 Hot Line
Pickup Dial No.
Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
698
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.7 Hot Line
Data Mode
Sets or cancels the protection against tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication.
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.5 Data Line Security
Option 3
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
PC Programming Manual
699
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Call Pickup Deny
Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.
Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your extension
Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your extension
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
Executive Override Deny
Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions.
Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call
Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call
700
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.8.2 Executive Busy Override
Absent Message
Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customised for
each extension.
Value Range
Max. 16 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.2 Absent Message
Charge Limit
Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the extension. When this limit is reached, the extension
cannot be used to make further trunk calls.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—
Digits After Decimal Point in 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge.
Value Range
0–9999999
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Feature Guide References
1.9.2 Budget Management
PC Programming Manual
701
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Intercom Call by Voice
Selects the method of receiving intercom calls. When Deny Voice Call is selected, the extension will always
ring when receiving calls, regardless of how the caller wants to make the call.
Value Range
Tone Call, Voice Call, Deny Voice Call
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.3 Intercom Call
Option 4
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
702
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Outgoing Preferred Line
Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call.
Value Range
No Line: No line is seized.
Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-84: A trunk programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-84) is seized. A flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing
Incoming Preferred Line
Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook.
Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will
be answered when going off-hook.
Value Range
No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call.
Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected.
PDN: The call arriving at any PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-84: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-84) is selected. A flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
PC Programming Manual
703
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming
Call Waiting Tone Type
Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension.
Value Range
CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
LCS Recording Mode
Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the extension’s mailbox when the extension
user answers a call that was being monitored.
Value Range
Stop Record, Keep Record
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
LCS Answer Mode
Specifies whether the extension’s mailbox is monitored in Hands-free or Private mode.
Value Range
Hands free: Monitor through the built-in speaker
Private: Monitor through the handset or the built-in speaker after hearing a warning tone
704
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.1 Hands-free Operation
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Option 5
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
705
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Display Language
Selects the display language of the extension telephone.
Value Range
Language1–Language5
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.20.4 Display Information
Incoming Call Display
Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the extension’s display.
Value Range
Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.20.4 Display Information
Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
706
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.20.4 Display Information
Key Pad Tone
Specifies whether key pad tones are heard when dialling.
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Automatic Answer for CO Call
Enables the extension to answer an incoming trunk call automatically after a certain number of rings without
going off-hook, when Hands-free Answerback has been set on the extension. This setting is only effective
when Forced Automatic Answer on this screen has been set to Off.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback
Option 6
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
PC Programming Manual
707
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Forced Automatic Answer
Specifies whether the extension automatically answers all incoming calls (both intercom and trunk calls) without
going off-hook, regardless of the Hands-free Answerback setting.
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
708
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Flexible Button Programming Mode
Specifies whether the extension user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch
Dialling buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number
when customising a One-touch Dialling button.
Value Range
No Limitation, One-touch Dial
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ICM Tone
Selects the ring tone for incoming calls arriving at the INTERCOM button or PDN buttons. Note that the ring
tone specified here is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension.
Value Range
KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7665)/IP-PT (except KX-NT265/
KX-NT321): 1–30
KX-DT321/KX-T7665/KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Display Lock / SVM Lock
Locks or unlocks the Incoming Call Log and Simplified Voice Message Log display (i.e., specifies whether
other extension users can see the Incoming Call Log and SVM Log information at the extension).
Value Range
Unlock, Lock
PC Programming Manual
709
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Incoming Call Log
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Paging Deny
Specifies whether paging of the extension from other extensions is enabled.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
Option 7
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
710
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Character Input Mode
Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.
Value Range
Table 1: Standard mode
Table 2: Option mode
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash Mode during CO Conversation
Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a trunk conversation.
Value Range
EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual
711
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Incoming Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the extension’s Incoming Call Log memory.
Value Range
0–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Incoming Call Log
Outgoing Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the extension that are retained in the extension’s
Outgoing Call Log memory.
Value Range
1–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
ISDN Bearer
Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending
on the extension’s telephone type as follows:
712
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PT: Speech
SLT: Audio
Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
Option 8
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual
713
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call)
Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the
moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Caller ID Sending
Enables the extension to send Caller ID information to an SLT.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID
Specifies the length of time that the ringing for a call is delayed when the call follows immediately after the
previous unanswered call. When receiving two calls in quick succession (e.g., when a call waiting in a queue
714
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
is directed to an extension immediately after the previous unanswered call stops ringing), some SLTs require
a pause, after the first call stops ringing, to receive the second call’s Caller ID information.
Value Range
0–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
SLT MW Mode (KX-TDE series only)
Enables the use of the Message Waiting Lamp on an SLT extension connected to the extension port.
Value Range
Disable, MW-Lamp
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.1 Message Waiting
Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before an extension will accept another call
when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group.
This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 5.16 [3-5-3]
Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.
Value Range
0–3000 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual
715
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Wrap-up Timer
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Option 9
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PDN Delayed Ringing
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).
716
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Built-in Communication Assistant
Specifies whether to enable or disable the Communication Assistant (CA) application for each extension. This
setting is not available when the corresponding extension is a SIP extension.
Value Range
Disable, Basic Only, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)—Port Number— Built-in Communication Assistant Server
Feature Guide References
1.32.3 CA (Communication Assistant)
FWD / DND
Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each extension can be referred. FWD and DND
settings can be programmed separately for each extension in 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND.
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual
717
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
FWD No Answer Time
Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded.
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Keep ring after FWD NA to CO
Specifies whether an extension continues to ring after forwarding an incoming call to an outside destination
via FWD N/A or FWD Busy N/A.
718
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Availability for FWD/DND Key (CO)
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
DND Availability for FWD/DND Key (CO)
Indicates the current DND status for incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
PC Programming Manual
719
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
FWD Mode for Call from CO
Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Destination for Call from CO
Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Availability for FWD/DND Key (Extension)
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
720
PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
DND Availability for FWD/DND Key (Extension)
Indicates the current DND status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
FWD Mode for Call from Extension
Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Destination for Call from Extension
Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
PC Programming Manual
721
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
722
PC Programming Manual
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together.
Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.
Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext. Number)
Specifies the extension number of the first location to be programmed.
Value Range
Wired extension number
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Location Entry—Number to Generate
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
A CLIP number will only be assigned to connected wired extensions, even if the number entered here is larger
than the total number of wired extensions.
Value Range
1–total number of connected wired extensions
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Parameter—Deleting Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the
CLIP number.
PC Programming Manual
723
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Value Range
0–5
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Parameter—Head of ID
Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Parameter—Tail of ID
Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
724
PC Programming Manual
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
PC Programming Manual
725
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed
for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
To copy the FWD/DND settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to.
Forward / DND—For external calls
Specifies the FWD/DND setting for external calls.
If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD destination field can be set.
Value Range
Always (All), Busy, No Answer, Busy / No Answer, Do Not Disturb, Off
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
Forward / DND—For internal calls
Specifies the FWD/DND setting for internal calls.
If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD destination field can be set.
If For both external calls and internal calls is checked, this setting becomes unavailable, and the value set
for external calls is applied to internal calls.
Value Range
Always (All), Busy, No Answer, Busy / No Answer, Do Not Disturb, Off
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
726
PC Programming Manual
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling
numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for each
extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
The available speed dialling numbers are shown in sets of 20. Select the desired set from the Personal Speed
Dialling No. list.
Speed Dialling Name
Specifies the name of the Personal Speed Dialling number to call using the Personal Speed Dialling Directory
shown on the extension’s display.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
Dialling Number
Specifies the number to be dialled by the Personal Speed Dialling number.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
PC Programming Manual
727
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 84 flexible
buttons can be customised for each extension. The settings can then be printed out as a key label template
and attached to your extension for quick reference. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number /
Name list.
To copy the flexible button settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to.
To print the flexible button settings of an extension or output them to a PDF file, click Key Label Print.
The key label settings related to display - Label, Colour of Font, Colour of Background, Font Size, and
Telephone Type - can be saved for future use. Select an action from the Key Label File drop-down list. Note
that it is necessary to save these settings separately from system data.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "1.20.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.
Display Option—Key Setting
Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button.
Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/DND
(Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd
(Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Call Log, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up,
Wrap-up, System Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR,
ISDN Hold, Headset, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Check In, Check Out, Cleaned Up, Two-way
Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN, SDN
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
Feature Guide References
None
Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
Specifies the trunk to be accessed.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–128
For KX-TDE600:
1–640
728
PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–64
For KX-TDE600:
1–96
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone.
Value Range
Automatic, Specific
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
729
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.13.2 Call Park
Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out
from.
Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
Selects which time modes are switched manually.
Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain extension.
Value Range
1–7
730
PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer
Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–8
For KX-TDE600:
1–32
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for SDN)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
731
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Extension Number (for DSS)
Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number (for ICD Group)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number (for Message Waiting)
Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for
which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the extension will check its own messages only.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
732
PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk
calls are forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are
forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
PC Programming Manual
733
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are
forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Extension Number (for Call Log)
Specifies the extension’s own number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group
for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the extension will display its own call log
information.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
734
PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Extension Number (for Hurry-up)
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will
be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the extension’s mailbox.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
PC Programming Manual
735
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Extension Number (for SDN)
Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to this SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
736
PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Dial (for One-touch)
Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 (with the KX-NCP500/
KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 5000 (with the KX-TDE600) One-touch Dialling buttons for
extensions and DSS Consoles.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling
Dial (for ISDN Service)
Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
PC Programming Manual
737
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol
Dial (for NDSS)
Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table can be
specified here.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
Label Name
Specifies the name of each flexible button on the KX-NT366 IP-PT. The name specified here is displayed on
the LCD for each button. A maximum of 48 flexible buttons can be customised for this extension.
Value Range
Max. 12 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366 only)
738
PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–8
For KX-TDE600:
1–32
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO,
Group CO, ICD Group, SDN)
Specifies the ring tone type.
Value Range
KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7665)/IP-PT (except KX-NT265/
KX-NT321): 1–30
KX-DT321/KX-T7665/KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with
Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.
Parameter
PC Programming Manual
739
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Value Range
0–99
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.2 Call Park
Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch
Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell
is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Display Option—Key Setting & Key Label Name
The Key Label Name function allows you to print out a key label template for flexible buttons, according to the
telephone you are using. Click a flexible button to display a Change—Flexible Button 01–84 screen and edit
the button’s settings.
Type
This parameter is equivalent to Type on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
740
PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
Type
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
This parameter is equivalent to Extension Number on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting
→ Extension Number (for DSS)
→ Extension Number (for ICD Group)
→ Extension Number (for Message Waiting)
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))
→ Extension Number (for Call Log)
→ Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
→ Extension Number (for Hurry-up)
→ Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
→ Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
→ Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
→ Extension Number (for SDN)
Feature Guide References
None
Dial
This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting
→ Dial (for One-touch)
→ Dial (for ISDN Service)
→ Dial (for NDSS)
PC Programming Manual
741
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
None
Parameter 1
This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting
→ Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
→ Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
→ Parameter Selection (for SDN)
Feature Guide References
None
Parameter 2
This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting
screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group,
SDN)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Feature Guide References
None
Mailbox Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext No. of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen.
742
PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
Two-way Transfer)
Ext No. of Mailbox (for
Feature Guide References
None
Label
Specifies the label that will be printed next to the corresponding button.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Colour of Font
Specifies the colour used for the label text for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a colour.
Value Range
Any colour
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
743
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Colour of Background
Specifies the colour used for the label background for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a
colour.
Value Range
Any colour
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Font Size
Specifies the size of the font on the label for the corresponding button.
Value Range
4–15
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Telephone Type
Telephone Type
Selects the type of telephone for which you want to print a key label template.
Value Range
T7633 / T7636
T7625 / T7630 / NT136
T7665 / NT265 / NT321
T7667 / APT
NT343 / NT346 / DT346 / DT343 / DT333
NT343 / NT346 with 60CO
Other
744
PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
745
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—
Flexible button data copy
The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different extensions.
Destination Extension Line
Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be
selected. To select all extensions at once, click Select All.
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation
cannot be performed.
Maintenance Console Location
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
None
746
PC Programming Manual
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one touch. A
maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the
Extension Number / Name list.
Type
Specifies whether to store a dialling number for the one-touch access.
Value Range
Not Stored, One Touch
Maintenance Console Location
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.20.2 Flexible Buttons
Dial
Specifies the number to be dialled.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.20.2 Flexible Buttons
PC Programming Manual
747
6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired
extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1)
Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension. This setting
is automatically set to ON when the feature is used, and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF, to
cancel data transmission.
Value Range
OFF, ON
Maintenance Console Location
6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
748
PC Programming Manual
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice
Message
The built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each extension.
This screen allows you to specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages
that can be stored for each extension.
For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see "1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)" in
the Feature Guide.
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only).
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
Physical, Virtual
For KX-TDE600:
Shelf number, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
749
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
750
PC Programming Manual
Extension Name
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Guide References
None
Simplified Voice Message
Selects which card (MPR or ESVM) to use to store and play back greetings and messages for the extension.
Each extension must be assigned to a specific card and block within the card, and can only use the assigned
card/block. If two cards are used in the PBX, you should assign a number of extensions to each card, to ensure
that the necessary resources, such as message recording space, are available for each extension.
Value Range
None, Card1(A), Card1(B), Card2(A), Card2(B)
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Maximum SVM Log
Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for
the extension.
Value Range
1–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
751
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 64 (with the
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000), 128 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), or 512 (with the KX-TDE600) PSs can
be programmed.
To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/DND
and flexible button settings.
To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate. To assign names and tenants to
extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table. See 5.7 [3-2] User Group for more details.
Main
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension No.
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Feature Guide References
None
752
PC Programming Manual
Extension Name
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Property
Indicates the property (reference only).
Value Range
Portable Station
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
User Group
Specifies the extension user group to which the PS belongs. The extension user group is used to compose
tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–32
For KX-TDE600:
1–96
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.2 Group
2.2.3 Tenant Service
COS
Specifies the COS of the PS.
Value Range
1–64
PC Programming Manual
753
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Extension PIN
Specifies the PIN of the PS.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
Intercept Destination
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
754
PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension No.
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension Name
Feature Guide References
None
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and
Intercept Routing–DND.
Note that Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Busy below.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Called Party is Busy
Intercept Destination—When
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
PC Programming Manual
755
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Intercept No Answer Time
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension No.
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
756
PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension Name
Feature Guide References
None
Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each
time mode.
When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used.
Value Range
0–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Lunch, Break, Night
Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day,
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
ISDN CLIP
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension No.
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
757
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension Name
Feature Guide References
None
CLIP ID
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when
making a trunk call.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
CLIP on Extension/CO
Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party’s telephone.
Value Range
Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID on the Option 1 tab.
CO: Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI
Port or 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port.
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
758
PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Subscriber Number
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber Number
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
ARS Itemised Code/2nd CLIP (10 digits)
Specifies the itemised billing code or 2nd CLIP number used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made
from the PS for accounting and billing purposes.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Feature Guide References
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a
public network trunk call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
PC Programming Manual
759
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
COLR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the PS on the caller’s telephone display when
answering a call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Option 1
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension No.
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
760
PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension Name
Feature Guide References
None
Ring Pattern Table
Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS.
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Automatic Recording
Specifies the floating extension number to use for the Automatic Recording feature to automatically record
calls for the PS. The floating extension numbers and names displayed here are specified in 5.20 [3-7-2]
VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings.
Value Range
None, Floating Extension No.
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—
Floating Extension No.
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
PC Programming Manual
761
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programmed Mailbox No.
Specifies the mailbox number of the PS’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration,
or specifies a mailbox number for the Automatic Recording feature.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Transfer Recall Destination
Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.12.1 Call Transfer
Option 2
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
762
PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension No.
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension Name
Feature Guide References
None
Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions.
Value Range
Off: No notification
BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Automatic C. Waiting
Specifies whether to receive call waiting notification for a call from trunk, a doorphone call or a call via an
incoming call distribution group.
PC Programming Manual
763
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Pickup Dial Set
Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. The number specified in Pickup Dial No. on this screen is dialled
automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.7 Hot Line
Pickup Dial No.
Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
764
PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.7 Hot Line
Option 3
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension No.
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension Name
Feature Guide References
None
Call Pickup Deny
Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.
Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your PS
Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your PS
PC Programming Manual
765
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
Executive Override Deny
Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions.
Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call
Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.8.2 Executive Busy Override
Absent Message
Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customised for
each PS.
Value Range
Max. 16 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.2 Absent Message
766
PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Charge Limit
Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the PS. When this limit is reached, the PS cannot be
used to make further trunk calls.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—
Digits After Decimal Point in 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge.
Value Range
0–9999999
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Feature Guide References
1.9.2 Budget Management
Option 4
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension No.
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual
767
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension Name
Feature Guide References
None
Outgoing Preferred Line
Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call.
Value Range
No Line: No line is seized.
Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-12: A trunk programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is seized. A flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing
Incoming Preferred Line
Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook.
Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will
be answered when going off-hook.
Value Range
No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call.
Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected.
PDN: The call arriving at any PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-12: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is selected. A flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
768
PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming
Call Waiting Tone Type
Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension.
Value Range
CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
LCS Recording Mode
Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the PS’s mailbox when the PS user answers
a call that was being monitored.
Value Range
Stop Record, Keep Record
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Option 5
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
PC Programming Manual
769
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension No.
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension Name
Feature Guide References
None
Display Language
Selects the display language of the PS.
Value Range
Language1–Language5
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.20.4 Display Information
770
PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Incoming Call Display
Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the PS’s display.
Value Range
Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.20.4 Display Information
Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.20.4 Display Information
Option 6
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual
771
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension No.
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension Name
Feature Guide References
None
Flexible Button Programming Mode
Specifies whether the PS user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch Dialling
buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number when
customising a One-touch Dialling button.
Value Range
No Limitation, One-touch Dial
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling
SVM Lock
Selects whether Simplified Voice Message Log information can be displayed at the extension or other
extensions.
772
PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Value Range
Lock, Unlock
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Option 7
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension No.
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension Name
PC Programming Manual
773
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
None
Character Input Mode
Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.
Value Range
Table 1: Standard mode
Table 2: Option mode
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash Mode during CO Conversation
Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a trunk conversation.
Value Range
EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Incoming Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the PS’s Incoming Call Log memory.
Value Range
0–100
774
PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Incoming Call Log
Outgoing Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the PS that are retained in the PS’s Outgoing Call Log
memory.
Value Range
1–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
ISDN Bearer
Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending
on the type of the PS.
Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
PC Programming Manual
775
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Option 8
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension No.
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension Name
Feature Guide References
None
Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call)
Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the
moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
776
PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before a PS will accept another call when
logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group.
This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 5.16 [3-5-3]
Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.
Value Range
0–3000 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Wrap-up Timer
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Option 9
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension No.
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
777
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension Name
Feature Guide References
None
PDN Delayed Ringing
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Built-in Communication Assistant
Specifies whether to enable or disable the Communication Assistant (CA) application for each extension.
Value Range
Disable, Basic Only, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
778
PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)—Port Number— Built-in Communication Assistant Server
Feature Guide References
1.32.3 CA (Communication Assistant)
FWD / DND Reference
Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred. FWD and DND settings
can be programmed separately for each PS in 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND.
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension No.
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—
Extension Name
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
779
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
FWD No Answer Time
Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded.
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Keep ring after FWD NA to CO
Specifies whether a PS continues to ring after forwarding an incoming call to an outside destination via FWD
N/A or FWD Busy N/A.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Availability for FWD/DND Key (CO)
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
780
PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
DND Availability for FWD/DND Key (CO)
Indicates the current DND status for incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
FWD Mode for Call from CO
Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Destination for Call from CO
Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
PC Programming Manual
781
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Availability for FWD/DND Key (Extension)
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
DND Availability for FWD/DND Key (Extension)
Indicates the current DND status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
782
PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
FWD Mode for Call from Extension
Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Destination for Call from Extension
Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
PC Programming Manual
783
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—
CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together.
Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.
Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext. Number)
Specifies the extension number of the first location to be programmed.
Value Range
PS extension number
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Location Entry—Number to Generate
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
A CLIP number will only be assigned to registered PS extensions, even if the number entered here is larger
than the total number of PS extensions.
Value Range
1–total number of connected wired extensions
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Parameter—Deleting Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the
CLIP number.
784
PC Programming Manual
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Value Range
0–4
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Parameter—Head of ID
Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Parameter—Tail of ID
Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual
785
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
786
PC Programming Manual
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for
incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list.
To copy FWD/DND values from one location to another, click Copy to.
Forward / DND—For external calls
Specifies the FWD/DND setting for external calls.
If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD destination field can be set.
Value Range
Always (All), Busy, No Answer, Busy / No Answer, Do Not Disturb, Off
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
Forward / DND—For internal calls
Specifies the FWD/DND setting for internal calls.
If Always (All), Busy, No Answer, or Busy / No Answer is selected, the FWD destination field can be set.
If For both external calls and internal calls is checked, this setting becomes unavailable, and the value set
for external calls is applied to internal calls.
Value Range
Always (All), Busy, No Answer, Busy / No Answer, Do Not Disturb, Off
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
PC Programming Manual
787
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 12 flexible
buttons can be customised for each PS. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list.
To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "1.20.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.
Display Option—Key Setting
Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button.
Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/DND
(Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd
(Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up, Time
Service, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR, ISDN Hold, Time Service - Automatic/Manual,
Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN, SDN
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
Feature Guide References
None
Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
Specifies the trunk to be accessed.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–128
For KX-TDE600:
1–640
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
788
PC Programming Manual
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–64
For KX-TDE600:
1–96
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically, or in a specific parking zone.
Value Range
Automatic, Specific
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.2 Call Park
Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to are logged in to or logged out from.
Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
PC Programming Manual
789
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
Selects which time modes are switched manually.
Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain PS.
Value Range
1–7
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
790
PC Programming Manual
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer
Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–8
For KX-TDE600:
1–32
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for SDN)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
The value specified here is only used when System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD on
4.18 [2-9] System Options is set to "Enable".
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—
System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Extension Number (for DSS)
Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
PC Programming Manual
791
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number (for ICD Group)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number (for Message Waiting)
Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for
which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the PS will check its own messages only.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
792
PC Programming Manual
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk
calls are forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are
forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are
forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
PC Programming Manual
793
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number (for Hurry-up)
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will
be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the PS’s mailbox.
794
PC Programming Manual
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
795
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Extension Number (for SDN)
Specifies the floating extension number of the corresponding (owner) extension for the SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Dial (for One-touch)
Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 500 (with the KX-NCP500/
KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 1000 (with the KX-TDE600) One-touch Dialling buttons for PSs.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
796
PC Programming Manual
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling
Dial (for ISDN Service)
Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol
Dial (for NDSS)
Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table can be
specified here.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
PC Programming Manual
797
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–8
For KX-TDE600:
1–32
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with
Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.
Parameter
Value Range
0–99
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.2 Call Park
Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch
Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell
is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
798
PC Programming Manual
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Display Option—Key Setting & Key Label Name
Type
This parameter is equivalent to Type on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
Type
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
This parameter is equivalent to Extension Number on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting
→ Extension Number (for DSS)
→ Extension Number (for ICD Group)
→ Extension Number (for Message Waiting)
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))
→ Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
→ Extension Number (for Hurry-up)
→ Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
→ Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
→ Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
→ Extension Number (for SDN)
PC Programming Manual
799
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
None
Dial
This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting
→ Dial (for One-touch)
→ Dial (for ISDN Service)
→ Dial (for NDSS)
Feature Guide References
None
Parameter 1
This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting
→ Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
→ Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
→ Parameter Selection (for SDN)
Feature Guide References
None
Parameter 2
This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting
screen.
800
PC Programming Manual
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting
→ Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
→ Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Feature Guide References
None
Mailbox Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext No. of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
Two-way Transfer)
Ext No. of Mailbox (for
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
801
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—
Flexible button data copy
The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs.
Destination Extension Line
Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To
select all PSs at once, click Select All.
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation
cannot be performed.
Maintenance Console Location
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
None
802
PC Programming Manual
6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired
extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1)
Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension. This setting
is automatically set to ON when the feature is used, and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF, to
cancel data transmission.
Value Range
OFF, ON
Maintenance Console Location
6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
Programming Manual References
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
PC Programming Manual
803
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice
Message
The built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each PS.
This screen allows you to specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages
that can be stored for each extension.
For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see "1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)" in
the Feature Guide.
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
3.61 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—
Extension Name
Feature Guide References
None
Simplified Voice Message
Selects which card (MPR or ESVM) to use to store and play back greetings and messages for the extension.
804
PC Programming Manual
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Each extension must be assigned to a specific card and block within the card, and can only use the assigned
card/block. If two cards are used in the PBX, you should assign a number of extensions to each card, to ensure
that the necessary resources, such as message recording space, are available for each extension.
Value Range
None, Card1(A), Card1(B), Card2(A), Card2(B)
Maintenance Console Location
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Maximum of SVM Log
Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for
the extension.
Value Range
1–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
PC Programming Manual
805
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT. A maximum of 8 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 64 (with the KX-TDE600) DSS Consoles can be programmed. The DPT Type
—Type of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port
Property - Extension Port.
Each flexible DSS button can be customised to access a certain feature. A maximum of 66 flexible DSS buttons
can be customised for each DSS Console. The settings can then be printed out as a key label template and
attached to your DSS Console for quick reference. Select the desired DSS Console from the DSS Console
No. list.
To copy DSS Console setting values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
To print the flexible DSS button settings or output them to a PDF file, click Key Label Print.
The key label settings related to display - Label, Colour of Font, Colour of Background, Font Size, and DSS
Type - can be saved for future use. Select an action from the Key Label File drop-down list. Note that it is
necessary to save these settings separately from system data.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "1.20.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.
Pair Extension
Specifies the extension number of the PT to be used in pair with the DSS Console.
Note that if one or more SDN buttons have been set at the DSS Console, they must be deleted before this
setting can be changed.
Value Range
None, Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Display Option—Key Setting
Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible DSS button.
Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/DND
(Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd
(Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Call Log, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up,
Wrap-up, System Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR,
ISDN Hold, Headset, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Check In, Check Out, Cleaned Up, Two-way
Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, SDN
806
PC Programming Manual
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy
Feature Guide References
1.20.2 Flexible Buttons
Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
Specifies the trunk to be accessed.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–128
For KX-TDE600:
1–640
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–64
For KX-TDE600:
1–96
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
PC Programming Manual
807
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone.
Value Range
Automatic, Specific
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.2 Call Park
Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to are logged in to or logged
out from.
Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
Selects which time modes are switched manually.
808
PC Programming Manual
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain extension.
Value Range
1–7
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer
Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–8
For KX-TDE600:
1–32
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
PC Programming Manual
809
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for SDN)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Extension Number (for DSS)
Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number (for ICD Group)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
810
PC Programming Manual
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number (for Message Waiting)
Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for
which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the paired extension will check its own messages only.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk
calls are forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
PC Programming Manual
811
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are
forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are
forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Extension Number (for Call Log)
Specifies the paired extension’s number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group
for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the paired extension will display its own call
log information.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
812
PC Programming Manual
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number (for Hurry-up)
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will
be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the paired extension’s mailbox.
PC Programming Manual
813
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
814
PC Programming Manual
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Extension Number (for SDN)
Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to the SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Dial (for One-touch)
Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 (with the KX-NCP500/
KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 5000 (with the KX-TDE600) One-touch Dialling buttons for
extensions and DSS Consoles.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
PC Programming Manual
815
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling
Dial (for ISDN Service)
Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol
Dial (for NDSS)
Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table can be
specified here.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
816
PC Programming Manual
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–8
For KX-TDE600:
1–32
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO,
Group CO, ICD Group, SDN)
Specifies the ring tone type.
Value Range
KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7665)/IP-PT (except KX-NT265/
KX-NT321): 1–30
KX-DT321/KX-T7665/KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with
Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.
Parameter
PC Programming Manual
817
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Value Range
0–99
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.2 Call Park
Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch
Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell
is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Display Option—Key Setting & Key Label Name
The Key Label Name function allows you to print out a key label template for flexible DSS buttons, according
to the DSS Console you are using. Click a flexible button to display a Change—Flexible Button 01–66 screen
and edit the button’s settings.
Type
This parameter is equivalent to Type on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
818
PC Programming Manual
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting—
Type
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
This parameter is equivalent to Extension Number on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting
→ Extension Number (for DSS)
→ Extension Number (for ICD Group)
→ Extension Number (for Message Waiting)
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))
→ Extension Number (for Call Log)
→ Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
→ Extension Number (for Hurry-up)
→ Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
→ Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
→ Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
→ Extension Number (for SDN)
Feature Guide References
None
Dial
This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting
→ Dial (for One-touch)
→ Dial (for ISDN Service)
→ Dial (for NDSS)
PC Programming Manual
819
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Feature Guide References
None
Parameter 1
This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting
→ Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
→ Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
→ Parameter Selection (for SDN)
Feature Guide References
None
Parameter 2
This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting
screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group,
SDN)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Feature Guide References
None
Mailbox Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext No. of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen.
820
PC Programming Manual
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting—
Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
Feature Guide References
None
Label
Specifies the label that will be printed next to the corresponding button.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Colour of Font
Specifies the colour used for the label text for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a colour.
Value Range
Any colour
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
821
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Colour of Background
Specifies the colour used for the label background for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a
colour.
Value Range
Any colour
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Font Size
Specifies the size of the font on the label for the corresponding button.
Value Range
4–15
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DSS Type
DSS Type
Selects the type of DSS Console for which you want to print a key label template.
Value Range
T7640, DT390, Other
Maintenance Console Location
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
822
PC Programming Manual
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
823
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy
The flexible DSS button settings (including key label settings) of a DSS Console can be copied to different
DSS Consoles. Select the DSS Console that has the setting to copy to other DSS Consoles from the DSS
Console No./ Pair Extension list, then click Copy to.
Destination DSS Console
Select the number of the DSS Console and paired extension. Multiple DSS Consoles can be selected. To
select all DSS Consoles at once, click Select All.
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation
cannot be performed.
Maintenance Console Location
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy
Programming Manual References
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Feature Guide References
None
824
PC Programming Manual
Section 7
[5] Optional Device
PC Programming Manual
825
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed.
To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).
Physical Location—Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf to which the doorphone is connected (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
Physical Location—Slot
Indicates the slot to which the doorphone is connected (reference only).
Value Range
Slot and sub-slot number
Maintenance Console Location
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
Physical Location—Port
Indicates the port number to which the doorphone is connected (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
826
PC Programming Manual
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Maintenance Console Location
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
Name
Specifies the doorphone name.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the destination number of doorphone calls for each port in each time mode.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Programming Manual References
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
Feature Guide References
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
PC Programming Manual
827
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number for the doorphone port in order to apply the Time Table (day/lunch/break/night).
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–8
For KX-TDE600:
1–32
Maintenance Console Location
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Programming Manual References
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
Feature Guide References
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
2.2.3 Tenant Service
COS
Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are
able to make trunk calls, and sets restrictions on intercom calls from certain extensions (Internal Call Block).
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—
4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Guide References
1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
VM Trunk Group Number
Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the doorphone call destination is the floating
extension number of a VM (DPT) group.
The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.
828
PC Programming Manual
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Value Range
1–48
Maintenance Console Location
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
PC Programming Manual
829
7.2 [5-2] External Pager
7.2 [5-2] External Pager
Settings for external pagers (external speakers) can be specified.
Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 2.5.8 Tool—
Extension List View).
Note
For KX-NCP series PBXs, only one pager is supported.
Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the external pager.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
7.2 [5-2] External Pager
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Name
Specifies the name of the external pager.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
7.2 [5-2] External Pager
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Paging
1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
830
PC Programming Manual
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller
were using an SLT extension of the PBX.
For more information on DISA, see "1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)" in the Feature Guide.
Option 1
DISA Security—DISA Security Mode
Selects the DISA security mode to prevent unauthorised access to the PBX. In Trunk or All Security mode, the
caller is required to override security by Walking COS or Verification Code Entry in order to enable the restricted
feature temporarily.
Value Range
None: Intercom calls, TIE line calls, and trunk calls can be made.
Trunk: Intercom calls and TIE line calls without PBX code can be made. TIE line calls with PBX code and trunk
calls are restricted.
All: All calls are restricted.
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.5 Walking COS
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
DISA Security—Remote Walking COS through DISA without PIN (Activation Key
Required)
Enables registered caller ID numbers to be automatically recognised as PBX extensions when calling through
DISA, and to use the Walking COS features without entering a PIN.
Value Range
Disable, Enable (Get DISA)
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
831
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Feature Guide References
None
DISA Intercept—Intercept when destination through DISA sets DND
Selects how DISA calls are handled if the destination sets DND, and disables Idle Extension Hunting.
Value Range
Busy Tone, Enable, Busy Message
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DISA Intercept—Intercept when all DISA ports are busy
Selects how DISA calls are handled if all DISA ports are currently in use.
Value Range
to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Busy Tone)
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DISA Intercept—Intercept when No Dial after DISA answers
Selects how DISA calls are handled if the caller does not select any option from the menu.
Value Range
to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Reorder Tone)
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
832
PC Programming Manual
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO
Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-public trunk call using DISA
is established. To enable this setting, " CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO" on this screen
should be set to "Enable".
Setting this to "Disable" will free up DISA ports faster, but prevent DISA being used to detect the end of a call
and disconnect the trunk quickly.
Value Range
Disable (Release DISA): The DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-public trunk call using
DISA is established.
Enable: DISA stays connected for the duration of the call, to allow detection of the end of the call.
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1—
CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO
Feature Guide References
None
CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private Network
Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-private trunk call using DISA
is established.
To enable this setting, " CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network" on this screen should be
set to "Enable".
Setting this to "Disable" will free up DISA ports faster, but prevent DISA being used to detect the end of a call
and disconnect the trunk quickly.
Value Range
Disable (Release DISA): The DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-private trunk call
using DISA is established.
Enable: DISA stays connected for the duration of the call, to allow detection of the end of the call.
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
PC Programming Manual
833
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1—
CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network
Feature Guide References
None
CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO
Enables trunk-to-public trunk calls to be established using DISA.
Value Range
Disable: Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established without using DISA.
Enable (Get DISA): Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established using DISA, and DISA can be used to detect
the end of the call.
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1—
CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO
Feature Guide References
None
CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network
Enables trunk-to-private trunk calls to be established using DISA.
Value Range
Disable: Trunk-to-private trunk calls are established without using DISA.
Enable (Get DISA): Trunk-to-private trunk calls are established using DISA, and DISA can be used to detect
the end of the call.
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1—
Feature Guide References
None
834
PC Programming Manual
CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private Network
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
CO-CO with DISA—Transfer by DTMF "#" (Activation Key Required)
Specifies whether an outside party such as a cellular phone can transfer a trunk call to an extension within the
PBX by dialling "#" + extension number.
Value Range
Disable: "#" is ignored if dialled.
Enable (as "Flash"): The current trunk call will be placed on hold, then transferred to the extension whose
number is entered.
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CO-CO with DISA—Return to DISA Top Menu by DTMF "*"
Enables a trunk caller to return to the DISA top menu by pressing " " while hearing a ringback, reorder, or
busy tone. If disabled, retrying the call is possible by pressing " ".
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Option 2
DISA Cyclic Tone Detection
Selects the cyclic tone detection mode. Cyclic tone detection is used to determine the end of a call for a DISA
trunk-to-trunk conversation established through an analogue trunk.
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the OPB3 card to "OUS", then "INS".
PC Programming Manual
835
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Value Range
Fixed: The number of times of a tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) that the PBX receives is fixed to
4 times in the ranges of:
A
C
B
C
D
C
D
D
, = 100–1300 ms, =
90 ms, =
90 ms
Option: The tone pattern that the PBX receives is optional as specified in DISA Cyclic Tone Option on this
screen.
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Guide References
None
DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Tone On Maximum Time
Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX. When the tone sent from
the telephone company is shorter than the value set here, the PBX recognises it as a tone-on.
Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the OPB3 card to "OUS", then "INS".
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=11–400) ms
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Guide References
None
836
PC Programming Manual
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Tone Off Maximum Time
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a cyclic tone to be sent from the telephone company before
recognising it as a tone-off. When no tone is detected within the time set here, the PBX recognises it as a
tone-off.
Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the OPB3 card to "OUS", then "INS"
Value Range
10 ´ n (n=11–400) ms
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Guide References
None
DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Repeating Times of ON/OFF for Detection
Specifies the number of times the tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) must be received to establish
reception of the cyclic tone. This determines the end of call.
Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".
Value Range
3–16
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Timed Reminder Message—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the prerecorded message to play when a Timed Reminder call is answered in each time mode.
Value Range
None, 1–64
PC Programming Manual
837
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.28.4 Timed Reminder
Recording Mode
Specifies the sound quality of messages recorded on the ESVM card when using it as an MSG card. Increasing
the recording quality reduces the total length of recording time available on the card.
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the OPB3 card to "OUS", then "INS".
Value Range
Low: About 120 minutes of messages can be recorded per card.
Middle: About 60 minutes of messages can be recorded per card.
High: About 20 minutes of messages can be recorded per card.
Maintenance Console Location
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
838
PC Programming Manual
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 64 OGMs can be programmed.
To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 2.5.8 Tool—
Extension List View). To assign AA destinations easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting).
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the OGM.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Name
Specifies the name of the OGM.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
1 Digit AA Destination (Extension Number)—Dial 0–9
Specifies the destination for each DISA Automated Attendant (AA) number. After listening to an OGM, the
caller can be directed to the destination by dialling a 1-digit DISA AA number.
PC Programming Manual
839
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Busy / DND Message No.
Selects the OGM to be played for the caller when the destination party is busy or sets DND.
Value Range
None, 1–64
Maintenance Console Location
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Fax Extension
Specifies the extension number to which to transfer a call when a fax signal is detected.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Programming Manual References
None
840
PC Programming Manual
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.8 Automatic Fax Transfer
PC Programming Manual
841
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Settings related to Built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be specified. This feature can be accessed
via the MPR card or ESVM card.
SVM Card No.1, 2—Slot Number
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
SVM Card No.1, 2—Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number used to access the SVM feature.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
SVM Card No.1, 2—Card Name
Specifies the name of the card, for programming reference.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
842
PC Programming Manual
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Recording Mode
Specifies the sound quality of messages recorded by the SVM feature. Increasing the recording quality reduces
the total length of recording time available with this feature.
Value Range
Low: About 120 minutes of messages can be recorded.
Middle: About 60 minutes of messages can be recorded.
High: About 40 minutes (MPR)/20 minutes (ESVM) of messages can be recorded.
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Remote Access
Selects whether the Walking COS feature can be used while listening to a greeting message from the SVM
feature. Using Walking COS, a user can access his or her message box remotely.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
PC Programming Manual
843
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
SVM Cyclic Tone Detection
Selects the cyclic tone detection mode. Cyclic tone detection is used to determine the end of a call when an
extension user records a greeting message or callers leave voice messages in a message box.
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the MPR card or OPB3 card to "OUS", then "INS". See 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card
Property or 3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property.
Value Range
Fixed: The number of times of a tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) that the PBX receives is fixed to
4 times in the ranges of:
A
C
B
C
D
C
D
D
, = 100–1300 ms, =
90 ms, =
90 ms
Option: The tone pattern that the PBX receives is optional as specified in SVM Cyclic Tone Option on this
screen.
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone On Maximum Time
Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX. When the tone sent from
the telephone company is shorter than the value set here, the PBX recognises it as a tone-on.
Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the MPR card or OPB3 card to "OUS", then "INS". See 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card
Property or 3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property.
Value Range
20 ´ n (n=6–200) ms
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
844
PC Programming Manual
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone Off Maximum Time
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a cyclic tone to be sent from the telephone company before
recognising it as a tone-off. When no tone is detected within the time set here, the PBX recognises it as a
tone-off.
Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the MPR card or OPB3 card to "OUS", then "INS". See 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card
Property or 3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property.
Value Range
20 ´ n (n=6–200) ms
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Repeating Times of ON/OFF for Detection
Specifies the number of times the tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) must be received to establish
reception of the cyclic tone. This determines the end of call.
Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option".
Value Range
3–16
Maintenance Console Location
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
845
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Feature Guide References
1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
846
PC Programming Manual
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Settings related to external relays can be programmed.
External Relay No.
Indicates the number of the external relay (reference only).
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–16
For KX-TDE600:
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.10 External Relay Control
Physical Location—Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.10 External Relay Control
Physical Location—Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
PC Programming Manual
847
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Value Range
Slot and sub-slot number
Maintenance Console Location
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.10 External Relay Control
Physical Location—Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.10 External Relay Control
Name
Specifies the relay name.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Programming Manual References
None
848
PC Programming Manual
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Feature Guide References
1.17.10 External Relay Control
Relay Activate Time
Specifies the length of time that the relay stays on when activated.
Value Range
1–7 s
Maintenance Console Location
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.10 External Relay Control
COS Number
Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the extensions that are able to
activate relays.
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions—
External Relay Access
Feature Guide References
1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
1.17.10 External Relay Control
PC Programming Manual
849
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Settings related to external sensors can be programmed.
To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).
External Sensor No.
Indicates the number of the external sensor (reference only).
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–16
For KX-TDE600:
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.9 External Sensor
Physical Location—Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.9 External Sensor
Physical Location—Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
850
PC Programming Manual
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Value Range
Slot and sub-slot number
Maintenance Console Location
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.9 External Sensor
Physical Location—Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.9 External Sensor
Name
Specifies the sensor name.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
851
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Feature Guide References
1.17.9 External Sensor
Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the destination number of sensor calls for each port in each time mode.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.9 External Sensor
Tenant No.
Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs, to determine the Time Table for the sensor. (The tenant
number corresponds to the Time Table number.)
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–8
For KX-TDE600:
1–32
Maintenance Console Location
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Programming Manual References
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
Feature Guide References
1.17.9 External Sensor
2.2.3 Tenant Service
852
PC Programming Manual
Section 8
[6] Feature
PC Programming Manual
853
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
The System Speed Dialling Table is used to store frequently dialled numbers as well as callers who should be
automatically routed to certain extensions when they call (Calling Line Identification [CLI] distribution). The
System Speed Dialling Table is available for all extension users when making or receiving a call.
A maximum of 1000 System Speed Dialling numbers (e.g., telephone numbers, feature numbers) can be
programmed with other related parameters. 100 numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of
numbers, click the applicable tab.
Memory
Selects the System Speed Dialling Table to be programmed. Whether a tenant uses the basic System Speed
Dialling Table or the additional table depends on the setting of System Speed Dial in 8.6 [6-6] Tenant.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
Basic Memory: the standard table
Expansion for Tenant 1–8: additional tables
For KX-TDE600:
Basic Memory: the standard table
Expansion for Tenant 1–32: additional tables
Maintenance Console Location
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Programming Manual References
8.6 [6-6] Tenant—
System Speed Dial
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
1.18.1 Caller ID
2.2.3 Tenant Service
Name
Specifies a name for the System Speed Dialling number.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Programming Manual References
None
854
PC Programming Manual
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
1.18.1 Caller ID
CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
Specifies the telephone number (including the Trunk Access number) or feature number assigned to the
System Speed Dialling number.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
1.18.1 Caller ID
CLI Destination
Specifies the CLI destination (extension) to which incoming calls from the programmed telephone number are
routed. If a Caller ID Modification Table is being used, the modified number must match the telephone number
above (CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number) in order for the call to be routed correctly.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Programming Manual References
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—CLI for DIL— CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table— CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution
1.18.1 Caller ID
PC Programming Manual
855
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set.
Main
Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4
Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators.
Value Range
100–699
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.27.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY
1.27.2 Room Status Control
SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Room Status Control
Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR.
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
13.1 [11-1] Main
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
1.27.2 Room Status Control
SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR.
Value Range
No Print, Print
856
PC Programming Manual
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
13.1 [11-1] Main
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
1.28.4 Timed Reminder
SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
Specifies the text of the message output on SMDR when this Printing Message is selected from an extension.
The "%" character can be used in a message, and requires a number to be entered in its place when the
message is selected from an extension. This character can be used a maximum of seven times in a Printing
Message.
Value Range
Max. 16 characters
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
13.1 [11-1] Main
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
1.26.2 Printing Message
Bill
Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest
Activates call billing features for the PBX.
Value Range
OFF, ON
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR
(for KX-TDE600)
PC Programming Manual
857
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Feature Guide References
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone"
Specifies the name of charge item 1 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering
room charges.
Value Range
Max. 12 characters
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
Checkout Billing—LCD for "Minibar"
Specifies the name of charge item 2 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering
room charges.
Value Range
Max. 12 characters
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
Checkout Billing—LCD for "Others"
Specifies the name of charge item 3 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering
room charges.
Value Range
Max. 12 characters
858
PC Programming Manual
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Telephone"
Specifies the name of charge item 1 as printed on the guest bill.
Value Range
Max. 12 characters
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Minibar"
Specifies the name of charge item 2 as printed on the guest bill.
Value Range
Max. 12 characters
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
PC Programming Manual
859
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Others"
Specifies the name of charge item 3 as printed on the guest bill.
Value Range
Max. 12 characters
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
SMDR for External Hotel Application—Language for Bill (SMDR)
Specifies the language used for standard items shown on guest bills printed out using the Call Billing feature.
Value Range
Language 1–Language 5
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
SMDR for External Hotel Application—Header 1–3
Specifies the text printed at the top of the guest bill.
Value Range
Max. 80 characters
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
None
860
PC Programming Manual
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Feature Guide References
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
SMDR for External Hotel Application—Footer 1–3
Specifies the text printed at the bottom of the guest bill.
Value Range
Max. 80 characters
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
Charge
Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
Specifies the percentage margin to be added to telephone charges displayed on the guest bill.
Value Range
0.00–99.99 %
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)
Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest telephone charges.
Value Range
0.00–99.99 %
PC Programming Manual
861
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Minibar" (%)
Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 2.
Value Range
0.00–99.99 %
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Others" (%)
Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 3.
Value Range
0.00–99.99 %
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
862
PC Programming Manual
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point
Specifies the number of digits to display after the decimal point for the currency in use.
Value Range
0–6
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Budget Management
Feature Guide References
1.20.4 Display Information
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
Charge Options—Currency
Specifies the currency characters shown on the display of the extension and the SMDR.
Value Range
Max. 3 characters
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Budget Management
Feature Guide References
1.20.4 Display Information
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
Charge Options—Currency Display Position
Specifies whether the currency characters are displayed before or after the call charge.
Value Range
Head, Tail
PC Programming Manual
863
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Budget Management
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit
Selects what happens when the amount of the call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit during a
conversation.
Value Range
Alarm: Only a warning tone is heard.
Alarm + Disconnect: A warning tone is heard, and then the call is disconnected.
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
Feature Guide References
1.9.2 Budget Management
Charge Options—Meter Start on Answer Detection
Enables the PBX to start counting the call charge when the answer signal from the telephone company is
detected.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit
864
PC Programming Manual
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
PC Programming Manual
865
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension in use
to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes.
A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 codes are
displayed at a time. To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Verification Code
Specifies the verification code.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
User Name
Specifies the user name assigned to the verification code.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
Verification Code PIN
Specifies the PIN to be entered when making a trunk call with the verification code.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
866
PC Programming Manual
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
COS Number
Specifies the COS that applies when making a trunk call with the verification code.
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Guide References
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Itemised Billing Code for ARS
Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made with a verification code
for accounting and billing purposes.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
PC Programming Manual
867
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
Programming Manual References
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Budget Management
Specifies the limit of the call charge that will be counted on the verification code.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in
Digits After Decimal Point in 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge.
Value Range
0–9999999
Maintenance Console Location
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.2 Budget Management
868
PC Programming Manual
Charge Options—
8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone
8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone
A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and
the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a
preprogrammed number of pauses are inserted after the code.
A maximum of 100 Second Dial Tone Waiting codes can be programmed. 20 codes are displayed at a time.
To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Second Dial Tone Waiting Code
Specifies the Second Dial Tone Waiting code.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
Pause Repeating Counter
Specifies the number of pauses to be inserted when waiting for the second dial tone.
Value Range
0–20
Maintenance Console Location
8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
PC Programming Manual
869
8.5 [6-5] Absent Message
8.5 [6-5] Absent Message
When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing
the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user can
select one of them.
Absent Message
Specifies the message for display.
Value Range
Max. 16 characters
Maintenance Console Location
8.5 [6-5] Absent Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.2 Absent Message
870
PC Programming Manual
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
A maximum of 8 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 32 (with the KX-TDE600)
tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user groups. The PBX offers each
tenant its own Time Table and system resources.
To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).
Music On Hold
Specifies the audio source to be used for Music on Hold.
Value Range
For KX-NCP series:
Same as System Setting, BGM, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, BGM5, BGM6, BGM7, Tone
For KX-TDE series:
Same as System Setting, BGM, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, BGM5, BGM6, BGM7, BGM8, Tone
Maintenance Console Location
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Feature Guide References
1.13.4 Music on Hold
2.2.3 Tenant Service
Operator (Extension Number)
Specifies the extension number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be
designated as the tenant operator. When this parameter is left unspecified, the PBX operator serves as the
tenant operator.
Value Range
100–699
Maintenance Console Location
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Feature Guide References
2.2.3 Tenant Service
PC Programming Manual
871
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
2.2.5 Operator Features
ARS Mode
Specifies the ARS mode used when making a trunk call.
Value Range
Off: ARS is disabled.
On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line Access
method.
On for Any CO Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Trunk Access
method.
Same as System Setting: The setting specified in ARS Mode in 10.1 [8-1] System Setting is applied.
Maintenance Console Location
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
Programming Manual References
10.1 [8-1] System Setting
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
2.2.3 Tenant Service
System Speed Dial
Specifies which system speed dialling table is used by the tenant.
Value Range
Same as System Setting: PBX common system speed dialling numbers are used.
Tenant Exclusive: Individual tenant system speed dialling numbers are used.
Maintenance Console Location
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
Programming Manual References
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
2.2.3 Tenant Service
872
PC Programming Manual
Section 9
[7] TRS
PC Programming Manual
873
9.1 [7-1] Denied Code
9.1 [7-1] Denied Code
Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time
mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the
maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are
allowed). TRS/Barring levels 2–6 are used to restrict calls according to the combination of Denied Code
Tables here and Exception Code Tables in 9.2 [7-2] Exception Code. If the leading digits of the dialled
number are not found in the applicable Denied Code Tables, the call is made.
A maximum of 100 denied codes can be programmed for each level. 20 codes are displayed at a time. To
display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Denied Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6
Specifies the leading digits of toll restricted numbers for each level.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0-9, *, #, and X)
Maintenance Console Location
9.1 [7-1] Denied Code
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—
9.2 [7-2] Exception Code
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
874
PC Programming Manual
TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
9.2 [7-2] Exception Code
9.2 [7-2] Exception Code
Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time
mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the
maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are
allowed). TRS/Barring levels 2–6 are used to restrict calls according to the combination of Denied Code
Tables in 9.1 [7-1] Denied Code and Exception Code Tables here. A call denied by the applicable Denied
Code Tables is checked against the applicable Exception Code Tables, and if a match is found, the call is
made.
A maximum of 100 exception codes can be programmed for each level. 20 codes are displayed at a time. To
display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Exception Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6
Specifies the leading digits of the numbers to be exempted from toll restriction/call barring for each level.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0-9, *, #, and X)
Maintenance Console Location
9.2 [7-2] Exception Code
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—
9.1 [7-1] Denied Code
TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
PC Programming Manual
875
9.3 [7-3] Special Carrier
9.3 [7-3] Special Carrier
If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access Code is required each time
a trunk call is made. By programming these Special Carrier Access Codes here, Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call
Barring (Barring) can restrict or allow calls to be made by ignoring the codes and looking at the telephone
number only. If a Special Carrier Access Code is found in the dialled number, TRS/Barring will look only at the
following digits.
A maximum of 20 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 100 (with the
KX-TDE600) Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed. With the KX-TDE600, 20 codes are displayed
at a time. To show other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Special Carrier Access Code
Specifies a Special Carrier Access Code. Special Carrier Access Codes and Host PBX Access codes should
be unique.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
9.3 [7-3] Special Carrier
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
876
PC Programming Manual
9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial
9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial
Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk. The
restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring), Account Code—
Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded.
A maximum of 10 emergency numbers can be programmed.
Emergency Number
Specifies the numbers used for making emergency calls. It is not necessary to start the emergency number
with a Trunk Access number.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.2 Emergency Call
PC Programming Manual
877
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. The
following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check, override TRS/Barring, or
switch between TRS/Barring methods.
TRS Override by System Speed Dialling
Enables an outgoing trunk call to override TRS/Barring when the call is made using System Speed Dialling.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
TRS Check for Dial "* #"
Enables a TRS/Barring check for the user-dialled " " and "#". This is useful in preventing unauthorised calls
which could possibly be made through certain telephone company exchanges.
Value Range
No Check, Check
Maintenance Console Location
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
Mode when Dial Time-out before TRS Check
Selects whether a trunk is disconnected if the TRS/Barring check has not been completed when the trunk
Inter-digit timer expires.
Value Range
Disconnect: The trunk is disconnected as soon as the timer expires.
878
PC Programming Manual
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Keep: The TRS/Barring check is performed when the timer expires.
Maintenance Console Location
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits
Specifies a limit to be placed on the number of digits which can be dialled after an extension user receives a
trunk call. If the number of dialled digits exceeds the programmed limit, the line will be disconnected.
Value Range
None, 1–7
Maintenance Console Location
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
TRS Check after EFA
Enables TRS/Barring to check the digits dialled after External Feature Access (EFA) during a trunk call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
879
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6)
Selects the method of TRS/Barring to be used for restricting calls. The level of TRS/Barring is determined by
the telephone codes set in the Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables.
Value Range
Deny Table 2_N + Except Table N_6: The Denied Code Tables for the higher levels are applied to all levels
below it, and the Exception Code Tables for the lower levels are applied to all levels above it.
Deny Table N + Except Table N: Each level has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes,
which are only applied to that level.
Maintenance Console Location
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
880
PC Programming Manual
Section 10
[8] ARS
PC Programming Manual
881
10.1 [8-1] System Setting
10.1 [8-1] System Setting
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call is made,
according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and modified in order to
connect it to the appropriate carrier.
ARS Mode
Selects the condition to determine when to operate ARS.
Value Range
Off: ARS is disabled.
On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using Idle Line Access
method.
On for Any CO Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using Idle Line Access,
Trunk Access, or S-CO Line Access method.
Maintenance Console Location
10.1 [8-1] System Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Mode When Any Carrier is not programmed for the Dial
Selects what happens when the dialled number is not found in
Number.
Leading Number in 10.2 [8-2] Leading
Value Range
Disconnect: the line will be disconnected.
Local Access: the dialled number will be handled by Idle Line Access method.
Maintenance Console Location
10.1 [8-1] System Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
882
PC Programming Manual
10.2 [8-2] Leading Number
10.2 [8-2] Leading Number
Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS feature.
A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can select a
Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
The additional (remaining) number of digits can also be specified for each leading number. The additional
(remaining) number of digits must be specified only when "#", for example, is needed after the dialled number.
The "#" will be added after the programmed number of digits of the user-dialled number (excluding the leading
number).
100 leading numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of leading numbers, click the applicable
tab.
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)
Maintenance Console Location
10.2 [8-2] Leading Number
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Additional Number of Digits
Specifies the additional (remaining) number of digits following each leading number.
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
10.2 [8-2] Leading Number
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
PC Programming Manual
883
10.2 [8-2] Leading Number
Routing Plan Number
Specifies the Routing Plan Table number used for each leading number.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–16
For KX-TDE600:
1–48
Maintenance Console Location
10.2 [8-2] Leading Number
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
884
PC Programming Manual
10.3 [8-3] Routing Plan Time
10.3 [8-3] Routing Plan Time
The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There
are 16 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 48 (with the KX-TDE600) Routing
Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired Routing Plan Table
number from the Routing Plan list.
• To adjust the currently displayed Routing Plan, click and drag the divisions between two time periods.
• To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Routing Plan, including adding or deleting time
blocks, click Time Setting.
PC Programming Manual
885
10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting
10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting
The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the
selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins.
Time-A–D—Setting
Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Time-A–D—Hour, Minute
Specifies the start time for each time block.
Value Range
00:00–23:59
Maintenance Console Location
10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
886
PC Programming Manual
10.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority
10.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority
The carrier priority (1 through 6) in a Routing Plan Table can be programmed for each time zone of each day
of the week. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired day
of the week by clicking the applicable tab.
Time-A–Time-D
Specifies the carrier to be given priority for each time zone.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
None, 1–10
For KX-TDE600:
None, 1–48
Maintenance Console Location
10.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
PC Programming Manual
887
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Carrier
It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A
maximum of 10 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 48 (with the KX-TDE600)
different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature.
Carrier Name
Specifies the carrier name.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Removed Number of Digits
Specifies the number of leading digits to remove from the user-dialled number.
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Modify Command
Specifies the commands to modify the user-dialled number to access the carrier. For details of each command,
see the Feature Guide.
888
PC Programming Manual
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Value Range
Max. 16 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, #, C, P, A, G, I and H)
Maintenance Console Location
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Carrier Access Code
Specifies the carrier access code. The carrier access code can be added to the user-dialled number by
specifying "C" in Modify Command on this screen.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
TRG 01–TRG 64 (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/TRG
01–TRG 96 (for KX-TDE600)
Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier.
TRG 01–TRG 64 (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/TRG
01–TRG 96 (for KX-TDE600)
Enables each trunk group for each carrier. If a cell is highlighted in blue, that trunk group is enabled for use
with that carrier.
Value Range
OFF (white), ON (blue)
PC Programming Manual
889
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Maintenance Console Location
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Authorisation Code for Tenant
Specifies an Authorisation code for each tenant. The Authorisation codes can be added to the user-dialled
number by specifying "A" command in Modify Command on the Carrier tab.
Authorisation Code for Tenant—Tenant 1–Tenant 32
Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each tenant.
Note
For the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200, only up to 8 tenants are available.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
10.6 [8-5] Carrier
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
2.2.3 Tenant Service
890
PC Programming Manual
10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception
10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception
Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled number
includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line Access method if
ARS Mode in 10.1 [8-1] System Setting is "on".
A maximum of 200 different leading number exceptions can be programmed. 40 leading number exception
entries are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other sets, click the applicable tab.
Leading Number Exception
Specifies the leading number exception.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)
Maintenance Console Location
10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
PC Programming Manual
891
10.8 [8-7] Authorisation Code for TRG
10.8 [8-7] Authorisation Code for TRG
An Authorisation code can be specified for each trunk group. The Authorisation codes entered here can be
added to user-dialled numbers by adding "G" to the Modify Command specified on the Carrier tab of screen
10.6 [8-5] Carrier.
8 trunk groups are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other groups, click the applicable tab.
Authorisation Code for Trunk Group—TRG 01–TRG 64 (for KX-NCP500/
KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/TRG 01–TRG 96 (for KX-TDE600)
Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each trunk group.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
10.8 [8-7] Authorisation Code for TRG
Programming Manual References
10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier—
Modify Command
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
892
PC Programming Manual
Section 11
[9] Private Network
PC Programming Manual
893
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective
communications between company members at different locations.
A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make
unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the trunk route to be
used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
There are two types of routing methods: the Extension Number Method, where all extensions in the network
are given a unique extension number; and the PBX Code Method, where each PBX is given a unique code,
which is dialled before the extension number to call an extension at another PBX.
Two priority sets (from a total of 8) are displayed at a time. To display other priority sets, click the applicable
tab.
Using a private network, up to 8 PBXs can share one VPS (centralised VM) connected to another PBX. This
VPS can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network.
Only extension numbers of 4 digits or less, using the Extension Number Method, are supported.
Own PBX Code
Specifies the PBX code of the local PBX, when using PBX Code Method numbering on a TIE line network. If
this cell is left empty, the Extension Number Method is used.
Value Range
Max. 7 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
Priority 1–Priority 8
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of others in the TIE line
network.
Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
894
PC Programming Manual
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
Removed Number of Digits
Specifies the number of leading digits of the dialled number to be removed for each priority.
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits for each priority.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
Trunk Group
Specifies the trunk group to be used for TIE line calls for each priority.
PC Programming Manual
895
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
None, 1–64
For KX-TDE600:
None, 1–96
Maintenance Console Location
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
Enhanced QSIG
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of other PBXs in the TIE line
network.
Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.5 QSIG Enhanced Features
Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required)
Enables Network Message Waiting information to be sent from the PBX to which the VPS is attached to
extensions connected to other PBXs in the network.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
896
PC Programming Manual
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Maintenance Console Location
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.5 QSIG Enhanced Features
PC Programming Manual
897
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting notifications
over a network of PBXs can be programmed.
Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on a Network
DSS (NDSS) button. Network Message Waiting notifications are used for the Centralised VM feature, and a
VPS can send notifications to extensions connected to any PBX in the network.
Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID
Specifies the Network ID of the PBX, for Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). This parameter must be
set in correspondence with the Network IDs assigned to other PBXs in the network.
Network IDs 1-8 can only be assigned to one PBX each within a network. Assigning the same Network ID to
two PBXs will cause network data transmission problems.
Changing this value in Interactive mode will automatically clear any NDSS Link Data.
Value Range
0: The PBX retransmits BLF data sent by other PBXs.
1: The PBX receives BLF data sent by other PBXs.
2–8: The PBX transmits BLF data over the network.
Maintenance Console Location
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data
Transmission VoIP->ISDN
Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from a VoIP port through any ISDN ports that are set to transmit
BLF data.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Networking Data Transfer
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Networking Data Transfer
898
PC Programming Manual
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data
Transmission ISDN->VoIP
Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from an ISDN port through any VoIP ports that are set to transmit
BLF data.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Programming Manual References
11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)—
IP-GW Card Slot No. to notify BLF data to Network Operator
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data
Transmission Counter
Specifies the maximum number of "hops", or transmissions between two PBXs, before a packet of BLF data
is discarded.
Value Range
1–63
Maintenance Console Location
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data
Broadcasting Interval Timer
Specifies the frequency of BLF data transmission. The PBX will send data over the network periodically
according to the interval specified here.
PC Programming Manual
899
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Value Range
100 ´ n (n=0–30) ms
Maintenance Console Location
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data
Re-transmission : Repeat Counter
Specifies the number of times re-transmission of network message waiting notifications is repeated before
being cancelled.
Value Range
0–10
Maintenance Console Location
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table—
Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required)
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail
Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data
Re-transmission : Repeat Timer
Specifies the length of time between repeated re-transmission of network message waiting notifications.
Value Range
10–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
900
PC Programming Manual
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table—
Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required)
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail
PC Programming Manual
901
11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)
11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)
This screen allows network operators to be programmed. A network operator is an extension at a remote PBX
that will monitor other PBX extensions using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). The settings on this
screen should be programmed at the PBX that is to be monitored ( Network Data Transmission for
Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID 2–8). Up to 8 network operators can be programmed.
Network Operator Extension No.
Specifies the number of an extension at the monitor PBX (the PBX whose Network Data Transmission
for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID is set to 1 in 11.2 [9-2] Network Data
Transmission). Any extension at the monitor PBX can be specified here.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)
Programming Manual References
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission—
Network PBX ID
Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
IP-GW Card Slot No. to notify BLF data to Network Operator
Specifies the slot number (with the KX-TDE600, shelf and slot number) of the card used to send extension
status data. This setting is only required when using VoIP to transmit data.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500:
Undefined, 1–3, V-1–V-2
For KX-NCP1000:
Undefined, 1–4, V-1–V-4
For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
Undefined, 1–11, V-1–V-4
For KX-TDE600:
Undefined, 1-1–4-11, V-1–V-4
Maintenance Console Location
11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)
902
PC Programming Manual
11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)
Programming Manual References
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
PC Programming Manual
903
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can
be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an
extension, the extension must be registered here first.
To clear NDSS link data, click the NDSS Clear button.
Note that the parameters on this screen can only be set when the Network Data Transmission for Centralised
Operator Feature—Network PBX ID is set to 1 in the 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission screen.
Network Extension No.
Specifies the number of the remote extension (attached to another PBX) that will be monitored. The number
input here can use either Extension Number Method or PBX Code Method.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30 Networking Features—1.30.1 TIE Line Service
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
Network Extension Name for Programming Reference
Specifies the name of the network extension. This name is only shown here, not on the displays of extensions.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
904
PC Programming Manual
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
Network PBX ID of Network Extension to be monitored
Indicates the Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID of the PBX
that the extension is connected to (reference only).
Value Range
None, 1–8
Maintenance Console Location
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
Programming Manual References
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission—
Network PBX ID
Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
PC Programming Manual
905
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
906
PC Programming Manual
Section 12
[10] CO & Incoming Call
PC Programming Manual
907
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 96 (with the KX-TDE600) trunk groups.
For KX-TDE600, all supported cards are displayed in the Select Shelf & Slot list. Select the shelf and slot and
card type to programme, or select "All" to display all matching cards.
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type and/or position to which each trunk card belongs (reference only).
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
Physical, Virtual
For KX-TDE600:
Shelf number, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each trunk card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
908
PC Programming Manual
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Card Type
Indicates the type of card to which the trunk is connected (reference only).
Value Range
Card type
Maintenance Console Location
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CO Name
Specifies the trunk name which is shown on the extension’s display when receiving a call from the trunk.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
909
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Feature Guide References
1.20.4 Display Information
Trunk Group Number
Specifies the trunk group number to which the trunk belongs.
When a V-IPGW card is installed, the value is automatically set to "7" for the corresponding trunks.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–64
For KX-TDE600:
1–96
Maintenance Console Location
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.2 Group
910
PC Programming Manual
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Dialling In (DDI)/Direct Inward Dialling (DID) can be selected for each trunk as
the method of distributing incoming trunk calls to certain destinations. For each trunk to which DIL distribution
is set, different destinations can be programmed depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). If
desired, Calling Line Identification (CLI) distribution can be used in conjunction with DIL distribution.
For KX-TDE600, all supported cards are displayed in the Select Shelf & Slot list with their shelf and slot
numbers. Select the card to programme, or select "All" to display all matching cards.
DIL
For each trunk to which DIL distribution is set, different DIL destinations can be programmed depending on
the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). Generally, DIL distribution is used for trunk calls from analogue trunks.
Tenant number and VM trunk group number can also be programmed for each trunk.
To assign DIL destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only).
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
Physical, Virtual
For KX-TDE600:
Shelf number, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each trunk card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
PC Programming Manual
911
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Card Type
Indicates the trunk card type (reference only).
Value Range
Card type
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only).
Value Range
Public, Private(TIE), VPN
912
PC Programming Manual
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
1.30.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)
Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card
type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.
Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive
DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls
MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the DIL destination in each time mode.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
PC Programming Manual
913
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time
of day.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–8
For KX-TDE600:
1–32
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service
VM Trunk Group No.
Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the DIL destination is the floating extension
number of a VM (DPT) Group.
The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.
Value Range
1–48
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
914
PC Programming Manual
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
CLI for DIL
When CLI distribution is enabled for a trunk to which DIL distribution is set, incoming trunk calls will be
distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DIL destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found
in the System Speed Dialling Table.
CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis.
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only).
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
Physical, Virtual
For KX-TDE600:
Shelf number, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each trunk card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
PC Programming Manual
915
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Card Type
Indicates the trunk card type (reference only).
Value Range
Card type
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only).
Value Range
Public, Private(TIE), VPN
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
916
PC Programming Manual
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
1.30.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)
Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card
type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.
Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive
DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls
MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution
DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
For each trunk to which DDI/DID distribution is set, or for each trunk whose Trunk Property on this screen
is Private (TIE), modification parameters for DDI/DID number and TIE line call numbers can be programmed.
PC Programming Manual
917
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Shelf
Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only).
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
Physical, Virtual
For KX-TDE600:
Shelf number, Virtual
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each trunk card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
918
PC Programming Manual
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Card Type
Indicates the trunk card type (reference only).
Value Range
Card type
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only).
Value Range
Public, Private(TIE), VPN
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
1.30.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)
Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card
type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.
PC Programming Manual
919
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive
DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls
MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming called number for DDI/DID distribution
or for TIE line service.
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming called number in the place of the removed digits for DDI/
DID distribution or for TIE line service.
Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
920
PC Programming Manual
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Maintenance Console Location
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
PC Programming Manual
921
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID number
has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID number will be
distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller’s identification number is
found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table. CLI distribution can be enabled
or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a DDI/DID number basis.
A maximum of 1000 DDI/DID numbers can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 numbers are
displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.
To assign DDI/DID destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting). It is possible to programme DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode
(day/lunch/break/night) for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Automatic Registration, or to
programme DDI/DID names for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Name Generate.
DDI / DID Number
Specifies the DDI/DID number.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Programming Manual References
12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
DDI / DID Name
Specifies the name for the DDI/DID number which is shown on the extension’s display when receiving a call
with the DDI/DID number. The name of the DDI/DID number can be printed out on SMDR.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Programming Manual References
12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate
13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—DDI/DID Number & Name
922
PC Programming Manual
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
DDI / DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the DDI/DID destination in each time mode.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time
of day.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–8
For KX-TDE600:
1–32
Maintenance Console Location
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Programming Manual References
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
PC Programming Manual
923
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
VM Trunk Group No.
Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the DID destination is the floating extension
number of a VM (DPT) Group.
The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.
Value Range
1–48
Maintenance Console Location
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Programming Manual References
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution
924
PC Programming Manual
12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration
12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration
Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/
break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.
Beginning Entry Location
Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
Value Range
1–1000
Maintenance Console Location
12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Generate DDI/DID Number (From)
Specifies the DID number of the first location to be programmed. DDI/DID numbers for subsequent locations
will be generated automatically, by adding one to the value of the previous location.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Number of Registration
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
Value Range
1–1000
PC Programming Manual
925
12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration
Maintenance Console Location
12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the number of the DDI/DID destination in each time mode for the first location to be programmed. If
the same destination is to be used for all locations for a certain time mode, click the appropriate Same all
check box. If the Same all check box for a certain time mode is not clicked, the destination numbers for
subsequent locations will be generated automatically, by adding one to the value of the previous location for
that time mode.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
926
PC Programming Manual
12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate
12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate
Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.
If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded.
Beginning Entry Location
Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
Value Range
1–1000
Maintenance Console Location
12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Number to Generate
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
Value Range
1–1000
Maintenance Console Location
12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
No. of Digits to Delete
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of a DDI/DID number when using it as part of the
DDI/DID name.
Value Range
0–32
PC Programming Manual
927
12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate
Maintenance Console Location
12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Name Prefix
Specifies the text to be included at the start of each DDI/DID name.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Name Suffix
Specifies the text to be included at the end of each DDI/DID name.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate
Programming Manual References
12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
928
PC Programming Manual
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line calls with Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) can be
distributed to a certain destination. Each MSN has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/
break/night).
A maximum of 10 MSNs can be programmed for each ISDN-BRI port.
To use this feature, Access Mode in 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port must be set to P-MP.
For KX-TDE600, all installed BRI cards set to MSN distribution are displayed in the Select Shelf & Slot list
with their shelf and slot numbers. Select the card to programme, or select "All" to display all matching cards.
MSN
To assign MSN destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number
Setting).
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual
929
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Port
Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
MSN Number
Specifies the MSN.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
MSN Name
Specifies the name for the MSN which is shown on the extension’s display when receiving a call with the MSN.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
930
PC Programming Manual
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
MSN Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the MSN destination in each time mode.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time
of day.
Value Range
For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200:
1–8
For KX-TDE600:
1–32
Maintenance Console Location
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
VM Trunk Group No.
Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the MSN destination is the floating extension
number of a VM (DPT) Group.
PC Programming Manual
931
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller.
Value Range
1–48
Maintenance Console Location
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
CLI for MSN
When CLI distribution is enabled for an ISDN-BRI line to which MSN distribution is set, incoming trunk calls
will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the MSN destinations) if the caller’s identification number
is found in the System Speed Dialling Table.
CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis.
Shelf (KX-TDE600 only)
Indicates the shelf number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).
Value Range
Shelf number
Maintenance Console Location
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Slot
Indicates the slot position of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
932
PC Programming Manual
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Maintenance Console Location
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CLI Ring for MSN—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
12.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution
PC Programming Manual
933
12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous
12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous
The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when
there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination.
Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.)
Enables the Intercept Routing—DND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND mode.
Value Range
Disable (Busy Tone): Sends a busy tone to the caller. (However, a call through an LCOT or T1 [LCOT/
GCOT] card will ring at the original destination while the caller hears a ringback tone.)
Enable: Redirects the call to the intercept destination
Maintenance Console Location
12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not
programmed.)
Enables the Intercept Routing—No Destination feature to activate when there is no destination for the call.
(The Intercept Routing—No Destination feature always works for calls through an LCOT or T1 [LCOT/GCOT]
card, even when this feature is disabled.)
Value Range
Disable (Reorder Tone): Sends a reorder tone to the caller
Enable: Redirects the call to an operator
Maintenance Console Location
12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination
934
PC Programming Manual
12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous
Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call
Enables the Intercept Routing feature to operate for extension calls.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination
PC Programming Manual
935
12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous
936
PC Programming Manual
Section 13
[11] Maintenance
PC Programming Manual
937
13.1 [11-1] Main
13.1 [11-1] Main
SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and
outgoing calls.
SMDR Format—Type
Selects the format of SMDR output.
Value Range
Type A: 80 digits without call charge information
Type B: 80 digits with call charge information
Type C: 120 digits
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
SMDR Format—Port
Selects the Serial Interface port that is used to output the SMDR data.
Value Range
None, LAN, RS-232C
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
SMDR Format—Page Length (Number of Lines)
Specifies the number of lines on a page of output paper. Match the SMDR output to the paper size being used
in the printer.
938
PC Programming Manual
13.1 [11-1] Main
Value Range
4–99
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines)
Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page. The number of lines for the skip perforation
should be shorter than the page length.
Value Range
0–95
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
SMDR Format—Date Format
Selects the printed date format.
Value Range
MM-DD-YY, DD-MM-YY, YY-MM-DD, YY-DD-MM
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
939
13.1 [11-1] Main
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
SMDR Format—Time Format (12H / 24H)
Selects whether times are displayed using the 12- or 24-hour format.
Value Range
12H, 24H
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Print Information—Outgoing Call
Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing trunk calls are printed. Class of Service (COS) programming
determines the printable records.
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—
Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR)
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Print Information—Incoming Call
Specifies whether the information relating to incoming trunk calls, such as caller’s identification name and
number, is printed.
Value Range
No Print, Print
940
PC Programming Manual
13.1 [11-1] Main
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Print Information—Intercom Call
Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing intercom calls are printed.
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Print Information—Log-in / Log-out
Specifies whether the log-in/log-out status is printed.
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
PC Programming Manual
941
13.1 [11-1] Main
Print Information—Hotel Room Status
Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR.
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
1.27.2 Room Status Control
Print Information—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR.
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
1.28.4 Timed Reminder
Print Information—Error Log
Specifies whether PBX error log information is output to SMDR.
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
942
PC Programming Manual
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
2.4.3 Local Alarm Information
SMDR Options
Option—ARS Dial
Selects the type of the dialled number to be printed for a call with the ARS feature.
Value Range
Dial before ARS Modification: The user-dialled number
Dial after ARS Modification: The ARS modified number
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.10 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option—Caller ID Number & Name
Selects the printing format of caller identifications for incoming trunk calls.
Value Range
None, Number, Name, Name + Number
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
PC Programming Manual
943
13.1 [11-1] Main
Option—DDI/DID Number & Name
Selects the printing format of incoming trunk calls with a DDI/DID number.
Value Range
None, Number, Name, Name + Number
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option—Secret Dial
Selects the printing format of calls with a secret dial. The secret dial conceals all or part of the dialled number.
Note that selecting Dial before ARS Modification in Option—ARS Dial on this screen indicates the dialled
numbers as dots regardless of this setting.
Value Range
Print "...." (Secret), Print Dialled Number
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.1 Memory Dialling Features—SUMMARY
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option—Privacy Mode
Selects whether private dialling is enabled or disabled, and how many digits to hide when enabled.
To enable this setting, Print Information—Outgoing Call on the SMDR tab should be set to Print.
Value Range
Print Dialled Number: Disables private dialling; all dialled numbers are shown on SMDR.
No Print: No dialled number will be shown on SMDR.
Secret "X", Secret "XX", Secret "XXX", Secret "XXXX": The selected number of digits at the end of dialled
telephone numbers, and any additional digits dialled after connection, are shown on SMDR as "X".
944
PC Programming Manual
13.1 [11-1] Main
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR—
Print Information—Outgoing Call
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option—Condition Code "RC"
Specifies whether the time of receiving an incoming trunk call is printed.
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option—Condition Code "AN"
Specifies whether the time of answering an incoming trunk call is printed.
Value Range
No Print, Print
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
PC Programming Manual
945
13.1 [11-1] Main
Option—Caller ID Modification
Specifies whether Caller ID numbers are recorded on SMDR as received (before being modified by the PBX)
or after being modified.
Value Range
Before Modification, After Modification
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Emergency Call Notification
Specifies if an emergency call is recorded on SMDR only when the call is completed, or when the call is initially
dialled as well.
Value Range
End of Call, Start and End of Call
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
LAN—SMDR Port Number
Specifies the port number used to output SMDR data via the LAN.
Value Range
1–65535
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
946
PC Programming Manual
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
LAN—SMDR Password
Specifies the password used to output the SMDR data via the LAN.
Value Range
Max. 10 characters
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
LAN—New Line Code for Telnet
Specifies the new line code for a terminal emulator.
If the terminal emulator automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return).
If not, select CR + LF (Line Feed).
Value Range
CR + LF, CR
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
RS-232C
Communication—Baud Rate
Specifies the data transmission speed from the PBX to the printer or personal computer.
PC Programming Manual
947
13.1 [11-1] Main
To ensure stable transmission, when changing this setting to 57600 or 115200 bps, set
—Flow on this screen to Hardware.
Communication
Value Range
2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C—
Communication—Flow
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Communication—NL Code
Specifies the NL (New Line) code for the printer or personal computer.
If the printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return).
If not, select CR + LF (Line Feed).
Value Range
CR + LF, CR
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Communication—Parity Bit
Selects a parity bit code that indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing
a character.
Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the printer or personal computer.
Value Range
None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
948
PC Programming Manual
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Communication—Word Length
Specifies the number of bits in each byte of a character.
When connecting the Maintenance Console to the PBX using an RS-232C cable, assign the following values
to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port of the PBX:
Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: None, Stop Bit: 1 bit
Notice
Do not use the following combinations:
• Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: Space, Stop Bit: 1 bit
• Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: Mark, Stop Bit: 2 bit
• Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: Space, Stop Bit: 2 bit
Value Range
7 bit, 8 bit
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Communication—Flow
Enables the hardware flow control.
Value Range
None, Hardware
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual
949
13.1 [11-1] Main
Feature Guide References
None
Communication—Stop Bit
Selects a stop bit code that indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character.
Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the printer or personal computer.
Value Range
1 bit, 2 bit
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
External Modem Command—Automatic Initialisation
Specifies the command to automatically initialise an external modem when it is plugged into the Serial Interface
(RS-232C) port of the PBX.
Value Range
Max. 30 characters
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.1 PC Programming
External Modem Command—Manual Initialisation 1–Manual Initialisation 5
Specifies the command to manually initialise an external modem. The command specified here is controlled
by PT system programming (External Modem Control [801]).
Value Range
Max. 30 characters
950
PC Programming Manual
13.1 [11-1] Main
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.1 PC Programming
Maintenance
Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2
Specifies the extension numbers of PTs that will be notified by the PBX about local alarms. When the PBX
detects a PBX error, the System Alarm button on the PT turns on red. When this button is pressed, the display
will show the error number, and the button light will turn off automatically.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.4.3 Local Alarm Information
Daily Test Start Time—Set
Enables the daily self check of the PBX for local alarm and error log.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.4.3 Local Alarm Information
PC Programming Manual
951
13.1 [11-1] Main
Daily Test Start Time—Hour
Specifies the hour of the PBX daily self check start time.
Value Range
0–23
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.4.3 Local Alarm Information
Daily Test Start Time—Minute
Specifies the minute of the PBX daily self check start time.
Value Range
0–59
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.4.3 Local Alarm Information
Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter)
Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if network message waiting information is deleted after
re-transmission is repeated for the number of times specified in Network MSW Data Transmission for
Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter in 11.2 [9-2] Network Data
Transmission.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
952
PC Programming Manual
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required)
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission— Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—
Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail
Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)
Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if the quantity of network message waiting information being
re-transmitted is larger than the transmission buffer.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table—
Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required)
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail
Syslog
Syslog
Enables the PBX to output local alarm information to a syslog server.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.2 Syslog Record Management
PC Programming Manual
953
13.1 [11-1] Main
Syslog—Syslog Server IP Address
Specifies the IP address of a syslog server.
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.2 Syslog Record Management
Syslog—Major
Selects whether to output major alarm information to a syslog server.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.2 Syslog Record Management
Syslog—Minor
Selects whether to output minor alarm information to a syslog server.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
954
PC Programming Manual
13.1 [11-1] Main
Feature Guide References
1.26.1.2 Syslog Record Management
Remote
Remote—Analogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number for analogue remote maintenance. To enable this setting, an RMT
card must be installed, and Remote—Remote Programming on this screen must be enabled.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.1 PC Programming
Remote—ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number for ISDN remote maintenance. To enable this setting,
Remote Programming on this screen must be enabled.
Remote—
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.1 PC Programming
Remote—Remote Programming
Enables system programming, diagnosis, and data upload from a remote location.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
PC Programming Manual
955
13.1 [11-1] Main
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.1 PC Programming
Remote—Password Lock Counter for Remote Programming
Specifies the number of successive incorrect password entries allowed before remote access is locked.
Value Range
None, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.1 PC Programming
Remote—Remote Maintenance Dial Number (Own Telephone number for
reference)
Specifies the telephone number of the PBX used to access the PBX from a remote location for maintenance
purposes.
This number can be specified by Quick Setup.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.4 Quick Setup
956
PC Programming Manual
13.1 [11-1] Main
Password
Passwords authorise the user to programme the extension and the PBX by a PT or a personal computer.
System Password - PT Programming—Prog ** : User Level
Specifies the user level system password to authorise the PT user to access only the permitted system
programming.
Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.2 PT Programming
System Password - PT Programming—Prog *# : Administrator Level
Specifies the administrator level system password to authorise the PT user to access all system programming.
Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.2 PT Programming
Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1
Specifies the manager password to authorise the PT user to access manager programming.
Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
PC Programming Manual
957
13.1 [11-1] Main
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.6 Manager Features
System Password - PC Programming—User Level
Specifies the system password used to access Maintenance Console at User Level. This password can only
be set in Interactive mode.
Value Range
4–10 characters
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.1 PC Programming
System Password - PC Programming—Administrator Level
Specifies the system password used to access Maintenance Console at Administrator Level. This password
can only be set in Interactive mode.
Value Range
4–10 characters
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.1 PC Programming
958
PC Programming Manual
13.1 [11-1] Main
System Password - PC Programming—Installer Level
Specifies the system password used to access Maintenance Console at Installer Level. This password can
only be set in Interactive mode.
Value Range
4–10 characters
Maintenance Console Location
13.1 [11-1] Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.1 PC Programming
PC Programming Manual
959
13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access
13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access
The programming items accessible at User and Administrator level can be specified.
100 programming item numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable
tab.
Program Number
Indicates the programming item number (reference only).
Value Range
000–999
Maintenance Console Location
13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access
Programmin